MHI

c·opy 3 FM 7 30
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL

INFANTRY, AIRBORNE,
AND MECHANIZED DIVISION
BRIGADES

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

JANUARY 1962
AGO 3326B
 FM 7-30

FIELD MANUAL) HEADQUARTERS,

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 7-30 WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 17 January 1962

INFANTRY, AIRBORNE, AND MECHANIZED

DIVISION BRIGADES

Paragraph Page
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL
Section I. Purpose and scope ----------------------------- 1, 2 3
II. Missions and roles of the infantry, airborne, and ,
mechanized division brigades ----------- 3, 4 4
III. Organization ------------------------- 5 4
IV. Capabilities and limitations ---------------------- 6-12 9
CHAPTER 2. COMMAND AND CONTROL
Section I. Command ------------------ 13, 14 14
II. The brigade staff ---- 15-20 15
III. Combat battalions command and staff ----------- 21 24
IV. Command posts and brigade trains ------------- 22-25 24
CHAPTER 3. THE BRIGADE HEADQUARTERS AND HEAD-
QUARTERS COMPANY.
Section I. General -------- ----- 26 28
II. Brigade headquarters and staff section ------------ 27 28.
III. Company headquarters ------------------------- 28 28
IV. Liaison section -- - - - ------ 29 29
V. Aviation platoon ------------------------------ 30 29
VI. Command vehicle section ----------------------- 31 29
VII. Scout section ----------------------- 32 30
VIII. Communication platoon --------------- 33 31
CHAPTER 4. COMBAT UNITS, COMBAT SUPPORT UNITS,
AND ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT
Section I. General --------------------------- 34 37
II. Combat units --------------------------------- 35-38 37
III. Fire support -- - -- 39-45 42
IV. Intelligence support ---------------------------- 46-52 58
V. Engineer support ------------------------ 53 61
VI. Brigade aviation support ------------- 54-61 62
VII. Other combat support -- -- -- --- 62-64 65
VIII. Organization for combat ------------------------ 65$67 66
CHAPTER 5. ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT
Section I. General ------------------- 68 70
II. Personnel ------------------------------ 69575 72
III. Civil affairs --------------------------------- 76 73
IV. Logistics ------------------- 77-88 74
CHAPTER 6. OFFENSE
Section I. General 89-91 84
II. Planning the attack --------------------------- 92-106 86
III. Movement to contact -------------------------- 107-111 106

TAGO 3326B-December 1
 Paragraph Page

Section IV. Conduct of the attack .-------------- 112-118 111

V. Penetration ---------------------------- 119-122 115
VI. Envelopment ------------------- 123 117
VII. Infiltration ---------------------------- 124-126 119
VIII. Night combat --------------------------------- 127-129 121
IX. Reconnaissance in force ------------------------ 130-132 124
X. Exploitation and pursuit ----------------------- 133-136 125
CHAPTER 7. DEFENSE
Section I. General -------------------------------- 137-139 129
IT. Forms and echelons of defense ------------ 140-145 132
III. Defense planning_----------------------------- 146-152 137
IV. Conduct of the defense .----------------------- 153-155 146
V. Other defensive operations_--------------------- 156-160 152
VI. Brigade as a security force ---------------------- 161-164 155
VII. Brigade in reserve ----------------------------- 165, 166 158
CHAPTER 8. RETROGRADE
Section I. General --- - - - -- - - - 167-172 160
II. Withdrawal ----------------------------- 173-176 163
III. Delaying actions ------------------------- 177-179 166
IV. Retirement_ .-............................. 180, 181 170
V. Withdrawal through a rearward position --------- 182 170
CHAPTER 9. RELIEF OPERATIONS
Section I. General .,------------------------183-186 172
II. The relief .--------------------
---. 187, 188 174
III. Passage of lines .. .............................
-- 189-191 177
CHAPTER 10. OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS
Section I. General .----------------------------------
192 180
II. Airborne operations -------------... .- 193-199 180
III. Linkup operations ----------------------------- 200-202 196
IV. Amphibious operations .-------------------------
203-206 199
V. Antiguerrilla operations --- 207-214 200
VI. River crossings ------------------------------ 215-219 204
VII. Raids, feints, and demonstrations -------------- - 220-222 220
VIII. Combat in fortified and built up areas ---------- 223-226 209
IX. Passage of defiles --........................----- 227 211
APPENDIX I. REFERENCES ---------- 213
II. COMMUNICATION ------------------------- 217
INDEX -------- ________________--
- ___ _-----------------____________ 250

2 AGO 3326B
 CHAPTER 1
GENERAL

Section 1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

1. Purpose
This manual provides guidance for the commander and staff of the
infantry, airborne, and mechanized division brigade and other com-
manders and staffs who are concerned with its employment.

2. Scope
a. This manual describes the organization of and provides specific
doctrine on the functions and operations of the brigade headquarters
and headquarters company of the infantry, airborne, and mechanized
brigades.
b. It includes command, control, communications, tactical and admin-
istrative support, organization for combat, and tactical operations of
the infantry, airborne, and mechanized brigades of the army divisions
and, with appropriate adjustments for minor organizational differences,
the separate brigade organized for combat with a preponderance of in-
fantry, mechanized infantry, or airborne battalions. Generally, the
doctrine herein is applicable to all three types of brigades; the parts of
the text which pertain exclusively to one type brigade are so specified.
c. The manual also includes doctrine for employment of the brigade,
-appropriately reinforced, on independent and semi-independent missions.
d. This manual is a brigade level manual; however, the fundamentals
of tactical operations of the army division as covered in FM 61-100
apply to the brigade, generally. Information on combat support and
administrative support units normally attached to the brigade is included
to the extent necessary for clarity and understanding of brigade opera-
tions. FM 54-2 contains details on logistical organization at division
level and in some cases is applicable to the division and brigade level.
e. Operations under all conditions of warfare for which the brigade
has been tailored are included. The basic material applies to nuclear
and non-active nuclear warfare; essential modifying guidance for situa-
tions short of war and for nonnuclear war has been added. The manual
is designed for use in conjunction with other manuals and training
texts, particularly those for special operations.
f. For brevity only, brigades will be referred to as the infantry, air-
borne, and/or mechanized brigades.
g. Users of this manual are encouraged to submit recommended changes
or comments to improve this manual. Comments should be keyed to the
specific page, paragraph and line of the text in which change is recom-
mended. Reasons should be provided for each comment to insure under-
AGO 3326B 3
standing and complete evaluation. Comments should be forwarded
directly to United States Army Infantry School, Fort Benning, Ga.

Section II. MISSIONS AND ROLES OF THE INFANTRY,

AIRBORNE, AND MECHANIZED DIVISION BRIGADES

3. Mission
a. The Brigade. The mission of the brigade is to close with the
enemy by means of fire and maneuver in order to destroy or capture him,
or to repel his assault by fire, close combat, and counterattack.
b. The Brigade Headquartersand HeadquartersCompany. The mission
of the brigade headquarters and headquarters company is to provide com-
mand and control facilities and limited army aviation support for em-
ployment of attached combat and combat support elements.

4. Roles
In addition to its basic combat mission, the brigade may be employed
to-
a. Supervise the training of combat and combat support units of the
division to which it is assigned.
b. Participate as part of a division or independently in situations short
of war, activities to include a show of force, truce enforcement, inter-
national police action, legal occupation, or in martial law and civil
defense operations.

Section III. ORGANIZATION

5. General Characteristics
a. The Army Division (fig. 1). The Army division is designated as
an infantry, mechanized, armored, or airborne division depending upon
the number and types of combat battalions initially assigned to it.
This strategic tailoring of the division is usually accomplished prior to
its deployment to a particular area of operations. Each Army division
has assigned to it three brigades, normally of the same type as the
division itself, i.e., infantry, mechanized, armor, or airborne. For a
detailed discussion of the organization of the various types of Army
divisions, see FM 61-100.
b. The Brigade. When organized for combat the brigade consists of
a brigade headquarters and headquarters company to which a variable
number of combat battalions and combat support and administrative
support units are attached or placed in support. By the allocation of
combat, combat support, and administrative support units to brigades,
the division internally tailors itself to achieve an optimum capability
to perform an assigned mission in a specific operational environment.
4 AGO 3326B
 I-

~~~io
~~i

g: c~~ 8

u~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

tn~~
~~>
La
zIIILT~~
AG 3326B

AGO 33269 5
The brigade has the capability to accept or release attachments on
short notice, and attachment and detachments to it are made by division
as dictated by the mission and the tactical situation. Examples of
"type" infantry, mechanized, and airborne brigades are shown in figures
2 through 4. The organization and employment of the armored brigade
is covered in appropriate TOE and FM 17--30.
c. Brigade Organization for Combat. Using the combat, combat
support, and administrative support units attached to it or placed in its
support, the brigade organizes for combat to best accomplish its mission.
Maneuver battalions may be employed as pure (all elements of a single
arm) infantry, mechanized, armor, or airborne units; however, when-

ORGANIC
(INCLUDES HQ AND HQ CO)

COMBAT
,,~ . . ATSUPPORT
(105-MM) UNITS

w• (TOWED) NORMALLY
ATTACHED
TO, OR IN
DIRECT
SUPPORT
FWD OF THE
COMD BRIGADE.
ATTACHED COMM
COMBAT
UNITS

FIELD
TRAINS BRIGADE
I~IOOF n I FWD TRAINS.
ATTACHED FWD SPT
BATTALIONS CO AND
MEDICAL CO
ARE DIVISION
ELEMENTS
SUPPORTING
THE BRIGADE.

0 0
0*0
FWD
AREA
SIG
CENTER

Figure 2. Type infantry brigade.

6 AGO S326B
 ORGANIC
(HQ AND HQ CO)

105-MM COMBAT SUPPORT

UNITS NORMALLY
ATTACHED TO OR
(t) IN DIRECT
SUPPORT OF THE
BRIGADE
FWD
COMD
ATTACHED COMM
COMBAT
UNITS

FiS
BRIGADE TRAINS.
FWD SPTCO
AND MED CO
J
wD AREDIVISION
FWD
IN ELEMENTS SUPPORTING
SPT THE BRIGADE.

FIELD
TRAINS
OF ATTACHED
·* · FWD BATTALIONS
AREA
SIG
CENTER j
Figure 3. Type mechanized brigade.

AGO 3326B 7
ever available resources permit, it is preferable to form combined aims
task forces within the brigade by cross attachment of units. For further
details of organization of the brigade for combat see paragraphs 65
through 67.
d. Administrative Support. The brigade is a tactical echelon. The
brigade commander or his designated representative enters the ad-
ministrative chain of command in a control, coordinating, and super-
visory role. When combat and combat support units are attached to

ORGANIC
(HQ AND HQ CO)

105-MM
TOWED COMBAT SUPPORT
UNITS NORMALLY
ATTACHED TO OR
IN DIRECT
ATTACHEDN DIRECT
COMATTA SUPPORT OF THE
COMBATBRIGADE
UNITS UNITSt
ST |BRIGADE
FWD
FWD
COMD
COMM

TANK

SPT BRIGADE TRAINS

FWD SPT CO
AND MED CO
ARE DIVISION
ELEMENTS SUPPORTING
THE BRIGADE.

W\2(FWD
AREA
SIG CENTER

Figure 4. Type airborne brigade.

8 AGO 3326B
the brigade, these units continue to be supported directly by the division
administrative support units attached to or placed in support of the
brigade for this purpose. When the brigade is employed in an inde-
pendent or semi-independent role, necessary administrative support
elements are provided to make the brigade self-sufficient. In this event,
the brigade becomes directly responsible for administrative support
operations for all assigned or attached units. A type infantry brigade
organized for independent or semi-independent operations is shown in
figure 5.
e. Common Base. The organization of the brigade headquarters and
headquarters companies of the infantry, airborne, and mechanized
brigade is the same, except for minor differences in equipment and per-
sonnel. The organization of the brigade headquarters and headquarters
company is shown in figure 6.

Section IV. CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

6. General
a. Basically, the capabilities and limitations of the brigade are de-
termined by the type and number of combat battalions and combat
support and administrative support units attached to or in support of it.
Because the brigade is a tailored, flexible organization, its capabilities
and limitations are established by division to enable it to best accomplish
a particular mission.
b. All three brigade headquarters have the following capabilties,
regardless of the type and number of units which may be attached to or
in support of it at any given time:
(1) Commands and controls up to five attached combat battalions
plus required combat support and administrative support units
in offensive and defensive combat operations in nuclear and
nonnuclear war.
(2) Accepts or releases attached elements on short notice.
(3) Conducts brigade operations on a sustained 24-hour-a-day basis.
(4) Supervises the movement and security of attached or supporting
elements.
(5) Supervises tactical training of attached elements.
(6) Acts as an emergency alternate operational headquarters for the
division in the event the latter is incapable of operating.
(7) Provides limited Army aviation support to attached elements.

7. Capabilities of the Brigade

All three types of infantry brigades have the following capabilities:
a. Closes with and destroys or captures the enemy by means of fire
and maneuver.
AGO 38326B 9
 ORGANIC
(HQ AND HQ CO)

w 2 (TOWED)

(105-MM)

[~ J2 ~(TOWED)
(8-IN)

rm1
0O

FWD
COMD
COMM

NOTE: ALL UNITS ARE ATTACHED.

MAI

AREA FIELD
SIG TRAINS
CENTER OF
ATf'"ACHED
'BATTALIONS

Figure 5. Infantry brigade organized for independent operations.

AGO 3326B
10
 u F"I

z I
.2
U

> o _
0

0 Z 3:~~

Z~~~~
0
O8
I
~o6o

0I z
RI I0

Z§
3326B
AGO 0

ol ~~~Z

0
Z

AGO 3326B 11
 b. Conducts ground offensive and defensive operations under all con-
ditions of weather and terrain, with or without nuclear support.
c. Seizes and holds terrain.
d. Conducts airmobile operations when provided adequate aircraft.
e. Conducts independent and semi-independent operations when ap-
propriately reinforced.
f. Conducts antiguerrilla operations.
g. Conducts infiltration operations.
h. Participates in joint amphibious and joint airborne operations.
i. Exploits the effects of nuclear weapons with mobility and fire power.

8. The Mechanized Brigade

In addition to the capabilities listed in paragraph 7, the mechanized
brigade-
a. Possesses a high degree of cross-country mobility, coupled with
light armor protection for infantry.
b. Exploits the effects of nuclear weapons with emphasis on speed and
with a degree of protection against the effects of radiation.
c. Provides a highly mobile penetration exploitation, and pursuit force.
d. Acts as a mobile counterattack force for the division in mobile
defense.
e. Traverses inland waterways while mounted (infantry elements).
9. The Airborne Brigade
In addition to the capabilities listed in paragraph 7, the airborne
brigade is capable of conducting frequent airborne assaults by parachute
or air landing with minimum marshalling and planning procedures, and
of operating with somewhat reduced logistical support.
10. Limitations
a. The infantry and airborne brigades have ground mobility limited to
walking speed, no armor protection, and limited protection against armor.
b. The mechanized brigade loses its mechanized capabilities when it
engages in airmobile and/or joint airborne operations. Its vehicular
mobility is restricted by jungle, mountainous, and other rugged terrain.
The capability of armored personnel carriers (APC) to cross water
obstacles is limited by steep banks or water currents in excess of 9.6
KMPH (6.6 KMPH for the M113). The mechanized brigade's
logistical requirements are greater than the infantry or airborne brigade.
c. The mobility of tank units attached to all three type brigades may-
be restricted by terrain obstacles and high logistical support requirements.
11. Independent and Semi-Independent Brigades
(fig. 5)
In addition to the capabilities listed in paragraphs 7 through 9 in-
fantry, airborne, and mechanized brigades appropriately reinforced with

12 AGO 8326B
combat, combat support, and administrative support units for indepen-
dent and semi-independent employment have the capability of sustain-
ing themselves in combat for extended periods of time when supported
logistically by field army installations.

12. Mobility
a. Air.
(1) The headquarters and headquarters companies of all three
type brigades are air transportable, and the airborne brigade
headquarters and headquarters company can be delivered by
parachute landing (par. 194).
(2) For the air transportability characteristics of the combat,
combat support and administrative support units normally
attached as part of brigade, see paragraph 194 and FM 7-20
and 61-100.
b. Vehicular.
(1) All personnel and equipment of the headquarters and head-
quarters companies of all three type brigades can be trans-
ported in one lift using their organic transportation.
(2) The vehicular mobility of the brigade when organized for
combat is restricted by the limited tactical ground transport
organic to the attached infantry and airborne battalions. For
the techniques of using trucks and armored personnel carriers
(APC) to motorize or mechanize the infantry and airborne
battalion, see FM 7-20.

AGO 8326B 13
 CHAPTER 2
COMMAND AND CONTROL

Section I. COMMAND
13. Brigade Commander
a. The brigade commander has overall responsibility for the command
and control of his brigade in training and in combat. He must be pre-
pared for and capable of commanding diverse combinations of combat and
combat support and administrative support units under all conditions of
nuclear, non-active nuclear, and nonnuclear war in all kinds of weather
and terrain. The flexible organizational characteristics of the brigade
demands that the commander have complete knowledge and understand-
ing of combined arms operations, and that his leadership, mental alert-
ness, and adaptability to change be of the highest order.
b. He makes rapid and positive decisions and is capable of operating
with mission-type orders from higher headquarters which require exercise
of personal initiative and professional judgment in execution. In turn, he
provides his subordinate commanders with adequate guidance for their
operations and allows them freedom of action in implementing his orders.
He is alert to exploit the opportunities for decisive results which arise in
combat, and is willing to take calculated risks to accomplish his mission.
Once he elects a course of action, he pursues it vigorously and aggressively,
and inspires these qualities in his staff, his subordinate commanders,
and his troops.
c. In situations short of war, particularly those involving deployment
of his brigade in oversea areas, the commander must have a thorough
understanding of the people with whom he deals, and the ability to adapt
his concepts and thinking to the political and other limitations which
may be imposed on the use of his force.
d. For a discussion of the commander's responsibilities in the function-
ing of the brigade communications system to support his operations,
see appendix II.

14. Command Channels and Succession of Command

a. The brigade commander exercises command over the elements
attached to his brigade. The attached combat battalion commanders
are his principal subordinates, and his relation with them is direct and
personal. The brigade commander, as one of the principal commanders
of the division, operates directly under the division commander and has
complete access to him at all times.
b. The succession of command is based on seniority. The procedure
for succession of command posts within the division is clearly specified
by the division commander. The brigade commander must be ready to

14 AGO 3326B
assume command of the division in accordance with the order of succession
in the event the division commander becomes a casualty. His staff must
be prepared to function as the division command element if it becomes
inoperable. Similarly, the brigade commander makes provision for an
alternate headquarters in the event his headquarters is unable to function.
He usually designates a battalion headquarters as the alternate and suc-
cessor brigade command headquarters.

Section II. THE BRIGADE STAFF

15. General
a. The brigade staff's primary purpose is to assist the commander in
the exercise of his command. Staff actions must be thorough, accom-
plished rapidly, recommendations submitted promptly, and instructions,
based on the commander's decision, issued without delay. Efficient staff
action reduces the number of details requiring command action, and
thereby frees the commander for the important functions of command.
b. Brigade staff officers must establish and maintain close and harmo-
nious relationships with the commanders and staffs of attached and
supporting units. Frequent staff visits to these units accomplish this
and assist the staff in supervising and coordinating the execution of the
commander's orders and policies.
c. The brigade staff operates under the supervision of the brigade
executive officer, and functions within the framework of the guidance
and authority given it by the brigade commander. The commander
must keep his staff officers informed of his plans, policies, and decisions
to enable them to discharge their duties efficiently.
d. See FM 101-5 for general discussion of staff organization and pro-
cedure.

16. Organization
a. The brigade unit staff is composed of the executive officer, the S1,
S2, S3, and S4. The special staff consists of the chemical officer, the
chaplain, the liaison officers, the surgeon, the communication officer,
the headquarters and headquarters company commander when func-
tioning as the headquarters commandant, and the aviation officer.
b. When combat support and administrative support units are attached
to or placed in support of the brigade, the commanders of these units may
function as brigade special staff officers for their field of interest if a
special staff officer is not already assigned in this area. For example,
the commanding officer of an attached or direct support engineer com-
pany acts as the brigade engineer in the absence of a brigade staff engineer.
c. The brigade fire support coordinator (FSC) is the commander of the
artillery battalion in direct support of the brigade.
d. Composition of the brigade staff is shown in figure 7.
AGO 3326B 15
17. The Brigade Unit Staff
a. General. Details covering the functions, procedures, authority,
and responsibilities of the various components of the staff are contained
in FM 101-5.
b. The Executive Officer.
(1) The brigade executive officer is the principal assistant and
adviser to the brigade commander. His functions and responsi-
bilities are similar to those of a chief of staff. He exercises
supervision over the operations of the brigade staff, and repre-
sents and acts for the brigade commander during the temporary
absence of the latter when directed to do so. He is prepared
to assume command of the brigade at any time.
(2) As an additional duty, the brigade executive officer is also the
information officer for the brigade.
(3) The executive officer is normally located at the brigade com-
mand post. He and the commander should not be absent from
the command post at the same time. When the command post
is displaced, the executive officer normally moves with the last
command post echelon.
(4) The brigade sergeant major is the senior noncommissioned
officer in the brigade headquarters. He acts in the name of
the brigade commander when dealing with other noncommis-
sioned officers in the brigade, and is the brigade commander's
noncommissioned officer adviser. He assists the SI in adminis-
trative matters. He establishes liaison with sergeant majors,
personnel liaison sergeants, and first sergeants of the attached
battalions and assists them in administrative matters. He holds
periodic meetings with them to disseminate information and
orders from the brigade commander. He assists in inspections
of brigade activities as prescribed by the brigade commander.
He makes notes of observed discrepancies and initiates appro-
priate corrective action in the name of the brigade commander.
He accompanies the brigade commander on visits and at cere-
monies.
c. The Adjutant (SI).
(1) The S1 section of the brigade headquarters consists of the
brigade S1, the brigade sergeant major, and the personnel Staff
NCO.
(2) The S1 has unit staff responsibility for personnel activities
and other administrative matters not specifically assigned to
another staff officer. He may, when the need arises, perform
the personnel functions of those special staff officers in the
personnel and administrative field found at higher staff levels
but who are not included in the brigade staff, including the in-
spector general, the staff judge advocate, the provost marshal,
special services officer, and finance officer. The S1 supervises
16 AGO 3326B
 U-
U-
z
0
0

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
. - ,~
· m , U
r
U,
0~~~~~~~~~~' I.- -'~~~~U-
A '
m U-
z I -- mm
I mlm

!~~~~~~~
0
-L4
I
-U-
0

U- U~~~

Ur-
0
o U

D~~~
L,
~~~0
I
LL I N I · u
i V
U~~~~~~

UI I>~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~V

ur c c B~~~~
~~~~3 w 0 ru~~~~
X r~~~~~~~~
U,

u U~~~~~~~~~~~~u

AGO 3826B3C
O~~~ t4~1

AGO 88269
17
 the headquarters commandant in administrative matters per-
taining to the brigade headquarters. He exercises staff sulper-
vision over the brigade chaplain and the S1 activities of attached
units.
(3) The Personnel Staff NCO keeps the S1 and the headquarters
commandant informed on all personnel and administrative ac-
tions pertaining to personnel of the brigade headquarters and
headquarters company. He keeps the S1 informed of personnel
actions in attached units which are of interest to the brigade.
The Personnel Staff NCO performs his duties by maintaining
liaison with the Personnel Staff NCO of attached units, and with
the division rear echelon.
d. The Intelligence Officer (S2).
(1) The S2 has staff responsibility for intelligence matters. His
duties are as prescribed for the G2 in FM 101-5.
(2) The S2 is responsible for coordinating surveillance, and target
acquisition and reconnaissance patrolling activities of combat
units attached to the brigade. He coordinates these activities
with the S3.
(3) The S2's principal assistant is the assistant S2. He assists the
S2 as directed and acts as the S2 air for the brigade.
(4) He exercises staff supervision over reconnaissance activities
of the scout section of the brigade headquarters company.
(5) The S2 exercises staff supervision over any intelligence units
or detachments attached to or in support of the brigade
(6) The S2 supervises evacuation of captured enemy materiel if it
has intelligence value.
e. The Operationsand Training Officer (S3).
(1) The S3 has staff responsibility for all matters pertaining to the
organization, training, and combat operations of the brigade.
His duties correspond generally to those prescribed for the G3
in FM 101-5.
(2) The S3 is the commander's principal adviser on organization of
the brigade for combat.
(3) He has staff responsibility for civil affairs functions and exer-
cises staff supervision over civil affairs elements or personnel
that may be attached to the brigade.
(4) The S3 has staff responsibility for fire support planning and
coordination. He has staff responsibility for those functions
and operations at brigade level which are accomplished by the
tactical operations center (TOC) at divisional level. (See
FM 61-100.) He exercises staff supervision over the com-
munication officer, the chemical officer, the aviation officer,
and the aviation platoon.
(5) The S3 is responsible for planning and supervision of security
for the brigade command post.

18 AGO 3326B
 (6) He coordinates combat patrol activities with the S2.
(7) The S3's principal assistant is the assistant S3 air. The latter
assists the S3 in planning and in administrative matters. The
S3 air coordinates the employment of close air support; speci-
fically, the S3 air-
(a) Prepares the brigade standing operating procedure for air
ground operations.
(b) Consolidates and processes preplanned air requests from
attached tactical units.
(c) Monitors, using the radios organic to his section, requests for
immediate air support from attached tactical units.
(8) The S3 has staff responsibility for integrating psychological
warfare into the brigade operations and exercises staff super-
vision over psychological warfare elements or personnel that
may be attached to the brigade.
The logistics officer (S4).
(1) The brigade S4 has staff responsibility for logistical matters of
interest to the brigade. The brigade normally enters the ad-
ministrative chain of command in a control, coordinating, and
supervisory role to insure that logistical support is coordinated
and adequate to support brigade operation. The S4's principal
location is at the main command post.
(2) The brigade S4, assisted by personnel of his section, controls
and supervises the operations, security, and displacement of the
brigade trains.
(3) The assistant S4 serves as the S4's representative in the trains
area.
(4) The brigade S4 coordinates his activities closely with the division
support command and maintains liaison with the ADSOC if
conditions so warrant.
(5) When the brigade is organized for independent or semi-indepen-
dent operations, administrative support elements as required
are normally attached to the brigade. In such cases, the
brigade S4 exercises staff supervision and such operational
control over these elements as is directed by the brigade com-
mander.
(6) The S4 is responsible for supervision of the execution of rear
area security measures prescribed by the brigade commander.
(7) The S4 is responsible for area damage control planning and for
the integration of the area damage control plan with that of the
division.
(8) He exercises staff supervision over the activities of the surgeon.

18. The Brigade Special Staff

a. General. The special staff consists of the chemical officer, chaplain,
surgeon, communication officer, the headquarters commandant, and the
AGO 3326B 19
aviation officer. Commanders of combat and administrative support
elements attached to or in support of the brigade function as special
staff officers in their respective fields under certain circumstances (par.
16b).
b. The Chemical Officer. The chemical officer is the principal adviser
to the commander and his staff on planning and coordinating of chemical,
biological, and radiological operations. In coordination with appropriate
unit staff officers, the chemical officer supervises the CBR operational
and training activities of subordinate units. In addition, the chemical
officer is responsible for the accomplishment of certain CBR functions
in the brigade headquarters. Each section of the unit staff coordinates,
with the chemical officer, those aspects of CBR operations and training
which fall within its purview.
(1) In coordination with the adjutant (S1), the chemical officer
assists in the preparation of records and reports regarding CBR
casualties.
(2) In coordination with the intelligence officer (S2), the chemical
officer-
(a) Prepares radiological fallout predictions for enemy nuclear
detonations and disseminates the fallout prediction message
to subordinate units.
(b) Disseminates the effective wind message for purposes of
fallout prediction to subordinate units.
(c) Coordinates and supervises radiological and chemical surveys
within the brigade. a
(d) Consolidates radiological and chemical monitoring reports
received from subordinate units, and forwards consolidated
reports to division.
(e) Maintains radiological and chemical contamination maps.
(f) Recommends CBR reconnaissance! of routes and areas.
(g) Analyzes information to estimate enemy CBR capabilities.
(h) Warns higher, lower, and adjacent units of enemy CBR attack.
(3) In coordination with the operations and training officer (S3), the
chemical officer-
(a) Prepares the brigade CBR training program.
(b) Supervises, and when appropriate, conducts CBR training
within the brigade.
(c) Prepares the brigade CBR SOP.
(d) Prepares plans for the integration of chemical and biological
agents with the scheme of maneuver.
(e) In coordination with FSC, prepares chemical target analyses,
and assists in the integration of toxic chemical fires into the
brigade fire support plan. Calculates troop safety require-
ments when toxic chemical agents are to be used.
(f) Prepares radiological fallout predictions for friendly nuclear

20 AGO 3326B
 detonations and disseminates the fallout prediction message to
subordinate units.
(g) Prepares recommendations for the integration of toxic
chemical agents to produce persistent effects in minefield and
barrier plans.
(h) Plans and coordinates the employment of flame weapons,
flame field expedients, and smoke in support of operations.
(i) Plans for the employment of attached or supporting chemical
units. When so directed by the brigade commander, exercises
operational control over attached chemical units.
(j) Supervises and inspects CBR training conducted by the
chemical officers of attached battalions.
(4) In coordination with the logistics officer (S4), the chemical
officer-
(a) Inspects CBR equipment of subordinate units.
(b) Monitors the requisition and distribution of CBR equipment
and supplies.
(c) Plans for and supervises the installation of collective protec-
tion facilities, when appropriate.
(d) Supervises CBR decontamination activities.
c. The Chaplain. The brigade chaplain is the senior chaplain assigned
to the brigade headquarters and headquarters company. He functions
and is under the staff supervision of the brigade S1. The chaplains of the
section provide religious services and pastoral care for all units or elements
assigned or attached to the brigade. The brigade chaplain will coordinate
his activities and will provide the assistance and supervision necessary to
insure adequate religious coverage of all organic or attached units.
(1) The chaplain advises the commander on all matters pertaining to
religion and morality and the effective utilization of the chap-
lains in the chaplain section.
(2) He coordinates the activities of all assigned or attached chap-
lains and supervises and assists them to provide religious ser-
vices and pastoral care for all organic and attached units or
elements of the brigade.
(3) He keeps in close contact and maintains liaison with the chaplain
section in higher headquarters to insure continuing chaplain
support for the brigade.
(4) He provides information and makes recommendations to the
brigade commander and his staff on all questions affecting or
affected by the chaplain program.
(5) See FM 101-5 for additional duties of the chaplain.
d. The Surgeon.
(1) The surgeon advises the commander on all matters affecting the
mental and physical health of the command. He effects liaison
with the medical company of the division supported element in
support of the brigade, and exercises staff supervision over all
AGO 3826B 21
 medical units when they are attached to the brigade. His
specific duties include the following:
(a) Prepares and supervises the execution of medical plans for
the brigade.
(b) Recommends measures for the prevention and control of
disease and injury.
(c) Identifies and describes medical implications of tactical plans,
to include the effects on personnel of chemical, biological, and
nuclear weapons, and the interpretation of radiological data
as they pertain to personnel.
(d) Recommends procedures for the locating, collecting, sorting,
treating, and evacuating of casualties.
(e) Monitors all requests for aeromedical evacuation originated
by surgeons of subordinate battalions and recommends
priority for support when requirements conflict.
(f) Recommends measures for the medical care of sick and
wounded prisoners of war and nonmilitary personnel in the
brigade area.
(g) Supervises the preparation of medical records and reports
as may be required.
(h) Supervises the examination of captured medical documents
and equipment in coordination with S2, in order to obtain
information of value to medical intelligence.
(2) The brigade surgeon provides his commander with a plan for
reallocation of medical resources organic to attached elements
which best supports the specific tactical operation.
(3) He maintains close contact with the division surgeon and the
division medical battalion to insure adequate and continuous
medical support for the brigade.
(4) The surgeon works under the staff supervision of the brigade S4.
e. The Communication Officer. The brigade communication officer is
the principal adviser to the brigade commander and staff in all com-
munication matters. He coordinates and exercises technical supervision
over the training and activities of the communication platoon and other
communication personnel within the headquarters and headquarters
company. He keeps informed of current and planned activities of the
brigade. Under the staff supervision of the S3, he prepares plans and
makes recommendations for the employment of all signal and electronic
warfare means. His functions include the following-
(1) Coordinates with the S1 who selects the exact location of the
command post.
(2) Coordinates with the S2 on the location of observation posts
and on communication security measures.
(3) Obtains current signal operation instructions (SOI) and standing
signal instructions (SSI) from higher headquarters. He pre-
pares and distributes extracts of the SOI and SSI.

22 AGO 3326B
 (4) Prepares the communication portion of the brigade SOP.
(5) Submits recommendations for paragraph 5 of the operation
order and signal annexes when required.
(6) Plans, supervises, and coordinates matters pertaining to signal
supply and maintenance.
(7) Coordinates communication activities of attached units.
(8) Procures, stores, and distributes codes, ciphers, and crypto
material.
(9) Supervises the installation, operation, and maintenance of signal
equipment issued to the communication platoon and brigade
headquarters.
(10) Supervises the operation of communication installations.
(11) Supervises the movement of communication installations when
the command post displaces.
(12) Coordinates with supporting elements of the signal battalion
and the division signal officer for communication with higher
and adjacent units.
(13) Supervises the maintenance of communication security including
the employment of codes, ciphers, and authentication systems.
(14) For a detailed discussion of actions and responsibilities of the
communication officer see appendix II.
f. The Aviation Officer.
(1) The aviation officer is the commander's adviser on all matters
pertaining to Army aviation support for the brigade.
(2) He is the platoon commander of the aviation platoon of the
brigade headquarters and headquarters company, and controls
all aviation attached for support of the brigade.
(3) He pilots aircraft of the platoon when required, but avoids
flying missions which require his prolonged absence from the
command post.
(4) The aviation officer operates under the staff supervision of the
brigade S3.
(5) He establishes landing facilities for Army aircraft as required
and is responsible for air traffic control in the brigade area.
(6) See paragraphs 54 through 61 for additional information on
brigade aviation.
g. Headquarters Company Command (Headquarters Commandant).
(1) The headquarters and headquarters company commander is also
the headquarters commandant.
(2) The headquarters commandant is supervised, when acting in
this capacity, by the brigade S1.
(3) His responsibilities and duties are described in FM 101-5.

19. Fire Support Coordinator (FSCOORD)

a. The brigade FSCOORD is the commander of the artillery battalion
in direct support of the brigade, or his designated representative.
AGO 3826B 23
 b. He operates under the staff supervision of the brigade S3 and ad-
vises and assists the commander and other members of the staff on fire
support planning and coordination.
c. See paragraphs 39 through 45 for additional information on brigade
fire support planning.

20. Liaison
a. The brigade executive officer is responsible for establishing brigade
level liaison as directed by the brigade commander and higher head-
quarters. He also assists liaison personnel from other units attached to
the brigade.
b. The duties of the two brigade liaison officers of the brigade head-
quarters and headquarters company are discussed in paragraph 29.

Section III. COMBAT BATTALIONS COMMAND STAFF

21. References
For a discussion of the responsibilities, organization, and functions of
the commander and staff of the infantry, mechanized infantry, airborne
infantry, and tank battalions see FM 7-20 and FM 17-15.

Section IV. COMMAND POSTS AND BRIGADE TRAINS

22. General
a. The brigade headquarters and headquarters company is staffed and
equipped to organize and operate the following command installations:
(1) Command post (CP).
(2) Command group.
(3) Trains command post.
b. The brigade SOP for operations should cover in detail the composi-
tion operation, location, internal arrangement, security, and movement
of these installations.
23. Brigade Command Post
a. General.
(1) The command post (CP) is the principal command installation
of the brigade.
(2) The CP operates from vehicles to the extent feasible, using for
this purpose organic vans and radio vehicles, and in the mech-
anized brigade, APC. It is highly mobile and capable of
rapid and frequent displacement. It can operate on a sustained,
around-the-clock basis. It relies heavily on radio communica-
tions and in highly mobile operations it must have the capability
for operation while moving.

24 AGO 8326B
 b. Composition. The following are normally located in the main
command post:
(1) The brigade commander.
(2) The executive officer.
(3) The S1 section.
(4) The S2 section.
(5) The S3 section.
(6) The S4.
(7) The FSCOORD.
(8) The communication officer.
(9) The chemical section.
(10) The chaplain section.
(11) The aviation officer.
(12) The surgeon.
(13) The headquarters commandant (headquarters and headquarters
company commander.)
(14) Company headquarters of the brigade headquarters and head-
quarters company.
(15) Liaison personnel.
(16) Scout section, when not.assigned other missions.
(17) Command vehicle section (except in the airborne brigade.)
(18) Communication platoon.
(19) Civil affairs elements or personnel attached to the brigade.
(20) Representatives of combat support units.
c. Location.
(1) The S3 recommends the general location of the command post
after coordination with the communication officer. The brigade
S1, in conjunction with the headquarters commandant and the
communication Officer, selects the actual CP site and plans the
internal arrangement of elements therein.
(2) The primary consideration in CP location is the ability to com-
mand and control the brigade. Additional desirable charac-
teristics for the main CP include-
(a) Optimum condition for efficient operation of communication
means.
(b) Proximity to attached combat units and installations for
added security.
(c) An area which has sufficient space for the proper dispersion of
command post installations.
(d) Sufficient space in the vicinity for operation of brigade aircraft.
(e) Adequate concealment; cover; firm, well-drained ground;
access roads; and vehicular parking area.
(f) Terrain which facilitates ground defense of the command post.
d. Security.
(1) The S3 has overall staff responsibility for security of the com-
mand post. The headquarters commandant is charged with
AGO 3326B 25
 implementing security plans and the control and supervision
of security personnel.
(2) The headquarters commandant utilizes command post personnel
for local security and the scout section of headquarters company
when it is not engaged on other missions. Additional security
is gained by locating the command posts near combat units of
the brigade. Military police, and all other personnel attached
to the brigade, may also be used. In exceptional circumstances
squads or platoons from attached combat battalions are used
for CP security.
e. Displacement. Rapid and efficient displacement of the main com-
mand post is accomplished by-
(1) Thorough understanding by all concerned of the brigade SOP
for CP displacement.
(2) Continuous staff coordination between the SI, S2, S3, S4, com-
munication officer, and headquarters commandant.
(3) CP organization to provide two operational groups; one to dis-
place first to establish the new CP and the other to continue
operation in the old area until the new side is opened. The
commander normally moves with the first echelon and the execu-
tive officer with the second.
(4) Use of radio and motor messengers to maintain contact with key
personnel during the move.
24. Brigade Command Group
The brigade commander may elect to operate with a command group in
fast-moving situations or when his presence is required forward. In such
cases, he is accompanied by key members of his staff, usually the S2, S3,
FSC, communication officer, and selected security and communication
personnel. The command group is highly mobile and operates from
vehicles, using for this purpose the vehicles from the command vehicle
section of the infantry and mechanized infantry, or other command and
radio vehicles as required. The command group relies primarily on
radio, messenger service and personal visits for control and communica-
tion until such time as wire is installed.

25. Brigade Trains

a. The brigade trains consist of the following:
(1) Field trains of attached tactical battalions.
(2) Elements of company headquarters of the brigade headquarters
and headquarters company.
(3) Brigade staff section personnel not normally located with the
main CP.
(4) Elements of the aviation platoon.
(5) Division administrative support elements from the division sup-
port command in support of or attached to the brigade.

26 AGO 8326B
 (6) Service elements of other combat support and administrative
support units attached to or in support of the brigade.
b. The general location of the brigade trains is selected by the S4 in
coordination with the S3. The specific location is selected by the assis-
tant S4.
c. The S4 has staff responsibility for the operations, security, and
displacement of the brigade trains. Generally the brigade trains displace
by echelon.

AGO 3326B 27
 CHAPTER 3
THE BRIGADE HEADQUARTERS AND HEADQUARTERS
COMPANY

Section I. GENERAL
26. Organization
The organization of the three types of brigade headquarters and head-
quarters company is basically the same. Significant differences are
noted below:
a. The mechanized brigade headquarters and headquarters company
has eight APC for use by staff sections, the command vehicle section, and
the radio section of the communications platoon.
b. In the infantry brigade there are two APC in the command vehicle
section. Wheeled vehicles provide the principal means of transportation
for the infantry brigade headquarters and are available in the staff
sections.
c. The airborne brigade has fewer vehicles than the other two types of
brigade, and has smaller and lighter types of other equipment to facilitate
transport by air. The airborne brigade does not contain a command
vehicle section because of the difficulty of transporting these vehicles by
air. See figure 6.

Section II. BRIGADE HEADQUARTERS AND STAFF SECTION

27. Brigade Headquarters
a. The brigade headquarters consists of the brigade commander, the
executive officer, the unit and special staff officers, and the sergeant major.
b. The staff section contains the officer assistants to the unit staff, and
the personnel and equipment required for operation by the staff sections
in the command post and the brigade trains. Each staff section has its
own vehicles and radio communications personnel and equipment.

Section III. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS

28. Company Headquarters

The company headquarters is composed of the personnel and equip-
ment required for administrative support of the brigade headquarters and
headquarters company. Its organization is shown in figure 6.
a. HeadquartersSection. This section consists of company commander,
who is also the headquarters commandant; the company executive
officer; the first sergeant; and the company clerk. It provides for com-

28 AGO 8826B
mand and control of the headquarters company and administrative
support for the brigade headquarters. This section is normally located
in the command post.
b. Maintenance Section. This section consists of the motor sergeant,
wheel and tracked vehicle mechanics, a mechanic helper, wrecker operator,
powerman, and the armorer. This section provides for second echelon
maintenance for all vehicles and weapons of the headquarters and head-
quarters company, and for recovery and evacuation of vehicles of the
headquarters and headquarters company. This section operates from the
brigade trains area on task assigned by the headquarters and headquarters
company commander.
c. Administrative, Mess and Supply Section. This section provides
administrative support for the headquarters and headquarters company,
to include mess and supply. It consists of the mess steward, two first
cooks, two cooks, a cook's helper, the supply sergeant, and drivers.

Section IV. LIAISON SECTION

29. Liaison Section
a. The section consists of two liaison officers, two drivers, and two
radio vehicles which transport the liaison personnel. Section personnel
operate a radio station(s) in the brigade command net (FM).
b. The section operates under the supervision of the brigade executive
officer when performing liaison duties. One liaison officer is usually
assigned with the next higher headquarters, and one may be assigned to
an adjacent unit.
c. In peacetime, and when not engaged in liaison duties during combat,
the liaison officers are usually assigned duties in the brigade S3 section.
d. The liaison section's primary function is to maintain continuity in
the exchange of information and to promote cooperation and coordination
of effort by personal contact between two or more headquarters. For a
detailed discussion of liaison activities, see chapter 9, section 4, FM 101-5.

Section V. AVIATION PLATOON

30. Aviation Platoon
See paragraphs 54 through 61 for complete information on the brigade
aviation platoon.

Section VI. COMMAND VEHICLE SECTION

31. Command Vehicle Section
a. This section provides two APC with operator personnel and equip-
ment, for use as command vehicles by the brigade commander and staff.
AGO 3326B 29
It is organic to the infantry and mechanized brigades, but is not included
in the airborne brigade. See paragraph 26.
b. These vehicles mount radios which operate in the brigade and the
division command net. They are used by the commander and his staff
while operating away from the command post;.
c. This section normally transports the command group.
d. This section is not in the airborne brigade headquarters and head-
quarters company.

Section VII. SCOUT SIECTION

32. General
a. Organization. The scout section is organized as shown in figure 8.
b. Equipment and Weapons. Equipment and weapons of the section
consists of four l4-ton trucks, four 7.62-mm machineguns, two rocket
launchers 3.5-in., and two grenade launchers M79.
c. Radio Communications. The section radio communications consists
of an AN/VRC-10 in the section leader's vehicle which he uses in the
scout section net and which also operates in the brigade logistical net
(FM). The other squad leader's vehicle also mounts an AN/VRC-10
radio which operates in the scout section net. Radio sets AN/PRC-10
are provided the teams in the squads which do not have vehicle sets.

SCOUT

0 a

SCOUT SCOUT

TEAM TEAM TEAM TEAM

NOTES

1. THE SECTION LEADER ALSO ACTS AS SQUAD LEADER OF ONE OF THE SQUADS
AND AS A LEADER OF A TEAM WITHIN THIS SQUAD.

2. EACH TEAM IS MOUNTED IN A 1/4 TON TRUCK (TOTAL OF 4 FOR THE SECTION)
WHICH MOUNTS A 7.62-MM MACHINEGUN.

3. THE SECTION/SQUAD LEADER'S TEAM.CONSISTS OF THE SECTION LEADER

AND A SCOUT DRIVER. THE OTHER TEAMS CONSIST OF A TEAM LEADER
(ONE ALSO ACTS AS A SQUAD LEADER) A SCOUT OBSERVER, AND A SCOUT
DRIVER.

Figure 8. The scout section.

30 AGO 8326B
 d. Capabilities. The scout section has the following capabilities:
(1) Limited reconnaissance and patrolling missions for the brigade,
using organic vehicles or the aircraft assigned to the aviation
platoon.
(2) Manning a brigade observation post.
(3) Security for the brigade command post or other brigade instal-
lations.
(4) Maintaining contact with adjacent or attached units.
(5) Operating as motor messengers when this use is mandatory.
e. Control. The headquarters commandant controls the scout section
for all of its activities except reconnaissance and patrolling; the latter
being supervised by the brigade S2.

Section VIII. COMMUNICATION PLATOON

33. General
a. Organization. The communication platoon is organized as shown on
figure 6.
b. Functions.
(1) The communication platoon provides the personnel and equip-
ment required to man and operate the message center of the
headquarters; to install, operate, and maintain wire communi-
cations within the headquarters, to attached units, and to
adjacent units as prescribed by the SOP; performs organiza-
tional maintenance on signal equipment in the headquarters and
headquarters company and operates a radio station in the divi-
sion command operations net (RATT).
(2) The communication platoon leader assists in the supervision and
training of the communication personnel in the staff section, and
other personnel in the headquarters who act as radio operators
as an additional duty.
(3) The platoon provides second echelon radio maintenance for the
brigade headquarters and headquarters company and assists the
headquarters company supply personnel in signal supply matters.
(4) For a detailed discussion of the brigade communication systems
and the brigade communication platoon, see appendix II.
See also figures 9 through 13.

AGO 8826B 31
 \\Cxx Call

XX

SIG A I TO CORPS CENTER

SIG

T RADIO RE _
/WI id
INTEGRATION (FM) TO ARMY AREA
SIGNAL CENTER

FIELD WIRECIRCUITS.

Figure 9. Type area signal communications for division-schematic.

32 CHNNEL RAIO RELY SYSTEM.82B AGO12

AGO 3826B
32
 I I I I I
I AI I I

I I I I

~I

CO O- ORADIO SEC
XO 0 O COMPANY HQ
S1 0- SB86/P -O AVIATION PLAT
2 - - O COMMAND VEHICLE SEC '*
53 - OSCOUT SEC
S4 O- - O SURGEON
COMMO - -O CHAPLAIN
CHEMICAL O OO SUPPORTING UNITS
LIAISONO O- O ARTY LN O
MSG CEN O

SIG SEC

SIG
CEN

TO DIV MAIN
TO ALT SIG CEN
*CMD VEH SEC NOT
IN ABN BDE

Figure10. Brigade type wire system.

AGO 3826B 33
z
m

U L IN aIWlo 3OIYINS
.LM

(W3I) L3N aWOD 3av0DIM

0o

a I
u L.~~ : _1.s...3N
- a~o=/D, Alq
U 0

0 6; 0-oa.~ o,

I'. l
u
U
lW 0 .L-q .LSV'DaVOMS/DNINNVM Ala x :
Al N Jno3 Ml
I a

g lp Srl~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-
a 1

00 Ni; 901/,
AMN UOV IU
40 A
 TO ATTACHED
BN'S

ARV- DIV CO/COMO N OR3

VEC-IS VBQ.S rVRQ-3 VRC.-

TO > VRc-O vRC.

AV O COMMO LN SB AIR 53 CO

-BRIDE CMD NET PM

VRi-S VC 1VRO-3 CRC-I VRC.3 , VRQ.

S4 S2

3RC-Z9
5UIC(BRIGADE OPNS
COMM PLAT

At J t t
COMMP

SURV

HQ cO COMDR

BR:IGAD TRAINS CO MAINT HCO XO

SCT S..EC

Figure12. Mechanized infantry brigade radio nets.

AGO 3326B 35
i

U JLhJ J3N ONOD 3avolatI

(W) HNaWo 3avuO -aOl

*.

r"o T I [-- -i~OA

- J.>i
4N OhiCI-I0 Ala a

X -- i #m

= -- , u., N

36 AGO 8826B
 CHAPTER 4
COMBAT UNITS, COMBAT SUPPORT UNITS AND
ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT

Section I. GENERAL
34. General
Combat, combat support, and administrative support units are
attached to or placed in support of brigades to provide the means re-
quired to conduct operations to accomplish the brigade mission. These
units are provided by the division, or from the corps and field army
sources.
a. Combat Units. Combat units which may be attached to the
brigade for combat operations or for training include: infantry, mecha-
nized infantry, airborne infantry, tank, and armored cavalry.
b. Combat Support Units. Combat support units from the division
that may be attached to, placed under operational control of, or placed
in direct support of the brigade include: artillery, army aviation, engineer,
signal, and military police.
c. Corps and Field Units. Corps and field army combat support units
may also be attached or in support of the brigade. These include: army,
and corps artillery, including air defense; army aviation, engineers;
signal; military intelligence; technical intelligence, army security agency;
chemical; transportation; and psychological warfare.
d. Other Combat Support. The brigade will normally receive tactical
air support from the Air Force; and naval gunfire, air and amphibian
support when required.

Section II. COMBAT UNITS

35. General
Infantry, mechanized infantry, airborne infantry, and tanks are the
combat maneuver elements of the brigade. Armored cavalry units,
appropriately reinforced (par. 37a) may also be used as maneuver units.
The brigade commander and his staff consider the capabilities and
limitations of each type of these units available to the brigade in de-
termining how best to organize for combat to achieve the maximum
maneuver capability of the brigade.
36. '-fantry Battalions
a. The mission of the infantry, mechanized infantry, and airborne
infantry battalion is to close with the enemy by means of fire and ma-
neuver in order to destroy or capture him or to repel his assault by fire,
AGO 3326B 37
close combat, and counterattack. The infantry battalion is the in-
fantry's basic combat unit. Its balanced ratio of personnel and equip-
ment enables it to accomplish a variety of combat missions with organic
means. The battalion's command structure is designed to accept an
augmentation of forces. The battalion is cabable of fighting with or
without vehicles, with minimum adjustment of equipment and personnel
whenever motorized, mechanized, dismounted, airmobile, or joint air-
borne operations are required.
b. Battalions have the following capabilities:
(1) Close with the enemy by means of fire and maneuver in order to
destroy or capture him.
(2) Repel enemy assault by fire, close combat, and counterattack.
(3) Provide base of fire and maneuver elements.
(4) Seize and hold terrain.
(5) Conduct independent operations on a limited scale.
(6) Furnish limited antitank protection.
(7) Provide indirect fire support for organic and attached units.
(8) Conduct long-range patrolling when appropriately equipped.
(9) Participate in air landings when provided with sufficient air
transportation.
(10) Maneuver in all types of terrain and climatic conditions.
(11) Conduct antiguerrilla operations.

HO&i~~~~~~ ~~~RIFLE
HOI

I I I

Co HQ El W WEEB S

eM T MESSI

Figure14. Infantry, airborne infantry,and mechanized infantry battalion.

38 AGO S326B
 c.: Mechanized infantry battalions and infantry battalions, when
mechanized, have the following additional capabilities.
(1) Possess high cross-country mobility with light armor protection
and multiple communications.
(2) Exploit the effects of mass destruction weapons.
(3) Complement and enhance the inherent capabilities of tank
elements, when employed in tank/infantry task forces.
(4) Provide a highly mobile exploitation force when suitably rein-
forced with appropriate tactical and tactical support elements.
(5) Traverse inland waterways while mounted.
d. Airborne infantry battalions have the additional capability of
frequent airborne assault by parachute or assault aircraft with minimum
marshalling and planning procedures.
e. The infantry battalion is a tactical and administrative unit; however,
it is primarily dependent on higher echelons for administrative support.
f. Organization-the major units of the infantry, mechanized infantry,
and airborne infantry battalions are shown in figure 14. For details of
organization and equipment, see appropriate TOE and FM 7-20.
37. Tank Battalion
a. Mission. To close with and destroy or capture the enemy, using
fire, maneuver, and shock action in coordination with other arms.
b. Capabilities.
(1) Conducts operations requiring mobile fire power and armor
protection.
(2) Provides armor protection during attacks or counterattacks
under hostile fire.
(3) Destroys enemy armor by direct fire.
(4) Supports infantry units by fire, maneuver, and shock action.
(5) Exploits after breakthrough with high cross-country mobility.
(6) Exploits the effects of mass destruction weapons.
(7) Has a limited capability for conducting tactical operations under
limited visibility conditions employing infrared viewing devices
and surveillance equipment.
(8) Employed as a combined arms team when suitably reinforced.
c. Organization. The tank battalion organic to the armored, mecha-
nized, infantry, and airborne division is organized as shown in figure 15.
d. Equipment. Equipment is the same in the armored, infantry, and
mechanized division tank battalion. In the airborne division tank
battalion, light tanks are substituted for medium tanks, and there are no
armored vehicle launched bridges.
e. References. For additional information on tank battalions see
appropriate TOE and FM 17-18.
AGO 3326B 39
 <~~~~~~~~~·
I~~~~~~V

~~~~w~~~~~~w
-0

CL
uc
.>01
L.J

CY~Z

z
a
od

y~~~~~~
~~ ~
-0 ow
~ ~

~~~~~~~~~~0
l

40
z

0
w AGO 3826D~~~5C

-0w

z~~~~~~~

a
4A GI2
 i.LS

. 4>Z
<o

O-:
0
OLLJ

0<o C
*

joGO3826B 41oeO
gO

1>0
38. Armored Cavalry Squadron, Armored, Mechanized,
and Infantry Divisions; and the Airborne Division
Armored Cavalry Squadron
a. Mission. The mission of these squadrons is to provide security for
the division, and to engage in offensive, defensive, and delaying actions
as an economy of force unit. The squadron is generally capable of per-
forming its reconnaissance and security mission without additional
support of reinforcement. When used in sustained combat, it requires
artillery support, and may be reinforced with armor, infantry, and
engineers.
b. Capabilities.
(1) Protects the flank or flanks of the division.
(2) Provides security between division elements or between the
division and adjacent units.
(3) Conducts ground and aerial reconnaissance over wide fronts and
extended depths.
(4) Collects and reports information of intelligence value, including
information of nuclear targets and nuclear damage assessment,
employing ground and aerial observation and electronic ground
surveillance means.
(5) Screens and conducts security missions on wide fronts.
(6) Supports squadron combat operations with organic nuclear and
nonnuclear fire.
(7) Maintains liaison and contact between major units and provides
communications relay.
(8) Conducts radiological monitoring and survey.
(9) Performs damage control operations or provides forces for rear
area security when directed.
(10) Provides armed aerial escort for airmobile operations.
(11) When suitably reinforced, conducts semi-independent operations.
(12) The airborne division squadron possesses a pathfinder capability.
c. Organization. Figure 16 shows the organization of the armored
cavalry squadron.
d. References. For additional information on the armored cavalry
squadron, see appropriate TOE and FM 17--36.

Section III. FIRE SUPPORT

39. General
a. Concept. The two basic elements of combat power are firepower
and maneuver of forces. The brigade commander is responsible for the
effective employment of all available firepower and maneuver elements
under his direct control or in support of his unit, and is responsible for the
coordination of supporting fires with the plan of maneuver. He inte-

42 AGO ss826B
grates the plan of fire support with the scheme of maneuver to insure that
each complements and supports the other.
b. Fire Support. The most flexible and responsive fire support avail-
able to the brigade is furnished by the division artillery battalion normally
attached to or placed in direct support of a committed brigade. The
fires of this battalion are augmented by other division and corps artil-
lery units, as well as tactical air and naval gunfire.
c. Fire Support Plan. The brigade fire support plan implements the
commander's concept for the employment of supporting fire, and contains
the necessary details required for the coordination, integration, and
delivery of fire. The fire support plan is an annex to the brigade opera-
tion order or plan. It may consist of a single document with details of
air, artillery, chemical, and naval gun fire included in appropriate para-
graphs, or it may have appendixes for some or all of the weapons fire
plans.
d. Relationship Between Plan of Fire Support and Scheme of Maneuver.
In determining his plan of fire support and scheme of maneuver, the
brigade commander considers the capabilities and limitations of the
forces available to the brigade. Development of both plans is con-
current, because they are so closely interrelated. The commander
determines which operational tasks can be accomplished by fire or ma-
neuver alone and which tasks will require the integrated effort of both.
Whenever possible, fires alone, particularly nuclear, are employed to
destroy the enemy to reduce the requirement for maneuver forces to
close with the enemy in close combat.
e. Responsibility. The coordination of all available fires is a command
responsibility; the S3 has unit staff responsibility while the fire support
coordinator is responsible for working out the details.

40. Division Artillery

a. Mission. The mission of artillery is-
(1) To support tactical units by fire, give depth to combat by
counterbattery fire, attack hostile reserves, restrict movement,
and disrupt command systems and other installations.
(2) In nonnuclear combat, to support combat elements by destroy-
ing or neutralizing those targers most dangerous to the sup-
ported arm.
(3) In nuclear combat, to attain fire superiority over the enemy's
nuclear artillery and to destroy other major targets which
threaten the accomplishment of the force mission.
b. Capabilities.
(1) Provides nuclear and nonnuclear artillery support to include
signal communications, target acquisition, and survey.
(2) Delivers accurate fire with appropriate caliber and type of
ammunition on targets encountered under all conditions of
visibility, weather, and terrain.
AGO 3826B 43
 z

0WUe

z~~z
I ~ i

u z ~ ~ 2,u

0 ac -

-' IZ 0
7
N O

--uJ 'I I-
> "@1 lvi U.
I I:z
I-~
I 0Z"

0 <~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~@
~-z
Z
z z.
0 ~ nC ~ Z-0
I z q c I~~~~I
_<4:
rt~~~~U
U, ~ OZ
0
U Z
0IQ~
-z
L z 0i-u

Z ed '-
4o u
81~~E -- ~~~
~i 4- ' ZrrO
iv. ~-
*
I-
*
.:tIce
YY
* @0~~c
HIe
I'UII 'U U~~~~~~~~ r~5

1111 AnZ

44 AG4 8826B
 (3) Maneuvers massed fires rapidly within a large area on a wide
front.
(4) Regroups units to bring greater firepower on important
sectors.
(5) Provides depth to the combat zone and isolates the battlefield
by counterfire, by fire on hostile reserves, by restricting move-
ment in rear areas, and by disrupting hostile command facilities
and other installations.
(6) Possesses cross-country mobility and the capability for rapid
emplacement.
(7) Provides the commander with a powerful means of rapidly
influencing the course of combat.
(8) Provides input to the intelligence systems through artillery tar-
get acquisition and fire control systems.
(9) Commands and controls additional artillery units attached to
the division.
c. Organization. See figure 17.

41. Employment of Fire Support

a. General.
(1) The division artillery will normally be employed with a 105-mm
howitzer battalion attached to or in direct support of each
committed brigade. The 105-mm howitzer battalion of division
artillery will normally be assigned the tactical mission of "general
support, reinforcing" or "reinforcing" when not required for
employment with the mission of "direct support." The
155-mm/8-inch howitzer battalion and the missile battalion will
provide general support to the division. A rocket/howitzer
(LITTLE JOHN/155-mm) battalion provides general support
for the airborne division.
(2) When the brigade is operating independently or semi-inde-
pendently, elements of division artillery are usually attached.
In such cases, it may be necessary to augment the battalions
and/or batteries with personnel and survey and long range
radio equipment from the headquarters battery of division
artillery. An artillery battalion group may be formed by
attaching a second artillery battalion to the one normally in
direct support (or attached to) the brigade. In such cases, the
commander of the artillery battalion habitually associated with
the brigade will usually be designated as the battalion group
commanding officer.
(3) In the infantry, mechanized, and armored divisions the missile
battalion is normally employed as a battalion. In the airborne
division, the rocket/howitzer battalion is normally employed by
separate battery. Nuclear and nonnuclear capabilities are
AGO 3826B 45
 exploited under battalion control, brigade control or division
control as the situation requires.
(4) The artillery batteries when properly augmented are capable of
operating independently of the battalion for periods of several
days. Attachments from the headquarters and service batteries
are normally provided when a period of extended independent
operations can be foreseen.
(5) When more than three combat battalions are attached to the
brigade, its direct support battalion is normally augmented by
attaching additional batteries from other battalions or by
placing one or more artillery battalions in a role reinforcing it.
b. Air Defense Artillery. Air defense of the field army area is provided
by field army and corps air defense artillery and by air defense units
attached to the divisions. Air defense units with a surface-to-surface
capability may be deployed throughout the division zone. Their
missions include defense against helicopter-borne attack. Frequently,
this mission permits the air defense unit to take under fire airborne or
airlanded troops in or near their landing zones or areas. This part of
the air defense mission should be carefully tied in with the brigade plans
for countering these enemy forces. When the brigade is operating far
from other forces or when the enemy air threat is not a primary con-
sideration, air defense units with a surface-to-surface capability may be
attached. In the latter case, air defense units may be employed in a
ground support role.
c. Nonnuclear Fires.
(1) At all levels, maximum effective employment of all available
fires is essential to the accomplishment of the mission. The
brigade commander insures that commanders of attached
tactical units employ to the fullest extent possible fires of
organic, and attached weapons before requesting additional
fire support from the brigade. The brigade commander con-
trols the employment of all fire support means in support of
the brigade, to include artillery, naval gunfire, and close air
support.
(2) The brigade commander utilizes to the maximum extent
possible the organic firepower of reserve brigade combat units
to support committed units.
d. Nuclear Fires.
(1) In active nuclear warfare, conditions and restriction of employ-
ment of nuclear weapons are announced by division and higher
headquarters. Within the framework of their operational
guidance and existing SOP for nuclear employment, commanders
allocated nuclear weapons may employ them on their own
initiative. Commanders who have the authority to fire
nuclear weapons must consider the tactical advantages that

46 AGO 3326B
 may result from the use of radioactive fallout from surface or
subsurface bursts.
(2) Division normally allocates nuclear weapons to the brigade.
In exceptional circumstances, for example, when a combat
battalion or battalion task force is operating under division
control, an allocation of nuclear weapons may be made directly
to the battalion.
(3) Nuclear allocation-an allocation of nuclear weapons is that
number of weapons by type delivery system and yield which a
commander is authorized to expend during a specified period of
time or operation. An allocation is implicit authority to fire
the weapons subject to such restrictions as have been imposed.
This allocation includes but is not confined to those weapons
for which the commander controls delivery means. An alloca-
tion may be subdivided by the commander into a reserve,
those to be fired under his control, and allocation(s) to subordi-
nate units.
(4) Special ammunition load (SAL)-a specific number of weapons
authorized to be carried by a delivery unit constitutes the
special ammunition load. Replenishment of these weapons is
not automatic. The SAL of a delivery element organic to,
attached to, or in support of the brigade does not mean that
the maneuver unit may order its use beyond the weapons
allocated.
(5) The brigade commander initiates requests for nuclear alloca-
tions when none has been made to the brigade or when he
foresees additional requirements for nuclear support. He
bases his requests, in part, on recommendations from his
subordinate commanders.
(6) Subkiloton yield nuclear weapons and delivery systems give
the brigade commander an immediately available nuclear capa-
bility which can be used with minimum restrictions. The use
of these weapons reduces the extent of detailed target analysis.
The commander's responsibilities for employing these weapons
and displacing their delivery systems are like those for any other
fire support delivery system commanded by him. Subkiloton
weapon delivery means are organic to all combat battalions
which may be attached to the brigade.
e. Chemical/BiologicalFires.
(1) Authority to fire toxic chemical and biological weapons rest
with command. Regardless of the echelon delegated fire
authority, the brigade initiates and coordinates planning and
recommendations for the integration of these fires with non-
nuclear and nuclear fires and with the scheme of maneuver when
their use is probable.
(2) Because of their area coverage effect, toxic chemical and
AGO 3826B 47
 biological agents are particularly suitable both against hard,
dug-in targets, and against ill-defined targets. In both the
offense and defense, toxic chemical agents are employed to
produce a nonpresistent effect and rapid casualties among per-
sonnel. In the defense, persistent toxic chemicals may also be
used in conjunction with minefields and barriers, to contaminate
and restrict enemy use of important terrain features such as
crossroads, bridges and defiles. Biological agents may be used
when delayed casualty effects are desirable and/or acceptable.
f. Integration of Nuclear and Nonnuclear Fires.
(1) The brigade commander must insure that nonnuclear fires are
completely integrated with the nuclear fires used in his planned
operations. He does this whether the nuclear fires are specifi-
cally controlled or requested by him or are planned and directed
by higher headquarters.
(2) The capabilities of nuclear and nonnuclear fires must be care-
fully considered to insure their most effective use. The de-
termination of whether to use nuclear or nonnuclear fires, or
both, must take into consideration the mission, characteristics
of weapons and the target, and availability of munitions.
Nuclear and nonnuclear fires are most effective when employed
to complcpient each other. In addition to other types of non-
nuclear fires. the use of quick-acting, toxic chemical agents
producing.nonpersistent effects should be considered for attack-
ing selected targets, and those in the buffer zone of a nuclear
weapon attack. Persistent CB agents should be considered
for use on terrain or targets which are not in the path of friendly
attack and which the commander wants to bypass, and/or to
restrict enemy activity.
(3) Nonnuclear fires may be used to attack close-in targets which
escape nuclear fire damage. They may be used in areas of
great nuclear fire damage to prevent or delay reorganization or
in areas of lesser damage to increase the damage and prevent
or delay reorganization. They may be placed to interdict
enemy routes of reinforcement and withdrawal. They may also
be the sole means employed against a target area. Quick acting
toxic chemical agents are particularly useful in increasing the
level of casualties and the area of coverage.
(4) In planning the intergration of fires, the brigade commander
must consider the possibility that the planned nuclear fires
may not achieve the expected results or that they may become
unavailable because of operational or technical conditions.
Insofar as possible, he should plan other courses of action
for these eventualities. If the success of the overall operation
plan is based on the availability and employment of certain
nuclear fires, the brigade commander will have to alter, revise,

48 AGO 3S26B
 or perhaps discard the plan entirely if the nuclear fires are not
employed. He must be prepared to make these changes rapidly
or to make specific recommendations to higher headquarters
concerning alternate courses of action.
g. Fire Control Measures.
(1) Boundaries. In addition to delimiting areas of unit responsi-
bility, boundaries control maneuver and also serve as a measure
for coordinating fire. When fires employed by one force will
have casualty or damage producing effects in the zone of an
adjacent unit, these fires must be coordinated with and approved
by the adjacent force. Units may engage targets outside their
boundaries without coordination with the adjacent force pro-
vide the target is beyond the adjacent units "no-fire" line.
(2) Bombline. The bombline (BL) is a line designated by ground
forces beyond which air attacks may be executed without
clearance from the ground forces, provided that no more than
negligible weapons effects occur short of the line. The bomb-
line should be easily identifiable from the air and should follow
well defined geographical features.
(3) Nuclear safety line. Nuclear safety lines (NSL) are lines
selected to follow well-defined geographical features if possible
and used as troop safety measures in conjunction with the em-
ployment of friendly nuclear weapons. They may be used to
establish areas in which friendly troops must observe certain
protective measures; to designate limits of advance of friendly
troops before specified unacceptable effects from planned
nuclear fires are encountered; or to prescribe limits to which
certain effects of friendly weapons may be permitted to extend
in the direction of friendly troops. The exact usage of each
nuclear safety line must be explained in paragraph 3, "Coor-
dinating Instructions," of the operation order.
(4) Fire coordination line. The fire coordination line (FCL) is a
line established to coordinate fires between airborne forces
and linkup forces or between two converging forces. It is used
to regulate flat-trajectory and high-angle fires as well as air-
strikes. Units will not fire beyond this line without first co-
ordinating with the unit on the other side. The FCL should be
easily identifiable on the ground and on the map.
(5) No-fire line. The no-fire line (NFL) is a line beyond which
artillery units may fire without prior clearance from the artillery
unit in direct support of the unit in whose area of interest the
line is located. Artillery fire short of the no-fire line must be
cleared by the direct support artillery unit supporting the unit
concerned or by the headquarters which established the line.
(6) Preplanned fires. Commanders must insure flexibility in the
procedures governing the use of preplanned fires and fire co-
AGO 3326B 49
 ordination measures. Many operations may gain such mo-
mentum that preplanned fires are not required for their success.

42. Fire Support Planning and Coordination

a. General. Fire support planning is continuous and covers in detail
the employment of all fire support available to the 'command. Fire
support planning is done concurrently with other operational planning.
It routinely includes the timely exchange of fire planning data among
higher, adjacent, and subordinate units.
b. Fire CoordinationPersonnel.
(1) Fire support coordinator. The commander of the artillery
battalion attached to or in direct support of the brigade acts
as the brigade fire support coordinator (FSCOORD). He
operates under the unit staff supervision of the brigade S3. The
duties of the FSCOORD include-
(a) Advising the commander and staff on all fire support matters.
(b) Preparing the fire support portion of the brigade SOP.
(c) Preparing brigade fire support plans under supervision of the
S3.
(d) Coordinating all supporting fires, including certain aspects of
close air support and air delivered nuclear weapons (in con-
junction with S3).
(e) Keeping other artillery units informed of the brigade situation.
(f) Planning and coordinating air defense according to the
policy established by higher headquarters and the brigade
commander's directives.
(2) Other personnel. Other personnel who participate in fire support
coordination and planning at the brigade level include-
(a) The S3, assistant S3, and personnel from the S3 section.
(b) Liaison officers.
(c) The S3 air.
(d) The assistant S2.
(e) The chemical officer.
(f) A forward air controller, when one is attached to the brigade.
(g) A Naval gunfire liaison officer (NGFLO), when one is attached
to the brigade.
(h) Representatives of combat or combat support elements
assigned to or in support of the brigade, such as chemical,
intelligence, psychological warfare, and army aviation.
(3) References. For additional information on the organization and
functions of fire support coordination personnel, see Chapter 6,
FM 6-20-2.
c. Fire Support Plan.
(1) The fire support plan is prepared by the FSC and coordinated
by the S3 to insure complete integration of the scheme of ma-
neuver and the plan of fire support. The basis of the fire sup-

50 AGO 8826B
 port plan is the commander's guidance and concept of operation.
In both, he includes a statement of his desired employment of
supporting fires and specifies, in general terms, general target
area, scheduling of fires and priorities of fires. His guidance on
nuclear employment specifies the results he expects to achieve
with nuclear fires, the results he does not want, troop safety and
the way these fires are to be integrated with his plan of ma-
neuver (par. 45).
(2) The exchange of fire support planning data between attached
units and the brigade and between brigade and division must
be timely and continuous. This is essential to permit con-
current and coordinated fire support planning at all levels.
(3) In the brigade, fire support planning is conducted from company
through brigade level. Company commanders, assisted by
their artillery forward observers, formulate the company's fire
support plan. The company fire support plan, when com-
pleted, is forwarded to the battalion S3 and FSCOORD who
integrate it into the battalion fire support plan.
(4) At the battalion level, the FSCOORD (a liaison officer from the
artillery battalion in DS of the brigade, or when no liaison
officer is present, the platoon leader of the heavy mortar pla-
toon) integrates into the battalion fire support plan the require-
ments generated by the companies, the battalion commander
and his staff, and those imposed by higher headquarters. The
battalion FSCOORD informally coordinates his plan during its
preparation with the brigade FSCOORD and requests additional
fires reflected in his plan which cannot be met with organic fire
means. The battalion fire support plan is approved by the
battalion commander and forwarded to the brigade S3 and
FSCOORD where it is checked and integrated into the brigade
fire support plan. Final coordination and allocation of means
for portions of the plan dealing with request for fires, nuclear
and naval fires, and preplanned air strikes, all previously
approved informally by the brigade FSCOORD, are accom-
plished by the brigade staff on receipt of the plan. When
available means are limited and requests for approved pre-
planned fires cannot be met, the FSCOORD either provides
alternate means or refers the matter to the S3 for decision of the
brigade commander and establishing of priority.
(5) At the brigade, the fire support coordinator determines require-
ments for fire in support of the brigade's plan of operation, and
compares these requirements against fire capabilities available
to the brigade. The fire support coordinator consolidates and
refines the requests for fire from attached units. When the
total requirements have been determined, fire support means
under control of the brigade are allocated, and additional fire
AGO 8326B 51
 support, including close air, is requested from the fire support
element (FSE) of the tactical operations center (TOC) division.
(a) The brigade fire support plan is published as an annex to the
brigade operation plan or order. Advance copies are fur-
nished to the direct support artillery battalion and division
FSE, where concurrent fire support planning takes place.
(b) Concurrently with the preparation of the fire support plan,
detailed weapons fire plans such as artillery, air, and naval,
are prepared and either become a part of the plan of fire sup-
port or are appended to the fire support annex. Normally
nuclear fires are included in the fire support plans of the
various fire support agencies. In exceptional cases where
the quantity of information about nuclear fire warrants, a
separate nuclear fire plan is prepared and included as an
appendix to the fire support plan.
(c) Ideally, the fire support plan is produced and disseminated as
a completed plan; however, this is often impractical because
of time limitations. The operation order is frequently issued
initially without the fire support :plan annex and its detailed
appendixes. The initial order will contain the fire support
portion of the commander's concept, as well as information of
direct support, and reinforcing or attached fire support units
available. Details of the fire support plan and approval of
these details are sent piecemeal between the brigade and
subordinate units. Ultimately, the complete fire support
plan becomes an annex to the operation order.
(d) Fire planning does not stop when the fire support plan has
been published. Changes must be made and the plan revised
because of alterations in the plan of operation and changes in
the enemy and friendly situations.
43. Artillery Fire Planning
a. The artillery fire plan for the brigade is prepared by the artillery
battalion (battalion group) in DS of the brigade. It is based on require-
ments for preplanned fires-
(1) Submitted by the brigade commander and staff.
(2) Submitted by brigade combat units.
(3) Imposed by higher headquarters, for example to support an
attack by an adjacent brigade.
b. Requirements for nuclear toxic chemical and biological fires to be
delivered by artillery units are processed through command channels.
The commander with approval authority will, if he approves the request,
refer it to his FSE in the TOC for implementation. If the brigade com-
mander has authority to approve the request;, and does so, he passes the
fire request to his FSCOORD.
c. The completed brigade artillery fire plan is forwarded to the division

52 AGO 8826B
artillery FSCOORD where it is integrated into the artillery fire plan for
the division. A copy of the brigade artillery fire plan may be attached as
an appendix to the brigade fire support plan.

44. Fire Support Requests

(fig. 18)
a. Supporting Artillery Fires. Most requests for supporting artillery
fires fall within the following general categories:
(1) Plannedfires. Fires (concentration) planned on areas or targets
on which a need for artillery fire can be envisaged.
(a) On-call fires. Planned fires which are to be fired as directed.
These may include fires for which firing data is prepared in
advance and kept current or may be planned as to location
only.
(b) Scheduled fires. Planned fires which are to be delivered at a
specific time.
(2) Targets of opportunity. Fires on targets which are unforeseen
and for which firing data has not been prearranged. Such targets
are normally fleeting in nature.
b. Close Air Support. Close air support requests are classified as-
(1) Preplanned. Missions for which a requirement can be foreseen
based upon operational and fire support plans, target infor-
mation, and the tactical air effort available.
(2) Immediate. These are missions for which a need cannot be
foreseen. These can be compared with "targets of opportunity
for artillery fire."
c. References. For a detailed discussion of types of artillery fires and
close air support, see FM 6-20-1 and FM 6-20-2.
d. Nuclear Fires. Requests for nuclear fires are processed through
command channels to the next higher command. Procedures are de-
signed to insure rapid transmission and delivery of requests to the com-
mander, or his representative authorized to act on the request. Notifica-
tion of the request may also be sent through fire support channels to
alert the fire direction center and to insure prompt delivery by using a
concurrent transmission through fire support channels. Decision to
employ, or not employ, nuclear weapons rests with the commander to
whom appropriate weapons are allocated.
e. Nonnuclear Artillery Fires.
(1) Requests for nonnuclear artillery fires are coordinated by the
forward observer with the committed company and then trans-
mitted directly to the fire direction center (FDC) of the support-
ing artillery battalion. Artillery fire requests originating at
battalion and brigade are sent directly to the DS artillery
battalion FDC. This FDC will request any additional fires
required from a reinforcing artillery unit, if appropriate, or
from the FDC of the next higher echelon.
AGO 3826B 53
 (2) Requests for delivery of biological agents and toxic chemicals
are processed through command channels.
f. Air Support.
(1) Preplanned air requests are processed by battalions and the
brigade in the same manner as other fires. The preplanned air
requests are transmitted through air requests channels by the
brigade S3 air to the tactical air support element (TASE) in the
division TOC.
(2) Immediate air requests originating at company or battalion
level are transmitted by the battalion directly to the division
G3 air. Such requests are monitored by the brigade S3 air who

(DS oF BDEI .',

080~0

TASE REINF OR GS)

OF IARTY
TOC ID

NONNUCLEAR ARTY FIRE

NUCLEAR, CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL FIRES (COMMAND CHANNEL)
TACTICAL AIR

Figure 18. Fire support request channels-schematic.

NONNUL54
EAAGO 8326B
 takes no action unless the request is disapproved by the brigade,
in which case he enters the air request net to issue the necessary
disapproval. Requests for immediate air strikes originating at
the brigade are transmitted over the air request net to the
division G3 air.
g. Naval Gunfire. Requests for naval gunfire are submitted through
representatives of the naval commander supporting a ground operation.
These representatives normally are part of an air naval gunfire liaison
company (ANGLICO). When naval gunfire is to be employed to attack
a target, it is fired by the direct or general support ship(s) of the echelon
concerned using naval gunfire procedures. If additional naval gunfire
is required, assistance is requested of the next higher echelon.

45. Special Nuclear Considerations

a. Importance of Nuclear Fires.
(1) A sizable portion of the potential combat power of the brigade
lies in the organic nuclear support capability of its attached
units and in the additional nuclear support available from
higher headquarters. A portion of the latter will often be
available to the brigade and must be carefully considered in
reaching tactical decisions. When properly employed, nuclear
weapons may be decisive.
(2) In stating his planning guidance and his concept concerning the
employment of nuclear weapons, the commander covers any
of the following which are not adequately provided for in existing
SOP:
(a) General scheme for the integration of nuclear fires with
nonnuclear fires and maneuver.
(b) Desired results of the nuclear attack.
(c) Troop safety.
(d) Limiting requirements (i.e., probability of fallout, tree blow-
down, destruction of cities, etc.).
(e) Time of firing.
b. Integration of Plan of Nuclear Fires With the Plan of Operations.
(1) The plan for nuclear weapons employment both supports and
influences all other elements of the plan of operations. The
scheme of maneuver and the plan for nuclear and nonnuclear fire
support are inseparable and must be prepared concurrently.
The availability of nuclear fires may favor the adoption of a
scheme of maneuver which may otherwise be impracticable.
The brigade commander may find that his scheme of maneuver
will be based upon or significantly influenced by the nuclear fire
plan of a higher headquarters.
(2) Nuclear fires are most effective when exploited by ground action.
Therefore, where practicable, provisions should be made for
their timely exploitation in all types of tactical action, including
AGO 3326B 55
 defense. The mechanized brigade has an excellent exploitation
capability. Nuclear fires may also be exploited by nonnuclear
fires which can prevent or delay enemy reorganization and
reinforcement.
(3) The disadvantages of employing nuclear weapons must be
considered. The obstacles and debris created by nuclear fires
may slow an attacking force, particularly a mechanized one,
more than action by the enemy. They may also be a hindrance
to a defending force. Residual radiation produced by neutron-
induced gamma activity and from fallout can seriously interfere
with friendly operations.
c. Types of Nuclear Fires.
(1) Nuclear fires, like nonnuclear fires, are classified as planned or
fires on targets of opportunity.
(2) The frequency with which planned fires are used may be limited
by the availability of intelligence concerning suitable targets.
Targets selected for planned nuclear fires must be kept under
constant surveillance to insure necessary adjustment or can-
cellation of the fires. Planned nuclear fires are included in the
fire support plan. Priorities are assigned to planned fires ac-
cording to their relative importance to the accomplishment of
the mission.
(3) The target analysis and weapon delivery data, exclusive of
employment time, are calculated for on-call fires and included in
the fire plan. On-call fires may be planned for areas where the
suitable targets are likely to develop, such as possible enemy
reserve assembly or known unoccupied defense areas. To the
degree possible, plans are made to use all available types of
delivery means against on-call targets. Selected on-call targets
are assigned relative priorities for the preparation of employment
data. It is often possible to obtain on-call nuclear fires within a
very short time after they have been requested and approved.
Minor changes in distance and direction can usually be made
with little loss in time, provided the same planned delivery
means are used. A change of delivery means and major changes
of distance or direction usually cause a considerable delay.
Targets engaged under these circumstances should be considered
as targets of opportunity.
(4) Targets of opportunity are analyzed and the employment data
calculated as rapidly as possible consistent with the need for
accuracy and the time available. Unconfirmed fleeting targets
should not be attacked with nuclear fire. In planning nuclear
fires on targets of opportunity, the fastest means of delivery
consistent with troop safety and the maximum contribution to
the accomplishment of the mission should be utilized. Non-
nuclear fires may be used to fix fleeting targets until nuclear fires

56 AGO 8826B
 can be employed. Difficulties and delays in attacking targets
of opportunity highlight the need for planning of on-call fires.
d. Selection of Weapons.
(1) In determining what nuclear weapons to use, the commander
should consider the number, type, and characteristics of the
weapons available; delivery means available; extent of damage
desired; troop safety requirements; permanence of target; and
means available to exploit the effects.
(2) The number and type of weapons available to the brigade are
determined by higher echelons of command. This should not
preclude requests for specific weapons not included in such
allocations. From the weapons allocated to him, the brigade
commander must make maximum use of available warheads by
proper target analysis, selectivity in the choice of targets, and
maximum exploitation of the effects of the strikes.
(3) Army nuclear delivery systems are generally preferred because
of their greater accuracy, all-weather capability, and respon-
siveness to the will of the supported commander. Air delivery,
if properly preplanned, permits a fuller utilization of a nuclear
weapon's potential in some situations. Such situations arise
when the supported unit is beyond the range of ground delivery
units, when enemy action prevents ground units from deliver-
ing fire, or when ground delivery means within range of the
target are inadequate because of yield or other limitations.
Delivery means under the direct control of the lowest com-
mander should be used to the maximum to speed the process of
delivery and permit higher commanders' to conserve their
delivery means until urgently required.
(4) The extent of damage desired is determined by the commander
who plans or requests the fire. To establish the amount of
damage desired, he considers his mission, the enemy situation
(to include state of combat training and defenses against nuclear
weapons), the terrain and weather, and the safety of his troops.
His decision constitutes the basis for weapons planning.
(5) Troop safety is a prime consideration in planning the employ-
ment of nuclear weapons. Commanders must determine the
safety criteria desired for each nuclear strike and inform nuclear
weapons employment officers and other operational planners
during the planning stage.
(6) The fleeting nature of a target may be the overriding consider-
ation in determining whether or not a nuclear weapon. will be
employed against it. Intelligence processes and confirmation
reports concerning the target must be expedited to the maxi-
mum.
(7) A linear target is usually less remunerative to a single weapon
attack than is a circular target. The use of more than one small
AGO 3326B 57
 yield nuclear weapon may provide better results than a single
weapon attack against a linear target.
e. Type of Burst.
(1) Normally the height of burst is selected that will cause maximum
casualties or damage to the target consistent with troop safety
and limiting requirements.
(2) When it is desired to deny the enemay an area that will not be
used by friendly forces, a surface or subsurface burst may be
used to contaminate the area with residual radiation and to form
a crater when surface bursts are permitted by higher head-
quarters and the area of predicted fallout is within the brigades
area of responsibility. This may be particularly useful in areas
where routes for movement are few or pass through defiles.
Wind velocity and direction with respect to the location of
friendly forces are critical to a decision to employ a surface or
subsurface burst.
f. Troop Safety Procedures.
(1) A nuclear safety line for each nuclear weapon or group of nuclear
weapons employed is established in advance of the time of
employment (par. 41g(4)).
(2) In an attack, nuclear safety lines may be planned in conjunction
with either on-call or scheduled fires. Friendly troops do not
advance beyond the safety line without clearance from the
commander who controls the employment of the nuclear weap-
ons. Phase lines may be employed as nuclear safety lines.
(3) Troops must be warned of a nuclear attack in time to take
necessary protective measures as directed by the commander.
(4) In conjunction with plans for nuclear fires, provisions are made
for radiological monitoring and surveying, and for actions to be
taken in the event of radiological contamination.
(5) Commanders must personally approve any deviation from the
safety criteria.

Section IV. INTELLIGENCE SUPPORT

46. General
Intelligence is a basic requirement for the successful planning and
conduct of military operations. The intelligence capabilities of the bri-
gade, in addition to those agencies of higher echelons that are available
to support the brigade's intelligence activities, must be understood and
exploited. Detailed intelligence procedures are prescribed in FM 30-5
and other appropriate field manuals.

47. Flow of Information and Intelligence

a. The brigade S2 section must be capable of processing a mass of
information quickly. As this information is processed into intelligence,

58 AGO S826B
the S2 section will insure timely dissemination of this intelligence to all
staff sections and to higher, lower, and adjacent units.
b. The requirement for a swiftly functioning intelligence system is
greatly assisted by an effective communication system. The brigade S2
section has a radio which operates in the division intelligence net.
48. Reconnaissance
a. Ground Reconnaissance. Each major maneuver unit attached to the
brigade has an organic ground reconnaissance capability. Aggressive
ground reconnaissance is a positive means of determining disposition and
identification of enemy forces. The greater the dispersion of the battle-
field, the greater is the requirement for reconnaissance and the more
readily patrols can penetrate and develop enemy positions.
(1) The armored cavalry squadron is one of the principal division
reconnaissance units. This unit is normally employed under
division control, but the squadron, or elements thereof may be
attached to the brigade. See paragraph 38 for a discussion of
the reconnaissance capabilities of this unit.
(2) The scout section of the brigade headquarters and headquarters
company has a limited ground reconnaissance capability.
b. Aerial Reconnaissance. Aerial reconnaissance should be continuous
and coordinated with ground reconnaissance. The brigade commander
through the S2 must exploit the capabilities of Army aviation, supporting
services and allied air forces.
(1) Army aviation. Army aviation may be used either in a primary
air reconnaissance role or in support of ground reconnaissance
elements. The division aviation battalion has an aerial sur-
veillance capability employing visual observation and sensory
devices to include photography and radar. It also has the
capability for battle area illumination for night reconnaissance.
The brigade aviation platoon also has a limited reconnaissance
capability. See paragraph 58. Helicopters may expedite the
effects of patrols and extend their range by moving them to
their starting points in enemy territory and picking' them up at
prearranged locations. Requests for aerial surveillance or
reconnaissance missions for intelligence purposes are coordi-
nated by the S2.
(2) Tactical air force. The reconnaissance wings of the tactical
air force include reconnaissance-fighter and reconnaissance-
bomber type aircraft. Reconnaissance-bomber type aircraft
provide night photographic, electronic, weather, and limited
visual reconnaissance information. The reconnaissance-fighter
aircraft perform visual and photo air reconnaissance.
49. Agencies
a. General. Information collection agencies organic to the brigade and
its normal attachments and support include-
AGO 3326B 59
 (1) The scout section and the aviation platoon of the brigade head-
quarters and headquarters company. (See pars. 32 and 54
through 61.)
(2) Combat battalions-each combat battalion has organic to its
battalion headquarters and headquarters company a reconnais-
sance platoon and a ground surveillance section. In addition
to these elements, which are specifically designed for information
collection and target acquisition, the other subordinate com-
panies and platoons of the battalions have an information collec-
tion capability. See FM 7-20:
(3) Combat support units-supportingartillery units have excellent
target acquisition capabilities in their ground and aerial ob-
servers, aircraft and in countermortar and medium range sur-
veillance radars. Combat support units such as the engineer
company normally in support of the brigade have a limited
information collecting capability.
b. Other Agencies. Normally, corps and field army agencies will be
available to support the division's intelligence operations. In certain
instances, elements of these units may be attached to or working with the
brigade. These include-
(1) Military intelligence detachments. This detachment provides
specialists in image interpretation, language translation and
interpretation, order of battle, prisoner of war interrogation, and
security. Details on the operations of this detachment are
contained in FM 30-9.
(2) U.S. Army Security Agency division support company. This
company will normally support the division by providing com-
munication intelligence and a means of assisting in the mainte-
nance of communication security.
(3) Combat electronic warfare company. A combat electronic war-
fare company may be attached to or support the division. This
unit furnishes information and intelligence of enemy electronic
activities.

50. Counterintelligence
a. Effective counterintelligence increases the security of the brigade
and aids in the achievement of surprise by denying information to the
enemy through active and passive measures. Active counterintelligence
measures are designed to block the enemy's attempts to gain information
and include counterreconnaissance, challenge and password systems, and
aerial and ground reconnaissance to detect and expose the enemy's
intelligence effort. Passive measures conceal information from the enemy
and include censorship, secrecy discipline, security of classified documents
and materiel, signal communications and security, movement control, the
use of concealment, camouflalg, electronic countermeasures, and control
of civil populations.

60 AGO 8326B
 b. The brigade assistant S2 is usually designated as the brigade counter-
intelligence officer.
51. Captured Enemy Material
The S2 is responsible for the evacuation of captured enemy material in
accordance with local policy and FM 30-5, when such material has an
intelligence value.

52. Intelligence Support of Tactical Cover and

Deception Operations
Planning of tactical cover and deception operations is a primary S3
responsibility; the intelligence aspects of these operations, however, must
be mutually and completely coordinated with the S2. Although planning
for and supervision of tactical cover and deception operations is normally
accomplished by division and higher echelons, the brigade plays a major
role in executing such plans. Close coordination between the brigade
S2 and S3 and the divisions G2 and G3 is essential to insure successful
execution of tactical cover and deception operations. See FM 31-40.

Section V. ENGINEER SUPPORT

53. General
a. Engineer support is normally provided to each committed brigade.
Usually, one engineer company from the division engineer battalion is
attached to or placed in direct support of the brigade; this unit may be
reinforced by additional division engineer units, equipment, or by corps
engineers. Special engineer units and equipment support the brigade
when it is employed in river crossing operations and joint amphibious
operations.
b. The company at full strength is capable of -
(1) Supervision of organic and attached engineer troops.
(2) Construction, repair, and maintenance of roads, bridges, fords,
and culverts.
(3) Assisting in the removal of obstacles, including mines and
boobytraps.
(4) Preparing and executing demolitions, including atomic demo-
lition munitions (ADM).
(5) Performing engineer reconnaissance and intelligence missions.
(6) General construction, including construction of fixed wing and
helicopter landing facilities.
(7) Assisting in the assault of fortified positions and assault de-
molitions of obstacles.
(8) Technical assistance to supported troops in construction of
obstacles, fortifications, emplacements, camouflage, deception
AGO 3326B 61
 devices, and other engineer matters. May construct these
facilities when required.
(9) Engaging in infantry combat missions when required.
c. The commander of the engineer unit attached to or in support of the
brigade functions as the brigade engineer.

Section VI. BRIGADE AVIATION SUPPORT

54. Army Aviation, General

a. The primary purpose for army aviation is to provide all commanders
with immediate aircraft services to perform the following functions:
(1) Observation.
(2) Movement of troops and supplies.
(3) Airmobility for ground reconnaissance forces.
(4) Command and communications.
(5) Emergency evacuation of wounded.
b. The majority of aviation personnel and equipment has been organ-
ized at division and higher levels and is made available to smaller units
on an "as required" basis.
c. Army aviation is immediately responsive to the demands of the
commander. Therefore, commanders at all levels, always consider using
Army aviation in the accomplishment of the unit mission and request
this aviation support when it is required.
d. For details on Army aviation, refer to FM 1-100, FM 1-5, FM 1-15,
FM 1-60, FM 57-35, FM 61-100, and FM 57-210.

55. Mission, Capabilities and Organization of the

Brigade Aviation Platoon
a. Mission. Within its capabilities, the aviation platoon provides
Army aviation support to the brigade.
b. Capabilities. With its six observation helicopters, the platoon
performs the following functions:
(1) Provide aerial vehicles for command and control.
(2) Aerial observation and reconnaissance.
(3) Aerial wire laying.
(4) Radiological survey.
c. Organization. The platoon contains sixteen personnel and is or-
ganized as shown in figure 6.
56. Duties of Aviation Platoon Personnel
a. Platoon Commander. The platoon commander is the principal
special staff adviser to the brigade commander on all matters pertaining
to the employment of Army aviation, organic or supporting. He is re-
sponsible for the training, discipline, control, and employment of his
platoon. He operates under the staff supervision of the S3.

62 AGO 3326B
 b. Rotary Wing Aviator. The six rotary wing aviators coordinate with
supported unit commanders or staff officers on matters of communica-
-tions, security, and certain logistical support. They are capable of per-
forming minor organizational maintenance on their assigned aircraft.
c. Maintenance Supervisor. The maintenance supervisor acts as pla-
toon sergeant for the platoon and supervises the work of the crew chiefs
on their assigned aircraft. He schedules and coordinates platoon mainte-
nance. He normally remains at the platoon base of operations which is
in the brigade trains area.
d. Crew Chief. The six crew chiefs perform organizational mainte-
nance within individual skill levels and tool availability, to include
armament on their assigned aircraft. They refuel and service organic and
transient aircraft. They are trained to operate the platoon radios. The
crew chief normally accompanies his aircraft when it is supporting a
subordinate unit of the brigade. One crew chief drives the platoon 3s-ton
truck.
e. Petroleum Storage Specialist. The petroleum storage specialist
drives the organic tanker or truck and is responsible for POL resupply for
the platoon aircraft. He assists the maintenance supervisor in main-
taining technical publications and records pertinent to the aircraft and
other equipment of the platoon.
f. Aircraft Mechanic Helper/Driver. The aircraft mechanic helper as-
sists the crew chiefs in the maintenance of the aircraft. Additionally,
he drives the platoon 4-ton truck and operates the radios mounted
therein.
57. Aviation Platoon Communications
a. When time permits, the brigade communications platoon installs
telephone lines to the aviation platoon base of operations.
b. An AN/GRR-5 radio set is installed in the platoon U-ton truck
for the purpose of monitoring the division warning net (AM).
c. An AN/VRC-18 radio set is mounted in the platoon l4-ton truck
and is used to communicate in both the brigade command net (FM) and
the aviation platoon command net (FM).
3
d. An AN/VRC-10 is mounted in the platoon /-ton truck to permit
the maintenance supervisor to enter the aviation platoon command net
(FM).
58. Operations
a. Employment. The principal governing employment of the aviation
platoon is that the organic aircraft will be employed in the performance
of those aviation tasks which the brigade commander deems of greatest
importance to the successful accomplishment of his mission. Operational
missions for the platoon are assigned by the brigade S3, through the
platoon leader, based on priorities and guidance established by the com-
AGO 3326B 63
mander. As a matter of high priority, organic aircraft are employed
primarily for command and control purposes by the brigade and attached
battalion commanders and staffs. Brigade units request army aviation
support through the brigade S3.
b. Location. During the conduct of tactical operations the platoon
normally operates from a base of operations in the vicinity of the brigade
trains. Some brigade aircraft are normally placed under operational con-
trol of the attached elements of the brigade. The platoon base of oper-
ations consists of a helicopter pad and a small maintenance area.
c. Displacement. During displacement, the ground elements of the
platoon move with the headquarters and headquarters company. Aircraft
and aviators displace with supported units. Nonflyable aircraft remain
in the old area with sufficient maintenance personnel to repair them. In
the event evacuation is necessary, adequate personnel remain to provide
security for the aircraft until evacuation is effected. The evacuation of
aircraft may have to be accomplished on brigade vehicles under ex-
ceptional circumstances.
d. Type Support. Army aviation elements are capable of providing
support to all units, agencies, and individuals of the brigade. Examples
of the types of typical support include, but are not limited to, the follow-
ing: Command control; reconnaissance; movement of personnel, equip-
ment, and supplies; security; illumination; adjustment of fire; radio relay;
wire laying; supplemental medical evacuation; smoke screening; radio-
logical survey; propaganda dissemination; target acquisition; surveillance;
photography; courier; and damage assessment. Aviation support beyond
the capabilities of this platoon, especially for airmobile operations, should
be obtained from the division aviation battalion.
59. Maintenance
a. Every opportunity for maintenance should be exploited to avoid
excessive down-time.
b. Maintenance beyond the capability of the crew chief is performed
by mobile repair teams of the forward support platoon of the aircraft
maintenance company of the maintenance battalion. Recovery and
evacuation of disabled aircraft is a responsibility of the aircraft mainte-
nance company. Replacement of evacuated aircraft is made when
replacement items are available, and within the policies established by the
major commander concerned.
c. The aircraft maintenance company provides aircraft repair parts
support on an emergency basis only. Request for emergency parts
support is submitted by the crew chief to the supporting mobile aircraft
repair team by the most expeditious means. For other than emergency
support, crew chiefs report repair part requirements to the maintenance
supervisor who in turn reports the requirements to the supply section of
the brigade headquarters and headquarters company. The supply sect-
ion notifies the general support aircraft maintenance company of require-

64 AGO 88326B
ments by the most expeditious means (radio, telephone, or personal
contact).
d. Aircraft which require maintenance whose scope is beyond the
brigade capability to perform are repaired on-site, on an emergency basis,
by mobile repair teams of the forward support platoon of the aircraft
maintenance company. If the aircraft requires extensive maintenance,
it is made safe for a one-time flight to the main support platoon of the
aircraft maintenance company. If this is impossible, the main support
platoon accomplishes recovery and evacuation of the aircraft.

60. Administrative Support

The administrative support for the aviation platoon is accomplished
by the brigade headquarters and headquarters company.

61. Supply
Resupply for all classes of supply, except class IIIA, for the aviation
platoon is accomplished through normal resupply procedures and is
provided by the brigade headquarters and headquarters company.
When the aviation platoon personnel and equipment are operating with a
subordinate element, the subordinate element provides resupply to the
maximum extent possible, including at least classes I and V. The air-
craft normally return to the aviation platoon base of operations or another
appropriate aviation facility for refueling. See paragraph 80d (3).

Section VII. OTHER COMBAT SUPPORT

62. Ground Transportation

a. The tank and mechanized infantry battalions of the mechanized
brigade and the armor brigade are 100 percent mobile using organic
transportation. The infantry and airborne infantry battalion lack or-
ganic vehicular mobility; hence corps and field army transportation units
must be made available to motorize or mechanize these battalions.
b. The supply and transport battalion of the division has the mission of
transporting and distributing supplies (except medical consumables) for
the division and supplementing supply movement in division units.
Trucks from this unit will not normally be available to motorize the
infantry and airborne infantry battalion.
c. APC, when available from corps or field army, are used to mechanize
the infantry and airborne infantry battalion of the brigade. APC
companies should be employed so as to preserve unit integrity if at all
possible.
d. Trucks have limited value for transporting personnel in the attack-
ing echelon because of their vulnerability and limited cross-country
mobility. They may be used effectively, however, for movement to
forward assembly areas, for motorizing reserves, for resupply and supple-
AGO 3326B 65
mental casualties evacuation, and for transportation in pursuit and
movement to contact operations.
e. Brigade requests for additional transportation to motorize or
mechanize walking elements of tactical units are processed through com-
mand channels. The brigade S3 has primary staff interest in tactical
transportation.

63. Signal Corps Units

a. The division signal battalion furnishes both direct support to
brigade headquarters and general support to units located in the
brigade area. Direct support to brigade headquarters is furnished by
a forward command communication section. This section connects the
brigade into the division area communication system and operates a
station in the Division Comd/Opns Net RATT for the brigade. The
section is located at the brigade CP.
b. General support to units in the brigade area is furnished by a forward
area signal center platoon. This platoon provides message, message
center, messenger, teletypewriter, crypto, telephone switching and patch-
ing, radiowire integration, and multichannel radio-relay facilities. It
also operates a station in the Division Admin/Log Net RATT. The
platoon normally locates in the vicinity of the brigade trains.
c. See figure 9 for a type division area communication system.
64. Chemical Corps Units
Chemical Corps Units are provided by Army and may operate under
division control.
a. These Army units have the capability of providing the following
types of support:
(1) Smoke operations.
(2) CBR survey and reconnaissance to include radiological surveys.
(3) Servicing of flame weapons.
(4) Decontamination.
(5) Chemical technical intelligence.
b. The initial source of chemical supply and maintenance is provided
by elements of the support command. This support will be supple-
mented by direct and general support type units of the Field Army.
Logistical service to be provided by these units includes-
(1) Supply.
(2) Third echelon maintenance of chemical equipment.

Section VIII. ORGANIZATION FOR COMBAT

65. General
a. Definitions are as follows:
(1) Organization for combat. The grouping of combat, combat

66 AGO 8326B
 support, and administrative support units for combat operations
and designating command relationships for their control.
(2) Assigned unit. A unit placed in an organization on a permanent
basis and controlled and administered for its primary function
by that organization. An example is the rifle company of the
infantry battalion.
(3) Attached unit. A unit which is bound temporarily to a command
other than its assigned command; for example, an infantry
battalion is assigned to the division and attached to a brigade
for operations. When a unit is attached to the brigade, the
attached unit is under command of the brigade commander.
Subject to limitations imposed by the attachment order, this
implies full responsibility for supply, administration, training,
and operations.
(4) Unit in direct support. A unit which has been given a mission
or task to provide support for one unit while remaining under
control of its parent unit. The supporting unit is authorized and
required to answer directly to the supported unit's requests for
support.
(5) Units under operational control. Units which are placed under
a commander or staff officer for assignment of tasks and author-
itative directives-to accomplish a mission. Operational control
does not include responsibilities or authority for administration,
discipline, internal organization, or training.
b. The brigade has no assigned units other than the brigade head-
quarters and headquarters company. Combat units (infantry, airborne
infantry, mechanized infantry, and tank battalions) are normally attached
to the brigade for operations. Combat support units may be attached to
or placed in support of the brigade depending on the circumstances of
employment. In most situations, they are placed in direct support;
however, when the brigade is organized for independent or semi-independ-
ent operations, combat support units are usually attached.
c. Attachments to and detachments from the brigade are made by
division to provide the brigade the means to accomplish assigned missions.
In rapidly moving situations, changes in the organizational structure of
the brigade may be made frequently, and on short notice. The brigade
commander and his staff develop SOP and operational techniques which
permit attachments and detachments to be made expeditiously and
efficiently.
66. Implementation
a. Authority. The brigade organization is established and modified by
division orders. Changes in task organization during operations are
frequently made by fragmentary and/or oral orders.
b. Duration and Conditions of Employment. Whenever possible, the
order attaching or placing a unit in support will specify the anticipated
AGO 3326B 67
 duration of the attachment; any limitations on or conditions of employ-
ment of the unit should be clearly specified.
c. Timing. Changes in task organizations must be carefully planned
and timed to avoid unnecessary interference with combat operations.
Detachment of a unit should not be made while it is engaged with the
enemy or under conditions where its withdrawal would seriously jeopard-
ize the accomplishment of the mission of the unit to which it is attached.
Whenever possible, major changes in the organization of a unit should be
made while it is in reserve or during a lull in activities.
d. Administration. When attached or placed in support, units report
ready to fight or to perform their support missions. This includes having
the prescribed basic load of ammunition, other supplies as required, and
equipment and weapons in operable condition.
e. Coordination. The commander of an attached or supporting unit,
or his representative, should immediately report to the headquarters of
the supported unit for necessary orders and coordination. After reporting
to the commander, he should contact appropriate staff sections for ad-
ditional guidance and instructions and to arrange for administrative
support which may be required.
f. Communications. In making attachments or assigning support mis-
sions, consideration must be given to communications. Radios of the
attached or supporting unit must be able to operate in the nets of the
supported units, or arrangements made to provide radios which can.
67. Factors Bearing on Organization for Combat
a. Organization for combat is based upon an established requirement.
The command relationship adopted is guided by consideration for the
most effective employment. Attachment represents the firmest control
but may fail to fully utilize the attached element and imposes an addi-
tional administrative burden on the element to which it is attached.
Operational control provides a relationship wherein full use of the attached
element is devoted to the major element to which it is attached without
the burden of additional administrative support. The role of support
makes the element generally available but does not strictly limit the
application of its resources to a single force. Generally, the role of attach-
ment is preferred when the commander designating this status is unable
to otherwise provide effective control and afford administrative support.
Operational control is preferred when outside resources are available for
administrative support and effective control can be maintained. The
supporting role is preferred when effective control can be exercised by
the commander assigning the mission.
b. When conditions permit, i.e., when both tank and infantry units
are attached to the brigade, subordinate units may be formed into com-
bined arms task forces for employment. The brigade creates these task
forces by cross attachment. Type task forces include-
(1) Battalion task force. A battalion task force is a temporary

68 AGO 3326B
 grouping of units to provide the battalion task force commander
with the number and type of units necessary to accomplish a
specific mission or task. A battalion task force may be organized
around any type of combat battalion, infantry, mechanized
infantry, airborne infantry, or tank. Normally, battalion task
forces may be infantry heavy, tank heavy, or unweighted (equal
number of tank and infantry units).
(2) Company task force. A company task force is a temporary
grouping of combat units under one company commander for
a specific operation or mission.
c. Combat support units may be attached to or placed in support of
both battalion and company task forces.
d. Except in unusual circumstances, the brigade utilizes all battalion
command headquarters in organization for combat. Only rarely will one
battalion be attached to another. The principle applies to company task
forces formed by battalions.
e. The same combat support units should, when practicable, be placed
in support of the same tactical units. For example, direct support artillery
battalions and engineer companies should work with the same brigade.
Close and continuous association between the commanders and staffs of
combat and combat support units increases effectiveness of operations.

AGO 3826B 69
 CHAPTER 5
ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT

Section I. GENERAL
68. General
a. Administrative support for the brigade encompasses the
field of personnel support, logistical support, and the adminis-
trative aspect of civil affairs.
b. At division level, administrative support (except civil affairs)
is provided by units of the division support command, which is
organized on a functional basis as shown in figure 19. Personnel,
administrative and replacement functions are the responsibility of
the division adjutant general. Logistical support operations are
under the operational control of the division support command
commander. Details of division administration, logistical support,
and the organization and operation of the ADSOC are covered in
FM 54-2.
c. Combat battalions-
(1) Combat battalions assigned to the brigade are logistically
self sufficient when normal logistical support is available
through the division support command. The airborne in-
fantry battalion has less capability for administrative
support than other types of combat battalions because it
has less transport means. All combat battalions have the
capability of providing logistical support for attached
units.
(2) Combat battalions have no battalion personnel sections.
Personnel and administrative (P&A) functions and serv-
ices are accomplished for the battalions by the appro-
priate staff section of the division administration com-
pany. The battalion commander retains authority and
responsibility for initiating P&A actions and for the
effective overall personnel management of his command.
d. The brigade is a tactical echelon. However, the brigade is
organized and equipped to enter administrative channels to the
extent necessary to insure the successful accomplishment of its
mission. The brigade commander is responsible for all operations
of his brigade, including administration.

70 AGO 3326B
 Zr~~3
zO
c~~~~~~~
II,

40~~~~

IrI
LOZJ >z

<0~

-~~~~~~~>
z
0 0
aaZ
Zu
-c
Z>- 0.Z
z°

Oz
Z

32R7
>.~ 3]j I
0~ -Z

Of~~~~~~~~~~~~~ z,

N,

o z~~~~~~
El 356~,

IMI
ACOa

x 007

0 z

3326Er
AGO
I~ 71;z
 Section II. PERSONNEL
69. General
a. The brigade S1 exercises unit staff supervision over all
personnel activities affecting the brigade. He is assisted by the
brigade sergeant major. See paragraph 17c for a discussion of
the duties of the S1.
b. The brigade S1 establishes and maintains a close working
relationship with the Si's of attached and supporting units and
with the division G1 and division special staff officers in the per-
sonnel field (AG, IG, SJA, Chaplain, and PM).
c. The brigade Si does not enter the P&A channels between the
division administrative company and attached units, except for
policy matters. Units attached to the brigade normally com-
municate directly with the division Adjutant General Section.

70. Replacements
a. The brigade S1 monitors requirements from attached units
for replacement personnel, and in coordination with the S3, makes
recommendations to the brigade commander on priority of assign-
ment of replacements to attached units. The brigade commander
recommends to division priority of replacement support for
attached units.
b. Replacements are received and processed at the division re-
placement detachment which assigns them directly to division
units. They are moved from the division replacement detachment
to their new units under unit escort.
71. Morale and Personnel Services
The Si keeps the commander informed on the status of morale
and esprit of the brigade. He assists the Si's of attached units in
personnel services programs which include leave, rest and rec-
reational activities, religious activities, and finance, welfare,
legal and special services. He monitors the implementation of
awards and decoration policies established by higher headquarters
to insure prompt and proper recognition of individual and unit
heroism and meritorious achievement. He also monitors graves
registration activities within the brigade.
72. Discipline, Law and Order
a. The S1 assists the brigade commander and attached unit
Si's in maintaining a high state of discipline in the brigade.
b. The operation of the military police platoon attached to a
committed brigade is supervised by the brigade S1.

72 AGO 8326B
73. Courts-Martial Jurisdiction
The brigade commander exercises summary and special court-
martial jurisdiction over personnel of brigade headquarters, head-
quarters company, and units attached thereto which do not other-
wise have such jurisdiction. Normally, commanders of separate
battalions whose units are attached to a brigade will exercise
summary and special court-martial jurisdiction unless such juris-
diction is otherwise specified or withheld by the brigade com-
mander. When subordinate commanders exercise summary and
special court-martial jurisdiction, recommendations of cases for
trial by general court-martial should be forwarded through the
brigade commander. The brigade commander should be considered
in the channel of command for appeals from article 15 punish-
ments. Convening authorities of summary and special courts-
martial will forward records of trial directly to the staff judge
advocate for supervisory review.
74. Prisoner of War
a. The brigade S1 coordinates all matters relating to the col-
lection, safeguarding, processing, evacuation, and utilization of
prisoners of war with the division G1 and the division Provost
Marshal. He recommends the location of brigade POW collection
point which is normally operated by the military police platoon.
b. When the brigade is operating independently or semi-inde-
pendently, military police elements may be attached to assist in
PW collection and evacuation.
75. Headquarters Management
The S1 has staff responsibility for the movement, internal
arrangement, organization, and operation of the headquarters,
and the allocation of shelter within the brigade headquarters. His
principal assistant for this function is the headquarters com-
mandant.

Section III. CIVIL AFFAIRS

76. Civil Affairs
a. The brigade conducts civil affairs activities as directed by
division or higher headquarters, normally only to the extent re-
quired to prevent interference with combat operations by the
civilian population. This may include control over civilian popula-
tions to clear tactical areas, prevent congestion of roads, and
maintain security.
b. A civil affairs section (G5) normally augments the division
AGO 3326B 73
staff, and a CA command support platoon, consisting of a platoon
headquarters and a language team, is usually attached to the divi-
sion. Additional civil affairs functional specialists teams will be
attached temporarily to the division as required.
c. Civil affairs elements from the CA command support platoon
or from functional teams may be attached to the brigade, if the
brigade is organized for independent or semi-independent oper-
ations. Such elements are particularly appropriate for support
in guerrilla or counterguerrilla operations.
d. The brigade S3 supervises civil affairs activities of the
brigade.

Section IV. LOGISTICS

77. General
a. The brigade S4 is the brigade commander's principal staff
assistant for logistical matters. Other personnel in the brigade
headquarters and headquarters company who assist the S4 in
this function are-
(1) Brigade surgeon.
(2) Brigade chemical officer.
(3) Brigade communications officer (communications supply
and maintenance).
(4) Brigade aviation officer (aircraft organizational mainte-
nance).
(5) Headquarters commandant (brigade headquarters and
headquarters company supply and maintenance).
(6) The brigade S4 section consisting of the assistant S4,
the food adviser, food service supervisor, the supply
sergeant, and the supply clerk.
b. The major areas of logistical responsibilities of the brigade
are-maintenance, supply, medical, and transportation.

78. Division Support Elements

a. The division support command elements in the brigade trains
area are selected supply, medical, and maintenance elements of
the division support command charged with providing logistical
support to brigades and to other divisional units. They are pro-
vided for support of each committed brigade and for area support
of division units operating in the brigade area. A reserve brigade
is normally supported by a Forward Support Maintenance Com-
pany, but receives the remainder of its logistical support from the
division support area.
b. The division support command elements in the brigade trains
area normally consists of the following:

74 AGO 8326B
 (1) A forward support company of the maintenance battalion
with teams from the aircraft maintenance company. This
company has the capability of providing one-stop field
maintenance, repair parts, and mobile maintenance con-
tact teams for the maintenance of all equipment of the
brigade except medical, electrical accounting, and crypto-
graphic. The headquarters and main support company
provides backup support to this unit and also provides
salvage and evacuation service for the brigade for those
items not evacuated directly to the supply and trans-
portation battalion of the division support command.
(2) A medical company from the division medical battalion.
This company has the capability of establishing and
operating a clearing station. It evacuates casualties from
battalion aid stations using the ambulance platoon and
also provides medical class II and IV supply and main-
tenance.
(3) Division distributing points for class I, III and fast mov-
ing class II and IV supplies. A class V distributing point
may be established for the airborne brigade.
(4) A graves registration team, a salvage collecting point,
and a bath facility.
c. The support command units employed with a brigade nor-
mally operate under the control of the support command com-
mander. However, when the brigade is organized for independent
or semi-independent operations, these support elements are nor-
mally attached to the brigade.
d. The division support command elements supporting a brigade
are located in the brigade trains area. The brigade S4 coordinates
their security, specifies the location of support installations in the
trains areas, and controls displacement when they move with the
brigade trains.
e. For additional information on the organization and oper-
ations of the division support command elements, see FM 54-2.
79. Brigade Trains
a. Organization. The exact composition of the brigade trains
will vary in accordance with the tactical situation and the disposi-
tion of the tactical units attached to or in support of the brigade.
Normally, the brigade trains will include-
(1) The field trains of the attached battalions. These field
trains are composed of-
(a) The mess section of the battalion support platoon.
(b) Class III and V vehicles of the supply and transporta-
AGO 3326B 75
 tion section of the battalion support platoon not in-
cluded in the battalion combat trains.
(c) Battalion maintenance elements.
(d) Logistical support elements of units attached to the
battalion.
(2) Elements of the brigade company headquarters.
(3) Brigade staff section personnel not normally located with
the CP.
(4) Maintenance and supply section of the aviation platoon.
(5) The division support command elements.
(6) Service elements of combat support and administrative
support units attached to or in support of the brigade.
b. Control. Activities in the brigade trains area are under the
staff supervision of the brigade S4.
c. Location. Ideally, the brigade trains should be located in an
area which should-
(1) Be convenient to the units being served. If possible, there
should be a convenient road net front to rear that will
allow units to reach the areas quickly and easily. The
road system should contain alternate routes so that move-
ment can still be made even though some roads are cut
off by excessive travel or enemy activity.
(2) Not interfere with the operations of the combat elements.
Supply and maintenance activities and vehicular traffic
must not impede a combat unit's freedom of movement.
(3) Contain sufficient area to permit dispersion of vehicles
and installations.
(4) Offer concealment-from hostile ground and aerial obser-
vation.
(5) Offer firm ground for parking vehicles.
(6) Be where no terrain feature, such as an unfordable river,
is or may become a barrier to logistical operations.
(7) Contain terrain features that favor defense against air
or ground attacks and facilitate local security.
(8) Be so disposed that, in conjunction with other installa-
tions, they do not permit a lucrative nuclear target.
(9) Contain a suitable landing site for attached or supporting
Army aircraft employed in resupply activities, and/or a
suitable drop zone for parachute delivered supplies.
(10) Be near an adequate source of water.
(11) Be beyond the range of enemy light artillery fire.
(12) Permit installation and operation of communications.
80. Supply Procedures
a. General.
(1) Requisitioning, distribution, and other supply activities

76 AGO 3326B
 are conducted directly between brigade units and the
division support command. Most of these supply ac-
tivities take place in the brigade trains area. The brigade
assists attached units and the division in every way pos-
sible to insure adequate supply support for combat
operations.
(2) Whenever possible, unit distribution of supplies is made
by the division. However, the capabilities for unit dis-
tribution by the division supply and transport battalion
may make this method impractical in some situations.
When this occurs supply point distribution is used.
(3) Units of the brigade carry only those supplies required
for immediate consumption and depend on division for
continuous resupply.
(4) The brigade S4 routinely monitors logistical operations
for elements of the brigade. He operates in the logistical
system when necessary to insure support for the brigade.
b. Class I.
(1) Requisitions. The division obtains class I supplies from
the field army based on a strength report submitted by
division. Requirements for units are satisfied by their
submission of a request to the supply and transport
battalion.
(2) Distribution. Division delivers rations to the forward
class I distributing point operated by the division sup-
port element operating in the brigade trains area in
vehicles of the supply and transport battalion. Rations
are further broken down to battalions for distribution to
the battalion mess section. Either unit distribution or
supply point distribution may be used to distribute the
rations to battalions; however, unit distribution is de-
sirable.
(3) Supply. Brigade units normally carry one reserve ration
with their kitchens and a second ration for daily issue.
c. Class II.
(1) Requisition. Battalions submit requisitions for class II
supplies (other than medical) directly to the supply and
transport battalion. Requests for medical class II sup-
plies are submitted to the medical battalion. The brigade
S4 does not consolidate requests for supplies nor is he
routinely in the requisitioning channels for supplies.
(2) Distribution. Division delivers class II items to the divi-
sion support command elements operating in the brigade
trains area. From there it is further delivered to the
AGO 8826B 77
 requesting unit normally utilizing the vehicles delivering
the rations to the units.
(3) Reserves. While the division does not usually carry a
large reserve of class II items, it may stock some fast
moving class II supplies of all services. These will nor-
mally be kept in the division support command area.
d. Class III.
(1) Requisitioning. Brigade units submit periodic forecasts
for POL direct to the division supply and transport bat-
talion indicating any changes to previously experienced
supply rates.
(2) Distribution. Unit distribution to brigade units by 5,000
gallon tankers of the supply and transport battalion is
the normal method of distributing class III supplies. Five
thousand gallon tankers may be allocated to division sup-
port command elements for this purpose. Brigade and
divisional units in the area of the division forward class
III distributing points obtain POL from distributing
points using organic vehicles (1,200 gallon tankers are
organic to the infantry, mechanized infantry, and tank
battalions). The 5,000 gallon tankers may be included as
a part of the division support element attached to the
brigade for independent and semi-independent operations.
(3) Class IIIA distribution. Class IIIA for the brigade avia-
tion platoon is delivered directly to the platoon by the
division or delivered to the division support element if
unit distribution is not practicable. A 1,200 gallon tank
truck is organic in the infantry, and mechanized brigade
aviation platoons and can be used to pick up gasoline from
the division support element when required. Class IIIA
for the airborne brigade aviation platoon must be de-
livered in drums, cans, or by other packaged means.
e. Class IV. Class IV supplies are handled in the same manner
as class II, except that class IV requisitions are submitted through
command channels. Engineer fortification material, however, is
delivered by army supply points supporting the division, and
whenever possible, unit distribution is made to brigade elements.
f. Class V.
(1) Definitions.
(a) Basic load. The basic load is that quantity of ammuni-
tion authorized to be carried by individuals and on
vehicles of a unit. The basic load gives a unit sufficient
ammunition to initiate combat and provides a tactical
reserve to meet emergencies such as temporary delay
in replenishment or unexpected heavy expenditures.

78 AGO 3326B
 (b) Required supply rate. The required supply rate is the
estimated amount of ammunition required to sustain
the operations of any designated force without restric-
tion for a specified period. The required supply rate is
computed on or applied to tactical weapons in combat
and combat support units only.
(c) Available supply rate. The available supply rate is the
rate of consumption of ammunition that can be sus-
tained with available supplies, as announced by each
commander and applicable within his command. This
rate is flexible in that available supplies need not be
distributed equally to subordinate units. Essentially, it
is used as a control on the amount of ammunition which
may be drawn and expended by a unit. The rate is
computed on, and applied to, tactical weapons only;
i.e., weapons in divisional and brigade combat and
combat support units. Weapons in administrative sup-
port units are excluded unless unusual circumstances
necessitate their employment in a combat role.
(2) Requisition. Brigade units present requisitions (trans-
portation orders) to the division ammunition office. The
DAO validates these requisitions, using as a basis for
approval that the ammunition is required to replenish
the unit's basic load. The DAO maintains ammunition
records and controls the issue of regulated items.
(3) Distribution. Ammunition is transported from the army
ammunition supply points by units in their own organic
vehicles. In rare instances, the division support command
elements in the brigade trains area may stock small
quantities of class V supplies. A class V supply point is
normally established with the division support element
supporting an airborne brigade.
g. Nuclear Weapons. Nuclear weapons supply procedure is
covered in FM 101-31, FM 4-5, and FM 9-5.
h. Water. The division engineer establishes and operates a
maximum of five water points to supply division units. Normally
one water point is positioned to service the brigade. Units draw
water from this point using their organic water trailers and
5-gallon water cans.
i. Maps. The brigade S2 supervises the distribution of maps for
the brigade. These maps are provided by the supply and transport
battalion of the division support command.
81. Aerial Resupply
a. Requests for aerial resupply are submitted by brigade units
directly to the division ADSOC, which determines the delivery

AGO 3326B 79
means to be used and allocates priorities. The S4 monitors and
coordinates such requests.
b. Delivery may be made by the USAF using parachute delivery,
or, in certain situations, air landed means; and by army aircraft
using both methods.
c. The aircraft of the aviation battalion have an airlift capa-
bility and may be available for logistical support. Aircraft of the
brigade aviation platoon may be used to lift small critical items.
d. For details of aerial delivery to brigade units, see FM 7-20.
For details of aerial delivery for airborne operations, see FM 57-10
and FM 10-33.
82. Field Maintenance
a. Inherent with the responsibilities of command, the brigade
commander is responsible for maintenance activities in organic
and attached elements.
b. Organizational maintenance (first and second echelon) of all
equipment is a unit responsibility. Units attached to the brigade
and the brigade headquarters and headquarters company are pro-
vided the personnel and equipment necessary to perform organiza-
tional maintenance.
c. Field maintenance of all equipment, except signal crypto-
graphic, electrical accounting and medical, of the brigade and its
attached units is performed by the maintenance battalion of the
division support command. Field maintenance of signal cryp-
tographic equipment is performed by the division signal battalion.
Field maintenance of medical equipment is not accomplished in
the division.
d. A forward support company of the division maintenance bat-
talion, augmented by elements of the aircraft maintenance com-
pany, operates as part of the division support command elements
in each of the brigade trains areas and performs field maintenance
to the extent of its capability. This unit is backed up by the main
support company.
e. When the brigade is organized for independent and semi-
independent operations, a forward support company and elements
of the aircraft maintenance company are normally attached to
the brigade.
83. Repair Parts
Unit maintenance sections procure repair parts from the for-
ward support company supporting it. The basis of requisition is
replenishment of the prescribed allowance (basic load) for repair
parts. The requested repair parts available in the forward support
company will be issued. The forward support company will

80 AGO 38826B
requisition repair parts from the headquarters and main support
company on the same basis.
84. Evacuation of Salvage Material
Combat units are responsible for initial battlefield recovery of
salvage equipment. Large items such as vehicles are evacuated by
combat units to the brigade axis of supply and evacuation or when
time and the situation permit, directly to division salvage collect-
ing points. Small items are evacuated by the combat units to the
salvage collecting points. Division salvage collecting points will
be operated by the forward support companies in the division
support command headquarters and main support company, main-
tenance battalion, in the division support area. The S2 is responsi-
ble for evacuation of captured enemy material and will coordinate
evacuation through intelligence channels if the material has in-
telligence value. If it does not have intelligence value, evacuation
is routine.
85. Aircraft Maintenance
For details on maintenance of the brigade aviation platoon air-
craft, see paragraph 59.
86. Medical Services
a. Medical services for the brigade are provided by the division
medical battalion and by medical personnel of attached and sup-
porting units. Each combat battalion has a battalion surgeon and
a medical platoon or section in the headquarters and headquarters
company. For a discussion of medical services in tactical units, see
FM 7-20 and FM 8-15.
b. The brigade surgeon is the coordinator of all medical services
of the brigade. He works closely with the medical personnel of
units attached to or supporting the brigade, and actively co-
ordinates the operation of the division medical units supporting
the brigade. He keeps the brigade commander informed on medical
services. He insures that this support is adequate, and requests
additional support through medical channels if required.
c. Direct medical support is provided the brigade by the medical
company located in the brigade trains area. In some cases, for
example, when in reserve, the brigade is supported by the medical
facilities in the division support command area.
(1) The clearing platoon of the medical company can estab-
lish two clearing sections for a limited period of time
for displacement, thus permitting the company to provide
continuous support to the brigade in fast moving situa-
tions. The clearing station receives casualties from the
AGO 3326B 81
 aid stations of the brigade units, provides treatment
necessary to return the soldier to duty immediately or
to prepare him for further evacuation to the rear.
(2) The ambulance platoon of the medical company works
closely with the clearing platoon and with unit aid sta-
tions. This platoon evacuates casualties from the unit
aid stations to the clearing station.
d. The brigade headquarters and headquarters company does
not establish an aid station. Personnel requiring medical treat-
ment are handled by the medical company clearing station.
e. When the brigade is organized for independent or semi-inde-
pendent operations, a medical company is attached to it and may
come under the operational control of the brigade surgeon if the
brigade commander so directs.

87. Bath Services

The supply and transport battalion provides bath service to the
troops of the division. The bath section of the supply and services
company can serve troop units in nine separate locations as de-
termined by need and troop density. When arrangements can be
made for additional operational personnel and clothing stocks, the
supply and transport battalion may establish a clothing exchange
service at the bath points.
88. Graves Registration
a. Concept. The dead are normally evacuated from the division
area and interred.
b. Collection and Evacuation.
(1) When in combat, the division is augmented with a graves
registration platoon, attached to the supply and services
company of the supply and transport battalion. A graves
registration team operates in the vicinity of the brigade
trains and assists tactical units in the collection and
evacuation of the dead in the brigade areas. The division
collecting, identification, and evacuation section operates
the division graves registration collecting point.
(2) The division graves registration collecting point is usually
located a short distance from the MSR, near the supply
and services company in the division support area.
(3) The dead are identified as early and as fully as possible.
They are normally evacuated with their effects from for-
ward areas in transportation returning from other tasks.
In nuclear situations, special graves registration task
groups may be formed, including sufficient transpor-
tation to evacuate the dead promptly.

82 AGO 3326B
 c. Isolated Burials. Isolated burials are resorted to only as a
last resort and then they are fully documented and reported
promptly through graves registration channels. Details of graves
registration service are covered in FM 10-63, FM 101-1, and FM
101-5.

AGO 33268 83
 CHAPTER 6
OFFENSE

Section I. GENERAL

89. Scope
a. This chapter provides guidance for the employment of the
brigade in offensive combat. The material pertains to offensive
combat under normal conditions; certain types of special oper-
ations and extreme conditions of weather and terrain will dictate
modification in the application of the principles discussed herein.
b. Offensive operations at division level are covered in detail
in FM 61-100, and offensive operations of the tactical battalion in
FM 7-20, FM 17-15, and FM 17-36. Employment of support
units, normally employed with the brigade in offensive operations,
is covered in FMs 1-15, 5-135, 5-136, 6-20-1, 6-20-2, 11-50, and
11-57, 54-2, and 57-10. These manuals should be used in con-
junction with this manual to provide complete and comprehensive
coverage of the offense. For comprehensive material on the em-
ployment of armor, see FM 17-30.
90. Mission and Concept
a. The mission of the brigade in offensive action is to close with
and destroy or capture the enemy, using fire, maneuver, and close
combat.
b. The purposes of the offensive are to-
(1) Destroy an enemy force.
(2) Seize and control territory or terrain.
(3) Deprive the enemy of required resources.
(4) Develop the enemy's disposition.
(5) Divert the enemy's attention from other areas.
c. In nuclear war no clear-cut distinction between the offense
and the defense for the force, as a whole, may exist. When nuclear
weapons are employed on any scale, shifts in balance of power
between opposing tactical forces at division and brigade level
may occur rapidly, with corresponding shifts from offense to
defense and defense to offense being rmandatory. As the scale of
nuclear usage increases, the brigade's maneuver capability may
at times be severely curtailed. On the other hand, large scale
nuclear attacks can create opportunities for bold and decisive
offensive action. Under such circumstances, the force which can
exploit its maneuver capability first will have a decided ad-
vantage. The brigade commander must continuously plan toward

84 AGO 8326B
this end and maintain sufficient flexibility to exploit any advantage
that may occur.
d. In nonnuclear war, increased air and ground mobility, in-
creased range and lethality of conventional weapons, more effective
communications, and flexibility of tactical units and administrative
support systems will shorten reaction time, allow greater battle-
field dispersion, and dictate that offensive operations be centrally
controlled, but decentrally executed.
91. Forms of Offensive Maneuver
a. General.
(1) Offensive maneuver is classified as two basic forms, the
envelopment and the penetration. Each has several varia-
tions: envelopment includes vertical envelopment, double
envelopment, and the turning movement; the penetration
includes multiple penetrations, and infiltration. All forms
of offensive maneuver are conducted in phases. The goal
of each attack is first to destroy the enemy force and,
failing this, it should create the conditions which make
the final phases of exploitation and/or pursuit possible.
(2) Appropriately organized for combat, the brigade has the
capability of conducting all forms of the offensive, either
alone or as part of the division or larger force. However,
envelopments, and particularly turning movements, are
usually executed utilizing the brigade as one of the en-
veloping units of a division of corps operation. Most
operations employ a combination of penetration and en-
velopment, representing a different form to each par-
ticipating unit at various echelons. All forms of
maneuver can be assisted by airborne operations de-
signed to place units on the enemy's flank or in his rear.
The airborne brigade is organized and equipped for this
type operation.
b. The Envelopment. The purpose of the envelopment is to de-
stroy the enemy in position by disposing forces in his rear to cut his
routes of escape. In an envelopment, the main attack passes around
or over the enemy's main defensive force to seize objectives which
facilitate his destruction in position. In the turning movement,
which is a form of the envelopment, the attacking force passes
around or over the enemy's main force to seize an objective deep
in the enemy's rear which will cause him to abandon his position,
or to divert the majority of his forces to meet the threat of the
turning force and thus fight on the ground chosen by the attacker.
Supporting attacks fix the enemy in position during the movement
of the enveloping force. The brigade may be the enveloping force
AGO 3326B 85
of a division. The brigade can also conduct envelopments of
limited scale using one or more maneuver battalions as the
enveloping force.
(1) Ground envelopment requires that the enemy have an
assailable flank.
(2) Aerial envelopment requires suppression of enemy air
defense fires, or that enemy dispositions and capabilities
be unable to materially interfere with the flight of the
airborne force.
c. The Penetration. The purpose of a penetration is to destroy
the continuity of the enemy's defense by an attack which passes
through the enemy's principal defense. In a penetration, the main
attack passes through and ruptures the enemy's principal defen-
sive poistion. The penetration consists of three phases: rupturing
of the enemy's forward defensive position; widening the gap; and
seizing objectives which destroy the continuity of his defensive
position. A penetration is required when the enemy has no assail-
able flank, or when time or other reasons do not permit execution
of an envelopment. A brigade may participate in a penetration
as part of a division or larger force or may conduct a penetration
unilaterally in a limited area, with resources available. Attack
by infiltration is a variation of the penetration. Its purpose is to
deploy forces in the enemy's rear for decisive tasks, while exposing
only small forces to enemy fires during the passage through enemy
defenses or positions. Dismounted infantry units found in the
infantry brigade have excellent capabilities for infiltration. In-
filtration may also be accomplished by airborne forces.

Section II. PLANNING THE ATTACK

92. General
a. Successful offensive action requires the massing of superior
combat forces at the decisive place and timne, the rapid application
of this power to destroy the enemy, followed by planned and or-
derly exploitation and/or dispersal. Speed is essential to success,
since the necessary concentration of forces for the attack tends to
present a lucrative nuclear target.
b. Once an attack is launched, every effort must be made to gain
and maintain momentum until the objective is secured. Com-
manders at all echelons should have as their goal destruction of
the enemy and failing this the creation, through offensive action,
of opportunities for exploitation and pursuit.
c. At brigade and higher echelons, one of the major respon-
sibilities of the commander is to plan and conduct his attack so as
to have resources immediately available to exploit success and to

86 AGO 3326B
capitalize on the advantages created by the enemy's tactical er-
rors. When the opportunity for decisive action occurs, the com-
mander must unhesitatingly commit his total resources.
d. The brigade commander and his staff follow a logical sequence
of action in planning the attack.
(1) First, the brigade mission is studied and analyzed to in-
sure complete understanding of all of the tasks, both
specific and implied, required to accomplish it.
(2) Next, the brigade commander provides planning guidance
to his staff. This guidance is based upon his study of the
mission, his knowledge of both the friendly and enemy
situation, guidance he has received from higher com-
manders, and his own professional knowledge and skill.
His guidance is usually general in nature, but should in-
dicate courses of action which he feels merit detailed
consideration by his staff. He refrains from favoring a
specific course of action at this time in order to permit
the staff to make unbiased estimates and explore all
courses of action which promise likelihood of success.
(3) After receiving the commander's guidance, the staff offi-
cers prepare their separate estimates. See FM 101-5.
(4) Upon receiving staff estimates and recommendations, the
commander completes his own estimate and arrives at
his decision. Frequently this will be a rapid process,
performed in a few minutes after a staff briefing. He may
consult with commanders of subordinate maneuver bat-
talions prior to announcing his decision.
(5) His decision must contain the essential information re-
quired to complete planning for the attack. It includes
as a minimum, his concept of operation, the time of the
attack, the mission of the brigade, and objectives to be
seized. The decision must be reached and disseminated
as early as possible in the planning process; subordinate
commanders should receive it immediately, usually in the
form of a fragmentary order, to permit concurrent plan-
ning to take place at all echelons in the brigade.
(6) The commander's concept of operation is the com-
mander's visualization of how the mission is to be ac-
complished by major units in the conduct of the attack;
gives details on the employment of nuclear weapons and
other fire support; indicates the main and supporting
attack, and outlines action to be taken upon seizure of
the assigned objectives.
(7) The commander's decision and concept of operation are
AGO 3326B 87
 then translated into the operation order which is dis-
seminated to lower, adjacent, and higher headquarters.
(8) Following the issuance of the attack order, the com-
mander and his staff supervise and assist in its execution,
modifying it as required to meet unexpected changes in
the situation.
e. In developing plans for the attack, the following basic factors
are considered, generally in the sequence listed:
(1) Mission.
(2) Enemy.
(3) Weather and terrain.
(4) Objectives.
(5) Available forces.
(6) Determining the main attack, supporting attack, and
reserve.
(7) Formation for the attack.
(8) Organization for combat.
(9) Fire support.
(10) Control measures.
(11) Security.
(12) Plans to continue the attack beyond the principal objec-
tive.
(13) Administrative support.
f. The factors listed above are discussed in paragraphs 93
through 105.

93. Mission
The mission for the brigade is normally assigned by the division,
and defines the goal toward which the effort of the command is
directed. The mission assigned a brigade is usually brief and gen-
eral in nature. The brigade commander and his staff carefully
study and analyze the mission to determine tasks specifically
included in the mission and other tasks not specifically directed
but which are implied.

94. Enemy
a. The brigade commander makes a continuous estimate of the
enemy situation, especially the enemy's strength, weaknesses, pecu-
liarities, capabilities, and disposition. Under nuclear conditions,
the enemy's nuclear capability and his technique of employment
of nuclear weapons are of critical importance. Much of this infor-
mation will be provided by the agency issuing the order. In the
event the brigade is not in contact when the attack order is issued,
liaison should be established with forces that are in contact, and
information will be requested from their sources.

88 AGO S326B
 b. Prior to and during the attack, every possible effort is made
to obtain information about the enemy. All collection agencies and
means are exploited to the fullest extent of their capabilities; the
collection of information is continuous. Processing of information
into usable intelligence must be rapid and accurate. Information
must be disseminated to lower and higher echelon as appropriate.
c. Without degrading the acquisition of detailed information re-
quired on enemy disposition, surveillance coverage must include
the accurate locations of friendly units in the forward area, with
emphasis on timely information which will permit friendly nuclear
fire missions.
95. Weather and Terrain
a. General. The terrain and the weather are important factors
in offensive operations. The commander and his staff make a
thorough analysis of the terrain to capitalize on the advantages
and to counteract the disadvantages. Weather affects virtually all
phases of operations, both administrative and tactical.
b. Weather. Weather conditions have an important bearing on
any decision and should be a primary consideration in operational
planning. The basic meteorological elements affecting operations
are precipitation, wind (speed and direction), temperature,
humidity, and cloud cover. In addition, the climatology forecast,
which includes such items as sunrise, sunset, moonrise, and moon-
set shculd be considered. Weather conditions may limit or prohibit
some phases of an operation. In planning operations, adverse
weather conditions should be considered; often the success gained
during unfavorable weather offsets the limitations and difficulties
imposed by soil trafficability and slow rate of movement. Weather
factors are of special importance in the conduct of offensive or
defensive operations that include nuclear, chemical, or biological
employment. Fallout, thermal radiation, initial nuclear radiation,
and chemical and biological cloud travel are influenced to a great
extent by weather conditions. Army aviation is a valuable supple-
mentary source to confirm current weather data. Detailed infor-
mation is contained in FM 3-5, FM 21-40, TM 3-200, TM 3-240,
FM 101-31, and TM 23-200.
c. Terrain.
(1) Observation and fire. All methods of observation, includ-
ing visual and electronic, both ground and air, are util-
ized. High ground which affords line of sight observation
into the enemy's position is desirable. Frequently an
attacking force or a portion thereof may be routed over
terrain that will provide an observation differential over
the enemy. Good fields of fire are essential for the effec-
tive employment of all direct fire weapons in an offensive.
AGO 3326B 89
 When good fields of fire do exist, consideration must be
given the advantage offered the enemy in their defense.
(2) Obstacles.
(a) Obstacles may be natural terrain features, may be
manmade obstructions, or may be created by chemical
and nuclear fires. Obstacles affect the scheme of
maneuver and the plan of supporting fires. The instal-
lation of obstacles will be such that it will limit enemy
mobility but not that of friendly forces.
(b) In the attack, existing obstacles may be used to protect
a flank, to deny the enemy use of key terrain for obser-
vation and defense positions, and to assist in economy-
of-force operations in conjunction with an attack.
(c) Obstacles are used by the enemy to increase the
strength of his defenses, to channel the friendly attack
along avenues of his choosing, and to deny approaches
to key terrain to the attacker.
(d) Nuclear weapons can create obstacles of the following
types: induced and fallout radiation; cratering, rub-
ble, fires, or tree blowdown. The obstacle creating
effect of nuclear weapons must be considered *when
these weapons are used in the attack.
(3) Concealment and cover. Every advantage afforded by
the terrain and conditions of visibility to provide con-
cealment and cover must be exploited. Concealment and
cover are essential in masking assembly of troops for
the attack, for protection against all types of enemy
fires, and in aiding in tactical cover and deception meas-
ures taken for an attack. Natural and artificial camou-
flage, smoke screening, and natural and manmade areas
must all be used to conceal and cover attacking elements.
(4) Key terrain. Key terrain is any locality or area the con-
trol or retention of which affords a marked advantage to
either combatant. Whether or not it has been assigned as
an objective by higher headquarters, key terrain in the
zone of an attacking brigade must be seized, neutralized,
or controlled to deny its use by the enemy.
(5) Avenue of approach.
(a) Possible avenues of approach suitable for the brigade
or elements thereof are analyzed based upon the
availability of observation, concealment and cover,
fields of fire, space for dispersion and maneuver, and
trafficability.
(b) In selecting approach routes for airmobile operations,
the major concern is achieving tactical surprise. Routes

90 AGO 3326B
 are selected which provide defilade and ease of naviga-
tion. Heavily forested and swampy areas provide good
routes, as enemy ground troops have little opportunity
to see or fire at low-flying helicopter. Ridges are
avoided, when possible, to reduce the possibility of
detection by radar.
(c) All avenues of approach are considered; use of a less
obvious or desirable avenue of approach may achieve a
degree of surprise which more than offsets its dis-
advantages.

96. Objectives
In the attack, only those objectives are selected which will mate-
rially assist in the accomplishment of the brigade mission. Rarely,
if ever, are objectives used solely as control measures. They are
selected after a careful analysis to determine those key terrain
features or areas which must be seized or controlled to accomplish
or assist in the accomplishment of the mission.
a. Brigade Objective. This is an objective, normally prescribed
by higher headquarters, the seizure or destruction of which will
permit the accomplishment of the mission. For example, in the
attack of a river line, bridges and crossing sites over the water
obstacle are intermediate objectives, while key terrain on the far
bank from which crossing sites and a bridgehead area of adequate
size can be secured are usually the brigade objectives. In the at-
tack, a final objective is all or part of the brigade objective. Its
seizure or destruction is assigned as a task for one or more major
maneuver elements of the brigade depending on its size. When the
seizure or destruction of the final objective is assigned to more
than one unit, it is clearly subdivided to delineate responsibility
of subordinate commanders. The final objective is usually a key
terrain feature, a key geographical area, or an enemy force.
b. Intermediate Objectives. An intermediate objective is one
whose seizure will materially assist in the accomplishment of the
mission, aid in the seizure of the final objective, and/or facilitate
control of the maneuver forces. In mechanized operations, inter-
mediate objectives are rarely assigned.
c. Objectives for the Penetration. In the penetration, inter-
mediate objectives are usually assigned to insure accomplishment
of the first two phases of the operation, i.e., objectives which are
required to rupture the enemy's forward defense and those re-
quired to widen and secure the gap in the enemy's line through
which the main attack will pass. The final objective should be
located in the rear of the enemy's main defensive position so that,
when seized, it will destroy the continuity of his defense and permit
AGO 3326B 91
maximum destruction of his forces when he is compelled to with-
draw.
d. Objectives for the Envelopment. In the envelopment, limited
objectives, generally close-in, are assigned to those forces making
the supporting, or fixing attack. The brigade objective is assigned
to the enveloping force. This objective should be deep in the
enemy's rear and should enable the encircling force to block the
enemy's escape so that he can be destroyed in place. Whenever
possible, intermediate objectives should not be assigned to the
encircling force; it should be directed only to seize the brigade
objective.
e. Objective for Attack by Infiltration. The brigade objective
for an infiltrating force should be easily identifiable under con-
ditions of reduced visibility.
f. Leadership in the Objective. Subordinate units are normally
assigned only final objectives. Intermediate objectives are assigned
only when their control or neutralization is essential to the mis-
sion. Subordinate commanders must be fully informed as to the
purpose of their attacks and objectives. Commanders must kindle
aggressiveness in subordinates and accord them full use of their
initiative. Opportunities to destroy the enemy may be presented
to the subordinate that could not possibly be foreseen by the higher
commander. Procedures must allow such opportunities to be ex-
ploited without undue delay.

97. Available Forces

a. Combat and combat support units are attached to or placed in
support of the brigade by division, and are organized for combat
by the brigade. When the brigade is given an offensive mission,
the commander analyzes the forces allocated, including fire sup-
port, from the viewpoint of the total resources available for the
assigned mission as compared to his estimated requirements for
the course of action he has selected. In the event, however, that the
brigade commander determines that additional forces and support
are desired, he immediately requests higher headquarters to make
them available.
b. When nuclear weapons have been allocated for an attack, the
brigade commander attempts to utilize them on remunerative
targets in such a way as to reduce the requirement for maneuver
forces to close with and destroy the enemy in the target area.
Nuclear weapons on known enemy targets may eliminate the re-
quirement for maneuver forces to reduce these enemy forces. This
does not preclude the requirement for lesser forces to exploit the
effects of weapons so employed.

92 AGO 8326B
98. Determination of the Main Attack, the Supporting
Attack, and Reserve
a. General. In the attack, maneuver forces and support means
are distributed as a main attack, the supporting attack, and the
reserve. Under certain conditions, only a main attack force and
a reserve will be originally constituted; for example, when the
brigade attacks in a column formation. When the brigade attacks
in multiple columns to develop a vague situation, to conduct a
reconnaissance in force, or in the movement to contact, main and
supporting attacks may not be designated initially; as the situation
develops, one of the columns may be designated as the main effort
and its attack weighted at that time.
b. Main Attack.
(1) The main attack is directed against the brigade objective
and is accorded first priority in the allocation of combat
power. It must be provided the means to gain decisive
superiority over the enemy and to maintain momentum
to the objective. Under some conditions, as in the cases
of double envelopments and multiple penetrations, there
may be equally weighted attacks.
(2) The main attack is weighted by the allocation of maneu-
ver units, by fire support, and by other tactical and ad-
ministrative support. It may also be weighted by giving
it the most favorable avenue of approach.
(3) The brigades inherent air and ground mobility and ex-
tensive communications systems have increased the
tempo of combat. Thus the commander must practice
flexibility in assigning objectives. Although one objective
may appear to offer the best contribution to success of
his mission, another may develop suddenly.
c. Supporting Attack(s).
(1) A secondary attack should contribute to the success of
the main attack by accomplishing one or more of the
following:
(a) Seizing terrain which facilitates the maneuver of the
main attack.
(b) Fixing the enemy in position. Pin or tie him to a ter-
rain feature.
(c) Deceiving the enemy as to location of the main attack.
(d) Forcing the enemy to commit reserves prematurely,
piecemeal, or in an indecisive area.
(e) Preventing reinforcement in the area of the main at-
tack.
(2) Adequate means are provided for the accomplishment of
these tasks. Nuclear weapons may be used to accomplish
AGO 3326B 93
 tasks which might otherwise require the commitment
of large bodies of troops. If there is an abundance of
means, especially nuclear weapons, the maneuver ele-
ments of the secondary attack forces may approximate
that of the main attack.
d. Reserves.
(1) General. In the attack, the brigade retains a reserve to
enter combat offensively at a decisive time and place to
exploit success and complete the accomplishment of the
mission. Mobile reserves vastly enhance the potential
of a reserve. A reserve also provides the commander
a means of dealing with unforeseen contingencies. The
reserve should not be used to redeem failure but to-
(a) Exploit success.
(b) Reinforce the main attack.
(c) Maintain or increase the momentum of the attack.
(d) Hold ground seized by the attacking force.
(e) Defeat or block enemy counterattacks.
(f) Provide security.
(2) Size of reserve. A deep objective, limited knowledge of
the enemy situation, or inability to visualize the attack
to its final objective requires the retention of a stronger
reserve than in situations where these conditions are
known. When attacking an enemy known to be of in-
ferior mobility, the reserve may be smaller than when
attacking one of equal or superior mobility.
(3) Location of the reserve. Dispersal of the reserve by com-
bined arms teams into multiple assembly areas or march
columns provides some protection from nuclear attack.
Reserves are located-
(a) On or near a road net which facilitates rapid movement
to points of probable employment. Availability of the
reserve for employment is based on time rather than
distance from the point of employment.
(b) To favor the main attack.
(c) To provide security to the command.
(d) To provide maximum protection against hostile obser-
vation and fire.
(4) Movement of the reserve. In fast-moving operations, the
reserve usually moves at a prescribed distance behind the
attacking echelons. In slow-moving operations, the re-
serve generally moves by bounds. In certain operations,
the reserve may be transported by Army aviation. Re-
gardless of how it moves, the reserve must always be

94 AGO 3326B
 positioned for rapid employment and must remain within
supporting distance of the committed forces.
(5) Nuclear weapons. The brigade normally holds a portion
of its nuclear weapons in reserve.
(6) Reconstitution of reserve. When the reserve is com-
mitted, higher headquarters is informed and the brigade
commander makes provisions for reconstituting a re-
serve at the earliest practicable opportunity.
99. Formation for the Attack
a. General. The scheme of maneuver is the commander's place-
ment and movement of manuever units to accomplish his mission.
The order from division or higher headquarters will normally in-
fluence what general form the attack will take, e.g., penetration,
envelopment, or a variation thereof. At brigade level, the scheme of
maneuver is based upon forces attached by division and the as-
signed mission. Execution of the mission includes consideration
of the objectives to be seized, the time phasing of the attack,
terrain, enemy dispositions, the determination of the main and
supporting efforts, the integration of fire and maneuver, and the
formation to be adopted.
b. Formation. The brigade attacks in either a column or linear
formation, or variations thereof, the selection of the type being
based on the factors listed in a above. The formation adopted
must provide for the necessary combat forces required in the
initial phases of the attack, and/or security, control, dispersion,
and flexibility required to meet unforeseen situations which may
develop.
(1) Column formation. This is a brigade attack along a
single axis with battalions or battalion task forces, and
supporting elements in columns (fig. 20). A variation of
the column is the echelon formation wherein the brigade
attacks along a single or multiple axis, but battalions or
battalion task forces move along different routes at
staggered intervals (fig. 21). However, in the echelon
formation, general, the column formation is adopted
when the brigade attacks along a narrow front, when
the enemy situation is vague, or when the enemy's initial
resistance is expected to be light. The column formation
may also be adopted when nuclear weapons are available
to destroy initial enemy resistance. The column forma-
tion provides maximum depth to the attack; battalions
in the rear of the column can move through or around
the leading battalion to maintain the momentum of the
attack. The column formation is more effective for
AGO 3326B 95
 mechanized or motorized operations than for dismounted
attacks; the time required to move dismounted elements
from the rear of a column forward for employment is
often excessive. The column formation affords relatively
good protection against nuclear attack. The chief dis-
advantage of the column formation is that initially it
lacks combat power forward.
(2) Linear formations (fig. 22). This is a brigade attack
along two or more axes, employing one or more bat-
talions or battalion task forces, suitably reinforced, on
each axis. The interval between the major units on line
varies according to the situation, but is never so great
as to preclude movement of major units from one axis
to the other before a major element of the brigade can
be defeated in detail. In mechanized or motorized oper-

TF

TF

TFt

Figure 20. Brigade in column formation-schematic.

96 AGO 3326B
 ations, this interval between battalions on line can be
considerably greater than in dismounted operations, due
to increased mobility of the tactical elements. A linear
formation is adopted when it is desirable to have maxi-
mum combat power forward to overcome initial re-

TF

TFr COMD
L~J
GP

TF I

COMD
~
TF GP

GP

NOTE: THE BRIGADE IS ADVANCING IN ECHELON FORMATION. THE LEADING

BATTALION TASK FORCE IS IN COLUMN FORMATION, THE SECOND IS
IN A LINEAR FORMATION, AND THE REAR BATTALION IS ECHELONED
TO THE RIGHT.

Figure 21. Brigade in echelon formation.

AGO 3826B 97
 sistance; when considerable information about the ene-
my's defenses is available; when shallow objectives have
been assigned to the attack echelon; when multiple
approaches are available; and when fire support is ade-
quate for all attacking units. The linear formation is
generally used in dismounted operations, in penetrations
when sizeable allocations of nuclear weapons are not
available, and when the brigade's zone must be cleared
of the enemy.
100. Organization for Combat
a. General. The general considerations for organization for
combat covered in chapter 4 are applicable to offensive opera-
tions. When resources permit, battalion task forces are organized
and employed in the attack.
b. Penetration. In the initial stages of the penetration, i.e.,
during the first two phases--the rupture and the widening of the
gap-the brigade is organized with infantry heavy battalion
task forces in the assault. The reserve is tank heavy whenever
possible, to permit rapid movement through the gap for seizure
of the principal objective in the rear during phase three 'of the
operation. Reserve elements of infantry battalions in the pene-

TF TF

X TF x

NOTE: BATTALION TASK FORCES MAY BEADVANCING IN EITHER A LINEAR

OR COLUMN FORMATION.

Figure 22. Brigade in line formation-two TF abreast-schematic.

98 AGO S826B
tration should be motorized or mechanized to increase their
mobility. If nuclear weapons are employed to create and widen the
gap, the initial assault may be made in a column formation, with
tank or mechanized elements in the lead.
c. Envelopment. The brigade is organized with predominately
infantry forces for the supporting attack to hold the enemy in
position, and mechanized, motorized, or airmobile/airborne
infantry are provided for the enveloping force. The bulk of the
tank strength is placed with the enveloping force, or is placed with
the linkup force in airborne operations.
d. Exploitation and Pursuit. The brigade is organized for the
operations so as to provide maximum mobility to the exploitation
force. Mechanized infantry and tank units are well suited for
this purpose. Infantry battalions, if motorized, can function as
an exploitation force. If Army aircraft are available, airmobile
task units may be formed for use in conjunction with the force
moving overland to seize bridges, defiles, and key terrain, or to
block the enemy escape routes.
e. Combat Support.
(1) Artillery. The supporting artillery for the brigade is
placed in direct support of or attached to the brigade by
division headquarters. In either role, its method of
employment, its integration in brigade formation for
the attack, and the priority of its fires are controlled by
the brigade commander. In the movement to contact, in
the exploitation, or when deep objectives are to be seized,
DS artillery must move with the maneuver elements in
order to keep within supporting distance.
(2) Engineers. Attached or supporting engineers are made
available to the brigade in offensive operations. Engineer
units should be retained under centralized control when-
ever possible to provide for unity of engineer effort and
maximum use of resources. Normally, an engineer com-
pany will be placed in DS of each committed brigade.
Engineer platoons will be attached to tactical battalions
when centralized engineer control is not practicable.
Such situations occur when the brigade conducts widely
dispersed or mobile operations.
(3) Transportation. Trucks, APC, or Army aircraft attached
to the brigade may be further allocated to the control of
the using tactical units. Whenever possible, such attach-
ment should preserve unit integrity of the transportation
unit.
(a) Brigade command installations. In the attack, the
brigade commander normally operates from a com-
AGO 3326B 99
 mand group located in the area of the brigade unit
which is making the main effort and from a location
where he can best influence the action. The brigade
executive officer remains with the CP.
(b) Brigade trains. In most situations, the brigade trains
operate from a position well forward in the brigade
area. It displaces as required. In exceptional cases
where a brigade element, e.g., battalion task force is
employed in a semi-independent role away from the
main body of the brigade, essential medical, supply,
and maintenance elements from the brigade trains may
be attached to it.

101. Fire Support

a. General. Fire support for the brigade is covered in chapter
4 and is applicable to offensive operations.
b. Integration. The plan of fire support and the scheme of
maneuver for the attack must be closely coordinated and integrated
to provide maximum effectiveness. They are developed concur-
rently, and are revised as the operation progresses. Planning
should include the use of all available fire support means. When-
ever possible, weapons of battalions in brigade reserve, may be
employed to reinforce the fires of battalions making the attack.
(1) Preparatoryfires (preparation). The commander order-
ing the attack determines whether or not a preparation
will be fired. A preparation is generally used to assist
the first phase of an attack. Factors to be considered in
determining whether there is to be a preparation are-
(a) Whether the probable effect of the preparation will
justify the attendant loss of tactical surprise.
(b) Availability of fire support means, to include supply of
ammunition.
(c) The number of remunerative targets which can be
located in time to prepare and assign fires.
(d) Whether the effect sought can be accomplished before
the enemy can change his tactical dispositions.
(e) The effects of fires in creating obstacles to planned
maneuver.
(f) Troop safety requirements in relation to targets.
(2) Fires during the conduct of the attack. The brigade fire
support plan should include "on-call" fires which can be
quickly placed in all areas and on targets when need for
such fires can be envisioned. On-call fires include nuclear,
chemical, and nonnuclear. Fire support agencies also
control ammunition resupply and expenditure to insure

100 AGO 3826B

 adequate fire support for targets of opportunity which
may develop during the attack.
(3) Fires during reorganizationand consolidation. Fire sup-
port to cover reorganization and consolidation after ob-
jectives have been seized is included in the fire support
plan. Fire data for such fires are as complete as possible
to permit rapid and.effective fire support for repelling
enemy counterattacks.
c. Alternate Plans. The nuclear fires may often be the decisive
influence on the scheme of maneuver. For example, in a penetra-
tion, nuclear fires may be programed to accomplish the rupture in
the enemy's position, or widen the gap, or both. If the plan of
maneuver has been determined by the planned employment of
nuclear weapons, alternate plans for the attack, based on the
assumption that planned nuclear weapons may not produce the
predicted effects or cannot be delivered, must be prepared.

102 Control Measures for the Attack

a. General. The brigade commander prescribes those control
measures which are required to adequately control the operation
of the brigade, as well as controls specified by division or higher
command. The latter are limited in a mission type order, when the
brigade is assigned independent or semi-independent roles; or may
be in considerable detail when the brigade is part of a coordinated
division attack. Additional control measures may be imposed after
the attack develops to meet unforeseen changes in the plan.
b. Objectives. See paragraph 96.
c. Line of Departure.
(1) A line of departure (LOD) should be generally perpen-
dicular to the direction of advance, easily recognizable
on the ground, and as close to the enemy as possible. It
should be protected from small-arms and other flat-
trajectory fire and be under control of friendly forces.
If nuclear weapons are to be employed, the time and
location of the detonation should be considered in location
of the LOD to insure conformance with guidance on
troop safety.
(2) When units are in contact, their present positions may be
designated as the line of departure. For units not in
contact, a line of departure is prescribed for their em-
ployment based upon terrain; or, as in a passage of lines,
the line of contact of the unit through which the passage
is to be made.
(3) Occasionally, the dispersion of the brigade laterally and
in depth may make it desirable to assign separate lines
AGO 3326B 101
 of departure and times of attack to the various attacking
battalions.
d. Time of Attack.
(1) In selecting the time of attack, consideration is given to
requirements imposed by higher headquarters; the time
required for subordinate units to reconnoiter, prepare
and coordinate plans, issue orders, organize the attacking
units, and move to the line of departure; and the pos-
sibility of taking advantage of an enemy weakness before
he can rectify it.
(2) Stereotyped tines of attack are avoided to enhance sur-
prise and to prevent prior preparation by the enemy.
(3) When nuclear weapons are employed prior to an attack,
their delivery is closely coordinated with the time of
attack. Time may be required for damage assessment
and the issuance, if necessary, of modifying orders. It is
desirable that the attack follow immediately after the
nuclear preparation. Under some conditions, however,
dust and smoke may delay the attack until adequate
visibility exists. A habitual relationship of time of attack
to the time of nuclear preparation must be avoided.
(4) Units, particularly those with mission type orders, con-
tinuing the attack or entering the exploitation phase,
may be assigned a general rather than an exact time of
attack, e.g., "at once," "without delay," "continue," or
"on order."
e. Zone of Action.
(1) The zone of action is the terrain bounded by one or two
lateral boundaries, a line of departure, and an objective.
Boundaries must be easily recognizable on the ground.
Units may move temporarily into adjacent zones after
coordinationi with the commanders concerned and notifi-
cation of the next higher commander. Such movement
must be controlled to avoid interference with the ad-
jacent units and unwarranted massing of troops. Sim-
ilarly, boundaries do not restrict the emplacement and
movement of artillery and other supporting weapons
provided coordination is effected. Zones are assigned
when close coordination and cooperation between ad-
jacent units are required.
(2) The zone of action should provide adequate maneuver
space for subordinate units and be commensurate in size
with their capabilities. Where possible, it should wholly
include key terrain features and avenues of approach
thereto. It should extend as a minimum beyond the final

102 AGO 3326B

 objective to the depth necessary for the coordination of
fire support for the seizure and consolidation of the
objective.
(3) Boundaries are favored when assignment of area re-
sponsibility is required, to facilitate coordination of
fires including nuclear fires between two adjacent units,
or to delimit responsibility of converging forces in a re-
stricted area. When boundaries are used for the purpose
of requiring a unit to clear the area of enemy forces, the
operation order must clearly specify this purpose. If
clearance of the zone is required it may be necessary for
a following unit, strong in infantry, to be assigned this
task. If required, a direction of attack can be assigned
within the zone of action.
f. Axis of Advance. An axis of advance indicates the general
direction of movement of a unit. A unit can deviate from it;
however, a major deviation must be reported and, if necessary,
coordinated. A unit advancing on an axis is not required to clear
the area along the axis and may bypass and report enemy forces
which do not threaten the accomplishment of its mission. The
axis of advance is used except when more restrictive control, i.e.,
a direction of attack, is required. When the brigade is assigned
an axis of advance, it may still elect to attack in multiple columns,
and may, in turn designate axes of advance for its tactical
battalions.
g. Direction of Attack. When given a direction of attack, the
unit must attack with the mass of its force along a definitely pre-
scribed route. Because of its restrictive nature, the direction of
attack is seldom used in the offense except in counterattacks and
night attacks. It may be used to insure that a secondary attack
makes maximum contribution to the main attack.
h. Assembly Area.
(1) An assembly area is an area in which a command as-
sembles preparatory to further action. Division normally
indicates the general location of brigade assembly areas.
Within these areas the brigade indicates specific locations
for its subordinate units. -In the assembly area, orders
are issued, maintenance and supply accomplished, and
the organization for combat completed.
(2) The location of the assembly area is relative to the mo-
bility of the force. A motorized infantry, mechanized, or
airborne brigade can attack from an assembly area
farther rearward than a dismounted unit. To reduce
nuclear vulnerability, multiple dispersed assembly areas
AGO 3326B 103
 are used. Assembly areas near units in contact or large
concentrations of troops are avoided.
(3) Assembly areas may be so far rearward as to require
refueling of motorized or mechanized forces prior to
crossing the line of departure. Refueling areas are
designated along the routes forward, and are located,
if the situation permits, beyond the range of enemy light
artillery. Final coordination for the attack may be con-
ducted concurrently with the refueling operation. Units
then proceed directly to the line of departure of attack
positions.
(4) Assembly areas should be concealed from air and ground
observation and be of such size as to avoid presentation
of lucrative targets to artillery, air, or nuclear attack.
Suitable routes forward should be available. Ground
observation and natural protection from tank attack are
desirable. When the mobility of the force permits, they
should be beyond the effective range of the bulk of enemy
artillery.
(5) Assembly areas may be designated for dispersal of units
following the attack.
i. Attack Position. The brigade does not normally use an attack
position. For coverage on the use of attack positions at the com-
pany and battalion level, see FM's 7-11, 7-20, and 17-15.
j. Phase Lines. A phase line is used to coordinate forward move-
ments of brigade units and may be used to limit the rate of advance
of attacking forces. A phase line extends completely across the
brigade zone and should be located on well defined terrain features.
Units report the time of their arrival at designated phase lines,
but do not halt their attack if not directed to do so prior to or
upon reaching the line.
k. Check Points. Check points are reference points oriented on
specific geographical locations. They are used to report a unit's
location in relation to such things as progress reports, reporting
information of enemy, and requesting fires.
1. InfiltrationLanes. Within the area of an attack by infiltration,
lanes are designated to provide sufficient space for movement of
infiltrating groups to move and to aid in directional control and
fire support. Such lanes are not normally designated by the brigade
order. See FM's 7-11 and 7-20.
m. Other Control Measures. For control measures used in air-
borne operations, see FM's 57-10, 57-35, and 57-30.

103. Security and Control of Gaps

a. General. The brigade takes active and passive measures prior
to the attack to prevent the enemy fronm determining the time and

104 AGO 3326B

place of the attack and to cover the brigade's preparation for it.
Tactical cover and deception plans are not normally included as
part of the brigade's operation order or plan, but the brigade
assists in the implementation of tactical cover and deception plans
made by division or higher headquarters. During the attack,
security is gained by rapid aggressive movement, by controlling
key terrain, and by the exploitation of all surveillance means.
Fire support, particularly nuclear, assists in providing security.
Each subordinate element of the brigade is responsible for pro-
viding its own security.
b. Security to Front, Flanks, and Rear. Subordinate units of the
brigade are usually directed to provide and control necessary forces
for frontal, flank, and rear security. When necessary, brigade re-
tains control of such forces, as for example, when the brigade's
mission is that of providing security for a larger force, or when
the brigade attacks on a wide front. Elements of the armored
cavalry squadron may be attached to the brigade and may be used
in a security role under brigade control.
c. Coverage of Gaps. When the brigade attacks on a broad
front, gaps of considerable distance can be expected to occur be-
tween tactical battalions within the brigade and between the
brigade and adjacent units. Responsibility for control of such
gaps must be clearly specified; by brigade for subordinate elements
or higher headquarters when gaps occur between brigades or in
relation to adjacent units.
(1) Such gaps are controlled primarily by patrols, by con-
tinuous ground and aerial surveillance, and by fire,
utilizing resources immediately available to the brigade
and other resources such as tactical air.
(2) Enemy forces discovered in gaps which are capable of
seriously interfering with the accomplishment of the
mission must be destroyed by fire alone, or by fire and
maneuver. Preferably, they are destroyed by nuclear
fires to avoid commitment of maneuver forces. Those
enemy forces not posing a serious threat may be con-
tained by minimum force until they can be eliminated
by brigade reserve units or by other forces following the
brigade.

104. Actions in the Objective Area and Alternate Plans

The brigade attack planning covers actions to be taken in the
objective area by the brigade as a whole, and the brigade attack
order contains instructions, usually to be executed on order, to
cover such actions. These actions are in addition to those estab-
lished techniques and procedures of consolidation and reorganiza-
AGO 3326B 105
tion conducted by the battalion. Planning also covers all foreseeable
contingencies. Separate plans are provided to cover those which
require drastic changes in the principal plan.

105. Administrative Support

a. Administrative support to sustain brigade offensive opera-
tions is provided as discussed in chapter 5E.The brigade trains must
be positioned and displaced to provide continuous support, partic-
ularly class III resupply. It is essential that maneuver units begin
the attack with a full basic load of ammunition and maximum fuel
for vehicles.
b. When the brigade is operating in an independent or semi-
independent role, necessary administrative elements must be at-
tached. In such cases, the brigade may receive administrative
support directly from field army.
106. Actions Taken Prior to the Attack
a. Exchange of Information. The brigade must provide sub-
ordinate elements all available information required to plan and
prepare for the attack. This information is issued as it becomes
available to permit concurrent planning at all levels. All essential
information contained in the operation order can be issued piece-
meal verbally in fragmentary orders and instructions when time
does not permit publication of the entire order sufficiently in ad-
vance of the attack. The brigade staff takes the necessary action
required to obtain needed information from higher and adjacent
headquarters. The brigade liaison officers assist in this task.
b. Organizationfor Combat. Necessary changes in organization
for combat within the brigade are made. Attachments to and de-
tachments from the brigade by division may necessitate changes
at the brigade level. See chapter 4.
c. Action in Assembly Areas. Movement to and occupation of
assembly areas must take place in time for units to complete
preparations for the attack.
d. Cover and Deception. Implementation of cover and deception
plans may call for operations over a period of days prior to the
attack to gain the required effect. Frequently, such plans will
call for maneuver of a part of the brigade for feints or demon-
strations and will require additional planning and support.

Section III. MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

107. General
a. The advance to contact is an offensive operation designed to
gain contact with the enemy, or to reestablish lost contact. It

106 AGO 3326B

should be aggressively conducted to locate the enemy while retain-
ing control of key terrain and lines of communication. When con-
tact is lost, the advance must be rapid and aggressive to prevent
the enemy from gaining sufficient time to reorganize and prepare
new defenses.
b. Security is a critical consideration in the movement to con-
tact. It is enhanced by the formation adopted by the brigade, by
early development of the situation, and by retaining the bulk of
the brigade's combat power uncommitted and readily available for
rapid employment against the enemy.
c. The commander exploits every collection means and agency
at his disposal to secure information about the enemy, to prevent
surprise, to acquire target information and to gain a maneuver
advantage.
d. The brigade may conduct an advance to contact as part of
the division advance or, when suitably reinforced, in an inde-
pendent operation. When contact is remote, when known enemy
resistance will be light, or when strong covering forces are pro-
vided, lead elements of the brigade may be organized for a tactical
move and elements in the rear may move administratively.
e. Whenever possible, the brigade advances in multiple columns;
using all available routes of approach. It is characterized by
centralized planning and decentralized control. The advance to
contact terminates when sufficient enemy resistance is en-
countered to require a coordinated attack by the brigade or a
major element thereof.
108. Organization for the Advance to Contact
a. General. In the advance to contact a unit must be organized
and positioned to provide for four primary components (fig. 23):
(1) The covering force.
(2) Advance guard.
(3) Flank and rear security.
(4) Main body.
b. Covering Force.
(1) The covering force of a force advancing to contact is
usually provided and controlled by the highest tactical
echelon involved. Thus, when the brigade is moving as
part of a division or higher echelon, the covering force
is usually controlled by those elements. The brigade
itself may constitute the corps covering force. The
mechanized and armored brigades have excellent capa-
bilities for this type mission. The brigade should be
organized for semi-independent operations. As a corps
covering force, the brigade operation would be patterned
AGO 3326B 107
 after that described in FM 61--100 for a division oper-
ating as a corps covering force.
(2) When the brigade provides its own covering force, it
uses an attached task force. This force should possess
a high degree of mobility and should be reinforced with
ENEMY

BRIGADE COVERING FORCE

TFA TF=

TFn()
T () l

f GMD

kIk 105-MM (SP)')(l

|F andM1M 05-MM (Sp)

GUARD TF(-) MAIN ARD

BODY

,.. TF1(-)

TFk 155-MM (SP)

TF
F TF H
TFIT

REARGUARD

Figure 23. Advance to contact. A type organization for advance to contact

(multiple columns). Covering force and rear guard are combined arms forces
-schematic. Advance guard is furnished for each column by lead battalion
task force. Brigade controls covering force, flank and rear guards. Artillery
observers are with lead companies. Air defense elements are interspersed
along both columns.

108 AGO 8326B

 long range fire power and communication support. If
an armored cavalry squadron, or troops thereof, is at-
tached, this unit, appropriately reinforced, should be used
as the covering force.
(3) The covering force operates well forward of the main
body. Since its rate of advance determines the rate of
advance of the remainder of the unit, it must operate
aggressively and develop enemy situations rapidly. In-
formation about the enemy must be relayed to the main
body, particularly information concerning bypassed or
contained enemy which must be destroyed by the main
body. Long range nuclear fires, delivered by tactical air
or by missile, on known or suspected concentrations of the
enemy, destroy him before he can interfere with the
advance.
c. The Advance Guard. The mission of the advance guard is to
insure the rapid, uninterrupted advance of the main body. For
the brigade, when moving on a single axis, it normally consists
of a battalion task force of tanks and motorized or mechanized
infantry. When the brigade is moving on multiple axes, the
advance guard is provided by the leading battalion task force on
each axis. The advance guard should be adequately supported by
engineer and artillery, and should provide its own flank security.
The advance guard should also maintain security forces to its
front to maintain contact with the covering force and to operate
in the area between the covering force and the advance guard.
See FM 7-20 for coverage of the battalion operating as the ad-
vance guard.
d. Flank and Rear Guards. The brigade controls flank security
units operating from the rear of the advance guard to the rear
guard, using for this purpose attached elements of the armored
cavalry squadron, when available, or task forces constituted from
its own resources. Helicopter-borne units are ideal for this pur-
pose, as their air mobility permits rapid movement by bounds to
key terrain features or location along routes parallel to the main
body. The brigade provides its own security to the rear, usually a
company task force from the last battalion in the column, unless
a rear guard force has been established under division control.
e. The Main Body. The brigade's main body, in addition to its
security responsibilities, must be organized for combat and
positioned in such a way as to be employed quickly once the enemy
force has been contacted and developed by the covering force
and the advance guard.
f. Organizationfor Movement. See figure 24 for brigade organ-
ization for the movement to contact.
AGO 3326B 109
 109. Meeting Engagements
a. In the advance to contact and the exploitation the brigade will
frequently participate in meeting engagements, wherein the bri-
gade, improperly deployed for combat, must attack an enemy force
concerning which it has inadequate intelligence. In such engage-
ments rapid and aggressive action is necessary to seize and retain
the initiative.
b. These attacks are characterized by-
(1) Immediate and aggressive reconnaissance and rapid
estimates.
(2) Rapid issuance of fragmentary orders.
(3) Direct attack from march column as units move forward
and are available for employment.
c. Speed and aggressiveness in the attack are essential to keep
the enemy off balance and to retain the initiative. Consistent with
its mission, immediate flanking movement by the advance guard
will generally produce more decisive results than will direct frontal
attacks, and will facilitate either the continued movement or the
deployment of the main body.

JLD TF

LC I f LC
SUPPORTING MAIN ATTACK SUPPORTING
ATTACK ATTACK

RESERVE

Figure 24. Brigade conducting a penetration-schematic.

110 AGO 3326B

110. Command and Control
a. The command group is normally positioned at the front of
the brigade -main body.
b. Some brigade light observation helicopters (LOH) are used
to assist in command and control. The commander of the advance
guard should be provided support from the brigade aviation
platoon.
c. The advance to contact must be carefully planned, but com-
manders of attached combat battalions should be given maximum
authority and freedom of action to execute the advance rapidly
and aggressively. March objectives, phase lines, check points,
and axes of advance are employed. The brigade must be flexible
and able to make necessary changes en route, and to plan and
disseminate mission type orders to effectively commit the brigade
in a coordinated attack when the situation calls for it.
d. Control communication for the movement to contact should
include maximum use of existing facilities-messenger, visual, and
radio communication. However, the use of radios must be weighed
in terms of the need for communication security.
111. Fire Support
a. Nuclear weapons allocated to the brigade are employed
against targets of opportunity; to destroy or to block an approach-
ing enemy, to disrupt and destroy his logistical support, and to
reduce his mobility. However, due to the dispersed nature of the
operation, the rapidity of movement of friendly forces, and the
difficulty of pinpointing the exact location of friendly troops,
troop safety precautions must be carefully considered.
b. Artillery attached to or supporting the brigade -must be so
located in the advancing column as to permit it to deliver con-
tinuous and adequate support to all elements of the brigade.

Section IV. CONDUCT OF THE ATTACK.

112. General
a. The discussion in this section is broad in nature, and applies
generally to all attacks. Variations in the conduct of the attack
under various forms of maneuver and under special conditions
are discussed in succeeding sections of this chapter and in
chapter 10.
b. In all types of attack, flexibility and speed of maneuver,
adequate fire support, and timely decisions from command are
required. This is particularly important in operations against an
enemy who possesses equal. nuclear firepower and equal mobility
c. A successful attack demands the maximum effort of all con-
AGO 3326B 111
cerned. Aggressive command leadership, proper staff supervision,
well-trained troops, high morale and esprit are all essential to
success.
d. The speed, armor protection, and. mobility of tanks and
mechanized infantry must be fully exploited to permit infantry-
tank task forces to close with and destroy the enemy. Infantry re-
mains mounted in carriers during movement and dismounts when
required to do so by terrain conditions or the threat of enemy
fires. The actual point of dismount is a matter of judgment on the
part of the commander.
e. Dismounted attacks must be time-phased more slowly than
mechanized attacks. However, the ability of the infantry to
maneuver over difficult terrain makes it possible to use avenues
of approach which gain the advantage of surprise. Tanks are used
to support the advance of dismounted infantry in the attack, and
dismounted infantry advances using both fire and maneuver.

113. Phases of the Attack

a. Generally, at the brigade level, attacks are conducted in the
following phases:
(1) Preparatory.
(2) Conduct.
(3) Consolidation and reorganization.
b. In the brigade, subordinate elements are often conducting
different phases simultaneously, requiring close coordination and
staff supervision by the brigade to insure that the concept of
the brigade operation is carried out as planned.

114. Preparation
a. During this phase, preliminary actions, such as movement to
assembly areas and resupply and refuelling operations are com-
pleted.
b. If a preparation is to be used, it is initiated during this
phase. Immediate damage assessment of nuclear and chemical
strikes is made, and radiation detection teams report the radiation
level so that it can be compared against the troop safety require-
ments set by the commander.
c. Feints and demonstrations may be! conducted during this
phase as part of the deception plan.
d. Troops begin moving forward from assembly areas into
attack position, if used, so as to cross the line of departure at the
prescribed time. Preparatory fires are exploited to cover this
movement. Normally, the brigade attacks from widely dispersed
assembly areas, massing at the last possible moment to avoid
presenting lucrative targets for enemy fire.

112 AGO 8326B

 e. Intelligence activity, particularly ground and aerial sur-
veillance, is intensified to detect the enemy's reaction to the pre-
paratory fires, to the movement of our troops, and particularly
to any feints, demonstrations, or other deceptive measures.

115. Conduct
a. Supporting fires continue in support of the attack as units
cross the line of departure. Battalion task forces move forward
as dispersed as possible, massing only to the extent required to
overcome resistance.
b. Enemy forces which, if bypassed, could jeopardize the ac-
complishment of the mission are destroyed. Unless directed other-
wise, brigade units bypass, destroy by fire, or contain other enemy
forces to permit the rapid advance of the brigade to seize the final
objective. Bypassed enemy are reported to higher headquarters.
c. At the brigade level, the attack is conducted as a series of
rapid advances and assaults, and brigade units are maneuvered
to provide as much mutual support as possible.
d. Priority of supporting fires is shifted in coordination, with
changes in the scheme of maneuver. Whenever possible, the enemy
is destroyed by nuclear or nonuclear fire alone.
e. The reserve moves forward by bounds or at a prescribed
distance behind the attacking units. The reserve should be located
in a position from which it can move rapidly to points of
probable employment. The reserve keeps as dispersed as possible,
making full use of available concealment and cover. Whenever
possible, its long range fire power is used to support the attack.
The reserve should be committed intact at the decisive time and
place. The brigade commander seeks to create opportunities which
can be exploited by the reserve for decisive results. The reserve
may be used to mop-up bypassed resistance, to augment flank or
rear security units if required, to assist in covering gaps, or to
defeat counterattacking enemy. Upon committing his reserve,
the brigade commander reports this fact to higher headquarters,
and reconstitutes a reserve from his own force or requests addi-
tional units from division. If the attack is prolonged, reserve units
are rotated to permit necessary rest, maintenance, and resupply
for brigade elements. For additional details on employment of
the reserve, see FM 7-20.
f. During the assault on the final objective, all resources of the
brigade are committed if required. Maximum firepower is
brought to bear; units proceed beyond the final objective to secure
and defend enemy avenues of approach in to it. Minimum forces
are left on objectives to defend them, and the remainder of the
brigade disperses as much as possible. Fires are shifted to assist
AGO 3826B 113
in the retention of the objective, and are placed on likely avenues
of approach for an enemy counterattack. The brigade makes
necessary preparations to continue the attack.
g. If the attack is discontinued, or if the brigade reverts to
division reserve, it may move into dispersed assembly areas or
assume a defensive posture.
h. During the attack, the brigade trains, or elements thereof,
move forward to insure that logistical support for the attack is
adequate and that the battalion combat trains are supported to
the maximum. In the attack, consumption of class III supplies,
especially by mechanized or motorized units, is considerable, and
the movement of POL forward must be sufficient to prevent halting
the attack for lack of its supply. The expenditure of ammunition
is high, and the brigade S4 advises the division support command
when it will be desirable, or mandatory, for ammunition supply
points to displace forward. The brigade surgeon insures that
division clearing stations move forward to handle casualties.

116. Reorganization and Consolidation

a. Reorganization and consolidation is normally accomplished
during halts and/or periods of relative inactivity. It should never
interfere with maintaining the momentum of the attack.
b. During periods of reorganization and consolidation, emphasis
is placed on administrative support actions necessary to sustain
or continue the attack. Changes in task organization are made
as required.
c. If the attack is discontinued, reorganization and consolidation
is more complete. Supply levels are balanced; damaged equipment
repaired or evacuated, personnel replacements sent to units, alid
administrative units moved forward.
d. Preparations are made to resume the offensive when so
directed.

117. Enemy Reaction to the Attack

The enemy can be expected to react to the attack with all of the
resources at his command. Every effort must be made to deceive
him as to the location of the main attack., His reaction may take
the form of counterattacks supported by nuclear weapons. The
brigade's plan of attack and its execution must avoid massing of
the brigade so as to present a lucrative target for enemy nuclear
attack.
118. Command
The brigade commander places himself where he can best in-
fluence the action and where the impact of his presence has the

114 AGO 3326B

greatest effect. He keeps fully informed of the situation and in-
sures that his staff is in continuous contact with subordinate units.
He shifts priority of fires and maneuver units as required. He
uses his reserve to influence the action. He decentralizes control
to subordinate commanders to the greatest extent possible.

Section V. PENETRATION
1i 9. General
a. The penetration, as a form of maneuver, is discussed in
paragraph 91. (See fig. 24.)
b. Penetrations are conducted in three phases: rupture of the
enemy's forward defensive position; Widening and securing this
gap; and seizing and controlling objectives which destroy the con-
tinuity of the enemy's defensive position While these phases are
usually conducted in sequence, they are essentially tasks which
must be accomplished before a successful penetration can be
completed. All three phases may be conducted simultaneously,
and frequently are when nuclear weapons and airborne f6rces have
been allocated to the brigade. In such an event, nuclear Weapons
can be employed to create the gap or Widen and secure its
shoulders. Mechanized or motorized battalions exploit it imme-
diately to linkup with airborne units which have seized objectives
in the enemy's rear.
c. The infantry brigade is best suited for the first two phases,
and the mechanized and armored brigade for the rapid movement
through the gap to seize the final objectives or to linkup with air-
borne forces. The airborne brigade has excellent capability for
airborne operations during phase three.
d. The penetration of a well-organized position requires a
preponderance of combat power and continued momentum of the
attack. The attack must move rapidly to seize objectives which
destroy the continuity of the defense. If the attack is slowed or de-
layed, the enemy is given time to react; If the rupture is not made
sharply and rapid seizure of the objectives accomplished, the attack
becomes a pushing type action. This results in high casualty rates
anid affords the enemy an opportunity to fall back intact on his
routes of communications, thus avoiding destruction.
120. Basic Considerations in Planning the Penetration
a. Planning for a penetration is conducted as prescribed in
paragraphs 92 through 106.
b. The penetration is adopted as the form of maneuver when
dictated by the brigade's mission or selected by the brigade com-
mander when one or more of the following conditions exist.
AGO 3326B 115
 (1) The enemy's flanks are unassailable, or when time does
not permit another form of maneuver.
(2) When the penetration is favored because-
(a) The enemy is over extended and there are weak spots
in his defenses.
(b) When terrain and observation are favorable.
(c) When ample fire support, particularly nuclear, is
available.
(d) When the attacker has the preponderance of combat
power.
c. Objectives are selected to accomplish all three phases. In
dismounted attacks, objectives are relatively close in, and inter-
mediate objectives may be used to control and phase the attack.
In mechanized penetrations, relatively deep objectives may be
assigned.
d. The main attack should be made over the best terrain and on
a relatively narrow front. Its objectives should be the final ob-
jectives. In some cases, the main attack force is not committed
until supporting attacks and/or nuclear fire have effected the rup-
ture of the enemy's position and provided a gap. The mechanized
battalion task force is ideal for this role. The bulk of the armor
attached to the brigade should be used to move through the
gap to seize the final objective.
e. Supporting attacks may be used to widen the gaps, to prevent
the enemy from disengaging and to destroy him in place. They
are directed toward seizing or controlling terrain on the shoulders
of the penetrations to enable the main attack force to move
through the gap.
f. The reserve should be kept mobile and positioned where it
can exploit initial success. Frequently, it will pass through forces
making the initial assault or assist in seizing or destroying the
final objective.
g. Airborne forces may be assigned the mission of seizing or
destroying objectives in the rear; however, if the enemy is de-
fending in depth, such forces cannot land directly on objectives.
In most cases they must make their landings in undefended areas
from which they will attack to seize the final objectives.
h. Controls imposed by the brigade for a penetration usually
include a line of departure, time of attack, zones, assembly areas
for major subordinate units, objectives, and axis of advance.
When the brigade penetrates a strong enemy position, a direction
of attack may be prescribed for attacking units.

121. Fire Support

a. The penetration is normally preceded by a preparation which

116 AGO 8826B

neutralizes enemy positions, limits his ability to react against the
attack, and covers the movement of attacking units. Suitable
targets include defensive positions, fire support means, command
and control installations, and reserves. Smoke reduces the effec-
tiveness of enemy observation.
b. Nuclear weapons contribute immeasurably to the effective-
ness of fire support; however, the effects of nuclear weapons must
be considered in relation to the scheme of maneuver. It is fre-
quently preferable to use these weapons on the flanks of, rather
than in the area of the main attack.
c. Toxic chemicals in nonpersistent concentrations are a rapid,
effective method of expediting rupture of the position. They in-
crease the friendly combat superiority in the area without
producing obstacles.
d. Fires are planned to neutralize enemy reserves, to prevent
movement of enemy forces into or out of the area of operations,
and to destroy any targets which seriously threaten the ac-
complishment of the mission.
e. Enemy forces isolated during the rupture of the position may
be reduced by fire.
122. Conduct of the Penetration
a. The principles covered in paragraphs 112 through 118 apply
to the conduct of the penetration.
b. The main attack creates the gap and continues attacking
toward the final objectives, or it may pass through a gap created
by nuclear fire. It is pushed forward vigorously to seize or destroy
objectives in the rear. In the event it is slowed or stopped by enemy
action, the reserve may be used to bypass and continue the advance.
c. Nuclear weapons are planned for use on enemy reserves that
may interfere with the operation. Enemy units which have been
divided by the penetration are destroyed or contained until they
can be destroyed by following units.
d. Administrative support elements are moved forward as the
attack progresses to insure an uninterrupted advance of the at-
tacking forces. Particular attention is given to resupply of class
III and class V.

Section VI. ENVELOPMENT

123. The Envelopment
a. In the envelopment, the main or enveloping attack passes
around or over (airborne) the enemy's principal defensive posi-
tions to seize or destroy objectives which cut his escape routes
and subject him to destruction in position from the flank or rear.
AGO 3826B 117
Supporting attacks hold the enemy in position during the advance
of the enveloping attack. The envelopment forces the enemy to
fight in two or more directions simultaneously to meet the
converging attacks (fig. 25).
b. The brigade may use the envelopment as the form of maneu-
ver for its own attack or may take part in an envelopment being
made by the division or larger force. In the first instance, one or
more battalions of the brigade make the holding attack while
other brigade units pass around the enemy's flank to seize ob-
jectives in the rear. When part of a division envelopment, the
brigade' may be given the encircling role or the supporting role
of holding the enemy in place.
c. The forces in the supporting attack should be kept to the
minimum and the bulk of the combat power used as the enveloping
force. The latter should be highly mobile. Armored and mech-

OBJECTIVE

TFZ -u/X- -tjj -

|TF~t LIJTF9

LD

MAIN ATTACK SUPPORTING

ATTACK

TFk
RESERVE

Figure 25. Brigade conducting an envelopment.

118 AGO 3326B

anized brigades are ideal for this purpose.
d. Nuclear fires may be used to create an assailable flank to
permit the envelopment to be used.
e. Frequently, envelopments are made in conjunction with air-
borne assaults and the encircling force becomes a linkup force.
f. Accurate and timely intelligence is essential in planning an
envelopment. Leaving an exposed flank, or lightly defending a
flank, may be a deliberate move on the part of the enemy to draw
friendly forces into a killing zone of the enemy's choosing.
g. Minimum control measures are assigned to the enveloping
force to permit the commander wide latitude and flexibility in
executing his attack.
h. Cover and deception measures are critically important to
mislead the enemy. Every effort is made to make him conclude
that the secondary effort is the main attack and to cause him to
position or move his reserves to counter the secondary attack.
i. Envelopments require an appropriate balance of forces for
the main and supporting effort. Frequently the forces holding
the enemy in position are economy of force elements with greater
combat power allocated the enveloping force. The holding force
must, however, have sufficient combat power to keep the enemy
fully occupied during movement of the enveloping force.
j. Brigades take part in double envelopments conducted by
higher echelons but will rarely have the resources required to
conduct a double envelopment independently.

Section VII. INFILTRATION

124. General
a. An attack by infiltration is a variation of the penetration.
In it, attacking units rely on secrecy, stealth, and deception to
penetrate the enemy's position. Whenever possible, the enemy is
not engaged in combat until absolutely necessary to secure or
destroy objectives in his rear or otherwise to accomplish the
infiltrating force's mission.
b. The objective of an attack by infiltration may be-
(1) To seize key objectives in the enemy rear in conjunction
with a linkup type operation.
(2) To destroy the enemy or his vital installations. This
includes attack on enemy reserves; fire support delivery
means, especially nuclear; and key command, com-
munication, and logistical centers.
(3) To gain intelligence about the enemy.
(4) To harass and interdict his rear areas.
AGO 3326B 119
 c. Gaps in the enemy lines, rough or difficult terrain, and poor
conditions of visibility facilitate attack by infiltration.
d. Dismounted infantry has the greatest capability for making
ground infiltrations; however, in exceptional cases, mechanized or
motorized units can be used. Airborne units can be used effectively
in infiltrations.
e. The infiltration force remains in the enemy's rear area until
it exfiltrates, is withdrawn by air, or a linkup made.
125. Basic Considerations in Planning the Infiltration
a. Objectives are selected to insure accomplishment of the
mission. They may be key terrain which restrict the movement
of enemy reserves, fire support means, and key command, com-
munication, and logistical centers.
b. The brigade retains direct control over an infiltration when
the infiltrating force is of battalion or larger size. Otherwise,
control is decentralized as far as possible.
c. Control measures must be in considerable detail, since the
infiltration is conducted by small groups during periods of re-
duced visibility and often through difficult terrain.
d. Linkup plans must provide for adequate recognition means,
and provide for unity of command once the linkup has been made.
e. Within the area of infiltration a series of infiltration lanes of
sufficient width to permit the infiltrating groups to move by
stealth are designated. Infiltration lanes, in conjunction with the
coded designation of infiltrating groups and their probable
sequence of movement, check points, and phase lines provide a
means of reporting the progress of the operation and of co-
ordinating fires with movement of the groups. Other control
measures used are attack positions, objectives, and rallying points
or areas.
f. Adequate communications must be provided for use within
the infiltrating unit and for use between that unit and the con-
trolling headquarters.
g. Units making an infiltration usually attack only with in-
dividual weapons and hand carried crew served weapons. Provision
must be made to provide adequate fire support to infiltration units
once they close on the objectives. Plans should call for the air
delivery of heavier weapons to these units in the objective area
to provide additional support for subsequent operations. Plans
should provide for battlefield illumination. Supporting fires are
also used to cover and assist in the infiltration.
126. Conduct of the Infiltration
a. The infiltrating elements in small groups pass through, over,
or around the enemy's forward defensive positions avoiding de-

120 AGO 8326B

tection, where possible, and if detected, avoiding decisive engage-
ment. They move, normally through multiple lanes, to attack
positions in the area of decisive action. The passage of the groups
through the enemy position and their movement to their attack
positions may be accompanied by demonstrations, including pre-
paratory fires, in areas not included in the infiltration. Pre-
paratory fires may be placed on the enemy positions in the area
of infiltration to reduce the enemy's surveillance capability.
b. Upon arrival in their attack positions, the infiltrating groups
form into attack formations and prepare for action. At a specified
time the infiltrating force executes its mission and prepares for
linkup, exfiltration or withdrawal by air.
c. Groups which lose direction or are unable to reach the attack
position proceed to rallying points or areas. Contingency plans
cover their subesquent actions including evacuation.
d. If airborne forces are being used for infiltration, the aircraft
flying individually or in small groups pass over the enemy forward
defensive area. This passage, where possible, is over unoccupied
areas and may follow routes which ground patrols have found to
be clear of enemy units. Aircraft may simulate landing at other
locations as a deception measure. Infiltrating groups may land at
various points in the enemy's rear and proceed on foot to the
designated attack position. Other aspects of the operation are
similar to that of surface infiltration. Penetration of the radar
curtain by flying at lowest possible safe altitude is considered the
normal method of aerial infiltration.
e. A widely dispersed enemy, suitable trafficability of terrain,
and concealment may enable infiltrating units to use vehicles dur-
ing the operation. Similarly, infiltrating groups may use small
boats and other watercraft.
f. Infiltrating forces proceeding to great depths or remaining
in the enemy's rear for extended periods require supply which
can best be accomplished by airdrop. Maximum use should be
made, however, of captured enemy stocks, but the success of the
operation must not be jeopardized by sole reliance on the seizure
of such stocks.
g. Friendly units bypassed during defensive operations can be
used in a manner similar to those which have infiltrated through
or over enemy positions.

Section VIII. NIGHT COMBAT

127. General
a. Night combat at the brigade level will be frequent and should
not be considered unusual. Attacking at night should always be
AGO 3526B 121
considered as a possible course of action by the commander when
he makes his estimate. Reduced visibility at night hampers the
enemy's ability to defend; and often attacks at night give the
attacker a distinct psychological advantage. Surprise may often
be achieved at night when it is impossible to do so during daylight
operations.
b. Night attacks may be used to continue the momentum gained
by a successful daylight attack, to gain surprise, to accomplish
massing under the cover of darkness, and to reduce the effective-
ness of enemy fires.
c. Control is more difficult at night; hence, more restrictive
control measures must be used.
128. Basic Considerations in Planning for Night Attacks
a. Plans for night attacks are more detailed and less flexible
than for daylight operations. The emphasis is on simple, easy
to execute formations and maneuver. Planning is centralized and
execution is decentralized.
b. As in an infiltration, secrecy and stealth may often be
essential to success. Deceptive measures must be taken to prevent
the enemy discovering the time and direction of attack. 'Noise
discipline must be effectively enforced.
c. Close combat is more important at night than during daylight
attacks because of the decreased ability to use aimed fire, and be-
cause the coordination of supporting fires with the maneuver of
troops is more difficult.
d. Although well trained units can execute night attacks on
short notice, planning and troop leading procedures for a night
attack are generally more extensive and time consuming than for
a similar operation conducted during daylight. Brigade planning
should allow subordinate commanders and staffs adequate time
for daylight reconnaissance, and for preparations in assembly
areas and on line. Troops should be thoroughly briefed on the
final plans.
e. Time patterns are avoided so that the enemy cannot predict
the time of attack. Often, an attack is made late at night so that
initial objectives can be seized by daylight and the attack con-
tinued at that time. If the objective is relatively deep, or if the
battalion mission requires immediate continuation of the attack,
the attack may begin early at night and continue to the final
objective during darkness. If the objective is to be seized and
held, it may also begin early at night.
f. Objectives for night attacks should be clearly identifiable at
night. Approaches thereto should be selected which have easily
recognizable landmarks. More open avenues of approach may be

122 AGO 8826B

used at night because of the added concealment of darkness.
g. The brigade assigns a zone of action for each subordinate
element; and usually prescribes a direction of'attack, or an axis
of advance within each zone. The line of departure specified by
brigade should be easily recognizable on the ground, and, if the
night attack involves a passage of lines, it may be marked in
advance by friendly troops. For other control measures for night
combat used at the battalion and company level, see FM's 7-11
and 7-20.
h. Preparatory fires are not normally used. When they are
not fired, every effort is made to maintain the existing pattern of
fires prior to and during the attack. In determining whether or
not a preparation will be fired, its probable assistance to the
maneuver force must be weighted against the effects of tactical
surprise stemming from an attack by stealth. If a preparation is
not fired, on-call fires are planned to be used in the event surprise
is lost. In addition to normal fires, fires are planned to cover the
withdrawal of the attacking force, to box in the area of the
attack, and to cover the reorganization on the objective. Nor-
mally on-call nuclear fires are not used because of the difficulty
of achieving troop safety to protect troops from dazzle.
i. Illumination is planned, and may be used throughout the attack
or on an on-call basis after secrecy has been lost. Plans should
include all types of illumination. These include tank and artillery
searchlights, illuminating shells, and illuminants delivered by
aircraft. Normally, the brigade commander delegates authority
to the battalion to initiate the use of illumination, although brigade
carefully coordinates its use to prevent illuminants used in one
zone from interfering with operations in another zone.
j. Listening silence on radios is maintained as long as possible
for secrecy and primary reliance is placed 'on the use of wire.
Once the attack is discovered normal communications will be
used. Prearranged pyrotechnic signals may also be employed.
129. Conduct of the Night Attack
a. For conduct of the night attack by company and battalion, see
FM 7-20.
b. The brigade commander and his staff operate well forward,
in order to assist in maintaining close control.
c. Brigade assists in the movement of battalions forward from
assembly areas to attack -positions by providing control personnel
at key points along the routes.
d. The brigade elements remain in column formation for as
long as possible to facilitate control, preferably until the probable
line of deployment is reached.
AGO 3326B 123'
 e. The reserve is positioned well forward. In dismounted at-
tacks it may at times move at a fixed distance behind the attack-
ing elements rather than by bounds. The plans for the reserve
should be made in great detail to permit its commitment at night,
when required. Preferably it is committed at considerable distance
from other attacking units to avoid intermingling and confusion.
The reserve should be composed of tanks and infantry since sur-
prise will usually have been lost when it is committed and it
should possess a high degree of mobility. See FM 61-100.
f. Measures taken for flank and rear security must provide for
patrols to search for, uncover, or contain bypassed units and to
detect enemy counterattacks.

Section IX. RECONNAISSANCE IN FORCE

130. General
a. A reconnaissance in force is an attack to discover and test
the enemy's dispositions and strength or to develop other intel-
ligence. Although its primary aim is reconnaissance, it may un-
cover weaknesses in the enemy's disposition which may be
promptly exploited with success.
b. The brigade may conduct a reconnaissance in force as a unit,
or elements of the brigade may conduct a reconnaissance in force
on a limited scale for the brigade. The force should include tanks.
c. When the availability of nuclear weapons permits, the prin-
cipal efforts of the brigade may be a widespread and continuous
reconnaissance in force. Under these conditions, the enemy re-
action may result in enemy forces presenting remunerative nuclear
targets. The maneuver elements then complete their destruction.
The reserve is held ready to replace or relieve maneuver elements
or to exploit opportunities which may develop.
d. Mechanized and armored brigades are excellent reconnais-
sance in force units. The infantry and airborne brigades should
be motorized or mechanized for such operations. However, with-
out motorization they can conduct a reconnaissance in force
of limited depth. Helicopterborne forces, using "hit and run" tac-
tics can conduct a reconnaissance in force over a wide front.
131. Basic Considerations in Planning a Reconnaissance
in Force
a. The reconnaissance in force normally develops information
more rapidly and in more detail than other reconnaissance
methods. In arriving at a decision to reconnoiter in force, the
commander considers the-
(1) Extent of his present knowledge of the enemy situation
124 AGO 3326B
 and the urgency and importance of the additional infor-
mation sought.
(2) Efficiency and speed of other intelligence collection
agencies.
(3) Extent to which his plan of action may be divulged by
the reconnaissance in force.
(4) The possibility that the reconnaissance may lead to a
general engagement under unfavorable conditions.
b. When information is sought regarding a particular area, the
reconnaissance in force is planned and executed as an attack with
a limited objective. If the enemy situation along a front is to be
developed, the reconnaissance in force is a phased advance under
mission type orders, employing strong aggressive probes to de-
termine the enemy situation at critical points.
c. The reconnoitering force must be strong enough to cause
the enemy to react strongly and definitely to the attack, thus
disclosing his location, strength, planned fires and planned use
of reserves. The size of the force depends upon the mission of the
brigade and the situation. The brigade commander may use a
force as small as a company task force or as large as a battalion,
retaining sufficient reserves to exploit enemy weaknesses.
d. Plans must provide for the extrication of the force in the
event it becomes closely engaged.
132. Conduct of the Reconnaissance in Force
The reconnaissance in force is conducted generally the same as
other attacks. Its purpose is not to become so closely engaged as to
risk defeat, and its mission is one of obtaining information. Once
the mission is completed, the force may either withdraw or remain
in place.

Section X. EXPLOITATION AND PURSUIT

133. General
a. Every attack should have as its objective destruction of the
enemy, and failing this, the creation of conditions which permit
exploitation, and the final phase of exploitation, pursuit. Exploita-
tion is a decisive phase of the offensive since it destroys the
enemy's ability to reconstitute and conduct an organized defense
or to withdraw in an orderly manner. It permits maximum
destruction of the enemy and his resources at minimum cost to
the attacker, and is extremely damaging to the enemy morale.
b. Any size force may exploit and pursue. At the brigade level,
the exploitation may call for an advance of many miles over a broad
front.
AGO 83326B 125
 c. The brigade, and elements thereof, exploit their successes
on their own initiative unless directed to discontinue the attack.
d. Nuclear weapons can assist in creating the conditions making
exploitation possible.

134. Basic Considerations in Planning the Exploitation

a. Since the exploitation is the continuation of an attack, com-
manders at all echelons must be prepared to exploit and pursue at
any time the opportunity is present to do so.
b. Objectives, deep in the enemy rear, should be selected
by higher headquarters. Their seizure should deny the enemy
routes of escape, encircle him, destroy his communication centers
and logistical installations.
c. Organization for combat should provide for tank-heavy forces
composed of tanks and mechanized or motorized infantry. The
armored and mechanized brigades are ideally suited for exploita-
tion and pursuit. Artillery and other combat support units should
be attached to the brigade for the exploitation. Full use should
be made of tactical air for fire support and reconnaissance since
the brigade will often be beyond the range of general support
artillery.
d. Exploitation may be initiated on order, upon reaching pre-
scribed objectives or phase lines, or the commander may initiate
the exploitation when the enemy situation has deteriorated to a
suitable level. Indications of the enemy's deterioration include a
decrease in enemy resistance, an increase in prisoners captured,
an increase in abandoned materiel,, and the overrunning of artil-
lery, higher unit command posts, signal installations and supply
dumps. The transition from the attack to the exploitation may
be so gradual as to be hardly distinguishable, or it may be abrupt,
the latter occurring most frequently when nuclear weapons are
used.
e. With adequate nuclear support, the exploitation may be
launched in conjunction with the initial assault or at any time
thereafter, dependent upon the effects of the fires and the desires
of the commander.
f. Once the exploitation is begun, it is carried out without letup
to the seizure of the final objective. The enemy is given no relief
from offensive pressure.
g. Decentralized execution is characteristic of exploitations.
Mission type orders are given to subordinate commanders. Min-
imum control measures are used.
h. In the exploitation, nuclear weapons are used principally on
targets of opportunity. These weapons are used to eliminate
pockets of resistance, destroy hostile reserves, and seal enemy

126 AGO 3326B

escape routes. Chemicals are also effective means of blocking
defiles.
i. Logistical support, particularly forward movement of classes
III and V may be the limiting factor in determining how far the
brigade may exploit or pursue the enemy. Portions of the brigade
trains should accompany the battalion task force.
135. Conduct of the Exploitation
a. The brigade moves in column over one or more routes, by-
passing the enemy where possible, or containing him while the
advance continues. This advance may at times resemble an ad-
vance to contact, interrupted only as required to overcome enemy
resistance so that the advance can continue.
b. All weapons are exploited. Tactical air is used to protect the
advance, detect and disrupt enemy reserves moving forward, and
to provide air defense.
c. Reconnaissance by fire is employed to reduce the requirement
for patrols.
d. See FM's 61-100 and 17-30 for additional details on ex-
ploitation.

136. The Pursuit

The purpose of a pursuit is destruction of the enemy force. A
pursuit may be launched against a locally defeated or disorganized
enemy, and, if aggressively pressed, may result in decisive defeat
of the entire enemy force. The brigade commander must be con-
tinually alert for any sign of the enemy's inability to maintain
organized resistance, report such facts to higher headquarters
and maintain relentless pressure on the enemy force facing him.
The pursuit is normally initiated upon approval of higher head-
quarters.
a. Once the pursuit is ordered the commander presses the attack
with all available resources. Local enemy defenses are overrun
and isolated pockets of resistance are bypassed or destroyed by
fire. The main enemy force is prevented from organizing an
effective defense by the presence of the pursuer.
b. The brigade commander may designate terrain objectives,
phase lines or check points to control a pursuit. In assigning con-
trol measures for a pursuit, subordinate commanders are given
as much freedom of action as is consistent with security and
maintenance of command and integrity.
c. In conduct of the pursuit, the brigade commander insures
that all resources are used to accelerate the mobility of his forces.
Mobility of tactical and tactical support elements should not, how-
AGO 3326B 127
ever, be achieved by grounding administrative support so that
adequate support is not provided elements conducting the pursuit.
d. Fire support elements are placed well forward to insure that
fire can be delivered deep into enemy position and on enemy re-
treating columns. Close air support fires are used to interdict
routes of movement of enemy columns and airborne fire support
by Army aircraft is used to the maximum.
e. The pursuit is conducted by maintaining direct and con-
tinuous pressure on the main enemy force with provisions for
highly mobile task forces to be employed in an encirclement or
envelopment operation. Major subordinate tactical elements are
made as self sufficient as resources will permiit with plans for their
employment on mission type orders against enemy flanks or to
block avenues of retreat. Consideration should be given to forma-
tion of airborne enveloping forces for this purpose.
f. The intelligence processes must be expedited in a pursuit
operation to insure that enemy counteraction is detected early
and prevented. Aerial reconnaissance resources are exploited to
the maximum.

128 AGO 8826B

 CHAPTER 7
DEFENSE

Section I. GENERAL
137. Purpose
a. The defense is adopted only as a temporary measure until
such time as the defender can assume the offensive. During con-
duct of the defense the defender strives to gain and maintain
the initiative. The attacker is continually harassed by fires and
offensive maneuver when appropriate. The defender uses all
means available to detect an enemy weakness and maintains suffi-
cient flexibility in his planning to exploit those that occur. All
resources are employed to inflict maximum destruction on the
enemy force.
b. The brigade assumes a defensive posture: to gain time in
,preparation for subsequent offensive operations; to economize in
force; to force the enemy to mass before its position and destroy
it by fire; to exhaust an enemy force; to deny a superior enemy
force entry into a vital area; or to force an attacking enemy into
an area where he will be vulnerable to destruction.
138. Capabilities
The brigade is capable of conducting a defensive operation as
part of a larger force or in an independent or semi-independent
role. Its capabilities and limitations are dictated by resources
attached, placed in support of, or otherwise made available.
Methods of conducting the defense are based upon the mission
and capabilities of attached and supporting elements. It will
routinely participate in a mobile defense as part of a larger
force by conducting an area defense, a delaying action, or by
executing offensive maneuver to destroy an enemy penetration.
Under certain circumstances the brigade is capable of conducting
a mobile defense. Ability to participate in a mobile defense
depends on the mobility of organic and attached units. Mechanized
or motorized infantry, supported by tanks, are required for fixing
forces, while the brigade in the reserve or striking force role
should consist of tank-heavy task forces supported by mechanized
infantry.
139. Fundamental Considerations
Defensive operations are characterized by detailed planning and
the degree of centralized control dictated by the type of defense
conducted. Within limits of security, the command should be
AGO 3326B 129
 advised of the purpose of the defensive operation and its probable
duration and kept advised as the situation changes. Regardless
of the planned duration of the defense, improvement of the defense
position is continuous.
a. Terrain. Proper evaluation and organization of the brigade
defensive area is essential to maximum utilization of forces avail-
able. That portion of the brigade area that favors the defender is
lightly manned in favor of stronger forces in areas that afford
the attacker an advantage. The natural defensive characteristics
of the terrain are improved with assistance and advice from at-
tached engineers, by artificial obstacles with due consideration for
offensive maneuver and future operations. Use of minefields and
other obstacles will vary with the commander's mobility. When
mobility is high extensive barriers will not be used since they
impede his mobility. When his mobility is low, extensive barriers
will serve to lower enemy mobility. Those terrain features that,
if seized will afford the attacker an advantage, are strongly
defended.
b. Security. The brigade commander insures that he has time
necessary for reaction to meet an enemy threat by early wdarning
of his pending actions. Forces are positioned to provide early
warning and information of enemy movements in sufficient time
to permit the brigade commander to counteract or frustrate enemy
plans. Security is based on the most probable enemy action and
employed at various ranges on the periphery of the brigade.
c. All-round Defense. In defensive planning, the brigade com-
mander retains the capability to defend against enemy forces at
any point in the defensive area. Principal forces are positioned
to engage and defeat enemy forces in areas along their most likely
avenues of approach, but provisions are made for defense against
entry from any directions. Plans should be sufficiently flexible,
and reserves should be positioned to permit destruction of enemy
irregular forces or those delivered vertically into the area. Terrain
permitting, all-round defense is most economically insured by
proper positioning of security forces and provisions of a highly
mobile reserve capable of traversing the entire defensive area.
In areas that are not accessible to vehicular mounted forces,
security elements must be employed in sufficient strength at critical
points to defeat or contain enemy forces and prevent disruption
of supporting operations of the defender.
d. Defense in Depth. An attacker who has effected a breach in
the defensive position, must be canalized, diverted, and blocked
from critical areas. This is accomplished by depth in defense and
achieved through development of alternate positions and placement
of reserve elements. The penetrating force is kept under ever-

130 AGO 3326B

 increasing pressure. Its forward movement is slowed or stopped
pending offensive maneuver by the defender to destroy the
penetrating force.
e. Flexibility. The brigade defensive plan must provide for the
capability of early reaction and of seizing the initiative at any
time the attacker exposes a weakness, Flexibility is attained
with an adequate reserve that is properly positioned and alternate
plans to provide for contingencies.
f. Dispersion. In the organization of the defense the brigade
commander disposes his forces so as to present the least remuner-
ative target to enemy fires. Dispersion must be consistent With
the capability of providing sufficient mass to accomplish the bri-
gade mission and providing an offensive maneuver force on a
timely basis.
(1) Terrain permitting, dispersion for a mechanized or
motorized battalion acting as the reserve may be greater
than for dismounted elements. The availability of ade-
quate airlift will, on the other hand, permit a high
degree of dispersion of foot elements notwithstanding
terrain obstacles.
(2) Desirably, and if mobility permits timely massing, re-
serve battalion(s) may be positioned in company size
groups at two or more locations to permit freedom of
action in the event one or more of the reserve companies
becomes engaged.
g. Mutual Support. Consistent with accomplishment of the as-
signed mission and dispersion appropriate to the environment,
forces are placed so as to provide an exchange of defensive re-
sources. Such resources may include fires, observation, or maneu-
ver elements. The capability of mutual support may be attained
laterally or in depth. Mutual support within battalion-size units
is preserved. Control of gaps is effected through surveillance,
obstacles, prearranged fires and provision for maneuver elements
to exploit or reinforce fires.
h. Maximum Use of Offensive Action. The mobile situations
to be expected under nuclear or nonuclear conditions will afford
the defender many opportunities to destroy attacking forces by
effective employment of spoiling attacks and counterattacks sup-
ported by nuclear or conventional fires. Defending forces must
be alert to regain the initiative by offensive action, and must take
maximum advantage of the mobility of attached or organic
mechanized and armored units.

AGO 3326B 131

 Section II. FORMS AND ECHELONS OF DEFENSE
140. Types of Defense
The mission assigned establishes method of operation and the
consequent conduct of a defense. Essentially, a defense may be
mobile with less regard to retention of terrain in general, may
be a complete denial of entry to the area being defended, or more
often, a combination of both. Despite the nature of the operation,
a defender must deny an attacker entry to terrain that precludes
his destruction or permits it only in a costly operation. The basic
forms of defense are the mobile and area defense. See chapter 6,
FM 61-100.
a. Mobile Defense. This form of defense is normally conducted
by a division or larger command. It is oriented toward inflicting
maximum damage upon an attacker by fires and offensive action.
As in other forms, the enemy is brought under fire as soon as he
enters the area of influence of the element conducting the defense.
Forward positions are lightly garrisoned in favor of a strong
mobile reserve. Every effort is made to canalize the attacker into
"killing ground"-terrain unfavorable to his maneuver, and on
which heavy nuclear and nonnuclear fires have been planned.
Dependent on the situation, battalions in the forward defense
area may be ordered to hold key terrain. In other situations, they
may allow the attacker to bypass. Essential to the mobile defense
are: mobility of the defender at least equal to that of the attacker,
trafficable terrain, strong reserves at higher echelon and air
superiority or the capability to secure local air superiority at will.
See FM 61-100.
b. Area Defense. In this form of defense, the defender retains
terrain and orients his effort toward destroying the attacker
forward of the defensive area. If the attacker penetrates the
defensive area, he is ejected or destroyed by a combination of
fires and offensive action.
141. Brigade Defensive Roles
The brigade, when participating in a mobile defense, will be
employed in a delaying and/or defensive role, or will constitute
the division reserve. Less frequently, when assigned to man for-
ward positions, the brigade may defend in a part of the sector
and conduct a delay in the remainder. In the role of division
reserve, the brigade will be given the mission of providing depth
to the division position by constructing blocking poistions and
preparing plans for and conducting offensive action to destroy
an enemy penetration with all or part of the force. In an area
defense, the brigade may be deployed in forward positions or as
the reserve. See figure 26.

132 AGO 8826B

 142. Defensive Echelons
For any form or combination of forms of defense employed in
discharge of a mission, the defense is developed in three echelons:
security area; forward defense area; and reserve area. Each level

GOPL 4 GOPL

COPL X + X I X COPL
/3-CA 3
X3D CAV X

FEBA i FEB

-- S1 , "--'
I -
/ /-LI·,
K .-J"L. \ I 'L'L'.A \I I , .. L.q
-. j

NOTE: NOT TO SCALE.

NOTE: THIS FIGURE ILLUSTRATES THE EMPLOYMENT OF A BRIGADE IN THE VARIOUS

ROLES WHICH IITIS
FOR WHICH
ROLES FOR ADAPTABLE.
IS ADAPTABLE.

A. THE 2ND BDE IS CONDUCTING AN AREA DEFENSE.

B. THE 3RD BDE IS PREPARED TO WITHDRAW TO BLOCKING POSITION ON
ORDER AS AN ACTION IN SUPPORT OF THE MOBILE DEFENSE BEING
CONDUCTED BY THE DIVISION.

C. THE 4TH BDE COMPOSED OF TWO ARMOR BNS AND TWO MECHANIZED
INFANTRY BATTALIONS CONSTITUTE THE DIVISION RESERVE AND WILL
OCCUPY ASSEMBLY AREAS INDICATED UPON WITHDRAWAL OF THE GOPL.

Figure 26. Roles of the brigade in defense.

-AGO 3S26B 133

of command has its own defensive areas, e.g., the brigade divides
its area of responsibility into a security area, a forward defense
area, and a reserve area (fig. 27), and the division divides its area
of responsibility in the same manner (fig. 28). The elements
within these areas will vary in composition and strength as is
dictated by the mission, enemy capabilities, terrain upon which
the defense is conducted and the strength and capabilities of troops
available. These factors considered, the echelons are employed on
the basis of the effects to be derived from their actions.

GOPL GOPL
GOPI

COPL?> f tCOPL
SECURITY
AREA

.~~ ~ ~ ~~~-
-FORWARD -I"
DEFENSE
AREA

AREA

X 1
COMPANIES OF THE FORWARD BATTALIONS ARE MANNING THE COP.
NOTE: RESERVE

Figure 27. Brigade echelons of defense.

134 AGO 3826B

143. Security Echelon
The -security echelon is employed in the security area of the
brigade This area extends from the forward edge of the battle
area through the area of interest of the brigade. The depth of this
area may be limited by the presence of security elements from
divisions or higher echelon being employed to the front. This limi-
tation considered, the security echelon is employed at sufficient dis-
tance forward of the forward edge of the battle area to permit
early warning of an enemy approach, but close enough to insure
positive contact with the FEBA. As the security echelon, the
brigade employs the combat outpost (COP). When so directed,
the brigade may constitute the division general outpost (GOP)
covering force or corps covering force. When so employed, it
should be organized with mechanized or motorized infantry and
tank units to provide the necessary mobility and fire power re-
quired by this type of mission. In the mobile defense a COP is
not normally employed.
a. The mission of the security echelon is to provide early warn-
ing of an enemy approach and, within its capabilities, delay, dis-
rupt and destroy enemy formations and deny him ground obser-
vation of the main battle position. As additional missions, the
security echelon locates positive and probable targets for the de-
fenders and employs stay-behind forces to direct fires, provide
information and/or disrupt enemy operations.
b. The brigade security echelon may be employed from and
under the control of forces occupying the forward defense area.
When circumstances preclude this arrangement, the brigade se-
curity echelon is provided from the reserve either under control
of the appropriate forward elements or under centralized control
of the brigade.
c. The security echelon is composed of an appropriate balance
of combined arms and supported by fires from attached or sup-
porting delivery means. See FM 7-20.
144. Forward Defense Area
The forward defense area extends from the FEBA to the rear
boundary of the brigade. Forward forces occupy the forward
defense areas along or in proximity to the FEBA. The mission
assigned these forces is based upon the type defense being con-
ducted. They may defend with the mission of denying the enemy
entry to the main battle area or may delay an enemy penetration
into an area of the commanders' choosing pending delivery of
fires and maneuver to destroy the enemy force.
a. At brigade level, the forward defense area is garrisoned by
infantry and tank battalions attached to the brigade. Under cer-
AGO 3326B 135
tain conditions other appropriate forces are employed to garrison
defensive positions within their capabilities.
b. The brigade assigns responsibility for garrisoning forward
positions to elements to conform to their capabilities. Gaps in the
defensive area created by this action, may be covered by surveil-

CORPS
COVERING f
FORCE

DIVISION
GOPL - GENERAL OUTPOST GOPL AREA

BRIGADE BRIGADE
COPL 6-- COMBAT COMBAT
OUTPOST
COPL
OUTPOST

xX X
' " -
FEBA CO0 C 1) 1 CI ~ at C j< FEBA ,

CD
, C- FORWARD
DEFENSE
AREA

REA-
RESERVE

TF j TF jAREA

NOTE: NOT TO SCALE.

Figure 28. Division in the defense depicting division echelons of defense-

Schematic.

136 AGO 8826B

lance directly under control of the brigade or under control of an
adjacent garrisoning element. Battalions position forces in the
forward defense area based on the mission and the relative de-
fensibility of the terrain. See FM 7-20.
145. The Reserve Area
From the brigade level, the reserve area is that portion of the
battle area from the rear of committed forces to the brigade rear
boundary. From division level, the reserve area extends from the
rear boundary of the brigade to the rear boundary of the division.
a. The brigade reserve is located in the brigade reserve area
and is composed of those uncommitted forces retained for employ-
ment at a decisive time and place. Reserve forces are normally
composed of maneuver elements with fire support means available
upon commitment.
b. Reserves are positioned so as to provide easy access to any
part of the battle area. In the area defense they routinely pre-
pare blocking positions to add depth to the battle position.

Section III. DEFENSE PLANNING

146. General
In planning the defense, the brigade commander seeks to cor-
relate the terrain to resources available in relation to discharge
of his mission. The defender has the initial advantage in that he
may place his forces on the terrain in a configuration that will
enhance accomplishment of his mission. The attacker is not nor-
mally afforded an opportunity to reconnoiter the terrain being
defended.
a. The plan of defense includes the scheme of maneuver and the
plan of fire support. These are developed concurrently and inte-
grated to insure maximum utilization of available resources.
b. Defensive planning is continuous. Contingency planning is
conducted with the basic plan, and transition to an alternate plan
is considered in conduct of the defense.
c. Plans must be simple and flexible, and their execution must
be within the capability of forces known to be available at the
time the plan is to be executed.
147. Sequence of Planning
Planning is initiated with the receipt and analysis of the mis-
sion in relation to the concept of operation of the commander
assigning the mission. Directed and deduced tasks are isolated.
Known future operations are considered. Once the commander
has determined what needs to be done, he determines the flexi-
bility that must be inherent to his plan to permit an expeditious
AGO 3326B 137
 transition to planned subsequent operations. The plan must be
sufficiently flexible to permit exploitation of a weakness demon-
strated by enemy forces.
a. An evaluation of the terrain to be defended in conjunction
with forces available forms the basis for organization of the de-
fense. The terrain is viewed from the standpoint of the enemy
and his known capabilities. Avenues of approach into the posi-
tion are determined and analyzed in relation to probable enemy
use. Natural obstacles are identified as to their effectiveness.
Observation, key terrain, fields of fire, and relative defensibility
of areas are evaluated in relation to advantages and disadvantages
imposed. The terrain is tentatively divided by the commander and
the strengths and weaknesses of each portion are examined to
determine the relative tasks imposed on forces that will undertake
its defense. The commander then visualizes the forces essential
to accomplish the mission in relation to the terrain to be defended.
b. Once the terrain is evaluated in relation to forces required
to accomplish the mission, the commander considers his resources.
The defensive capability of forces are associated to portions of
terrain so that weaknesses are reinforced by terrain conditions
and strengths are assessed in relation to less defensible terrain.
Terrain is then allocated to subordinate defending forces in rela-
tion to their capabilities with due consideration for equal defen-
sive tasks.
c. In analyzing the area to be defended, consideration is given
to improving the natural defensive strength of the terrain to the
maximum extent possible, consistent with plans for subsequent
operations. Natural obstacles may be extended or improved with
mines and other artificial obstacles. Natural cover, concealment,
observation, and fields of fire are evaluated with a view towards
their improvement.
d. During analysis of the terrain, consideration is given to
likely target areas for interdiction by fires. These target areas
will normally be defiles on expected routes of movement of an
attacker, assembly areas for massing of attacking elements and
other sensitive locations that a-ppear essential to an attacking
force.
e. Planning should include provisions for employment of ma-
neuver forces forward of the defensive position in a spoiling attack
or to disrupt or destroy operations in the enemy rear areas. In
conduct of the defense, the defender seeks to reduce the effective-
ness of the enemy's strength while making maximum use of his
own combat power.
148. Organization for Combat
a. Forces are formed in appropriate groupments to execute the

138 AGO 8826B

tasks visualized by the commander. Total combat forces available
are applied against the requirement for garrisoning the forward
defensive positions, providing a reserve, establishing security and
discharging other contingency missions, deduced or directed.
Major combat elements are assigned specific missions; other com-
bat and combat support elements are either assigned separate
missions or attached to major elements where an increased capa-
bility is necessary. See paragraphs 65 through 67.
b. In distributing forces to execute the brigade mission, the
commander must give full consideration to flexibility in organi-
zation, contingencies, essential forces to execute contributory mis-
sions, and adequate security. If the defense is to be mobile in
nature or if enemy action in overcoming the defense cannot be
reasonably predicted, priority attention is given the reserve. If
the mission is oriented to retention of terrain, strong elements
are assigned for garrisoning the forward defense areas. If time
for preparation of defensive positions is critical and the security
elements are expected to extend this time, strong security forces
are provided. In providing security forces, the mission and time
available are weighed to determine whether these forces will come
from the forward defense echelon or from the reserve.
c. Combat support elements are allocated to major combat forces
to meet an essential need. All resources are examined in relation
to their priority requirement and the most essential needs are
allocated on this basis.
d. Cross attachment between infantry and tank units is effected
whenever such forces can be effectively employed.
e. Engineers are best utilized under centralized control per-
forming important demolition tasks, including ADM; giving tech-
nical advice and equipment support to the tactical elements of the
brigade; improving roads and trails in the area to improve traffic-
ability; and installing obstacles requiring a specialized skill. If the
defense is based on maneuver rather than retention of terrain,
additional emphasis is placed on engineer tasks which permit ease
of movement in the brigade area. Security forces are provided
engineer support in an attached or supporting role.
f. Elements of the division armored cavalry squadron that are
attached to the brigade may be employed initially in a security role
or as an economy-of-force element in the forward defense echelon.
If employed in a security role to the front, subsequent missions
may include flank or rear area security.
g. Aviation is normally employed under operational control of
the user. Maximum effort is initially provided the security echelon
for observation, reconnaissance, air movement, command and con-
trol and evacuation of wounded. Due priority will be given
AGO 3326B 139
maneuver elements for their initial reconnaissance and subse-
quently, for such other requirements as evolve.
h. An artillery battalion is normally made available to the
brigade in an attached or DS status with additional battalions in a
reinforcing or supporting role. The brigade commander may
allocate priority of fires in his fire support plan. Artillery is not
placed in reserve, but appropriate arrangements are made for
providing fire support to the brigade reserve when it is committed.

149. Control
The brigade commander defines sectors of defensive responsibil-
ity for subordinate elements by designation of lateral and, occa-
sionally, rear boundaries. Lateral boundaries extend forward to
the limit of ground observation and to the rear to provide subordi-
nate units adequate maneuver space for placement of forces. In
the event it is intended that forward elements provide the brigade
security echelon, the lateral boundary is extended forward through
the position where the security echelon is to be located and to the
maximum limits of ground observation. Rear boundaries are used
for control of the area responsibility.
a. Within the limits defined by lateral and rear boundaries the
subordinate commander exercises full responsibility. All opera-
tions not fully coordinated with adjacent units must be conducted
within these limits. In the event it is desired to maneuver or
deliver fire where the effects will extend beyond the boundary,
coordination must be made with the element into whose sector the
effects extend.
b. Coordinating points are placed on boundaries to delineate the
general trace of the forward edge of the battle area and the combat
outpost line. The coordinating points designate that point on the
ground where adjacent commanders are required to coordinate.
Positions in proximity to the coordinating point need not neces-
sarily be occupied, but such coordination as is effected will include
an exchange of information as to the method of discharging re-
sponsibility in that area.
c. When there is a necessity to show the trace of the FEBA on a
map or overlay, it is shown as a line connecting coordinating
points. It represents the general trace of the forward edge of
forward defensive positions. The exact trace of the FEBA is
ultimately determined by the location of the personnel and
weapons positions of the forward rifle companies. Desirably, the
FEBA should provide good fields of fire!, concealment and cover,
observation, natural obstacles parallel to it, and no significant
salients or re-entrants.
d. The brigade commander may designate sectors of responsibil-

140 AGO 3826B

ity for the reserve by the use of boundaries. More frequently, he
prescribes assembly areas for the reserve or elements thereof. In
the area defense he designates graphically such blocking positions
as the reserve will prepare and assigns responsibility for occupa-
tion, on order, of this position.
150. Combat Support
Combat support of the brigade is provided by those organic and
attached or supporting elements made available routinely or for a
specific operation. The capabilities of these elements are con-
sidered in the basic planning and may be allocated to subordinate
tnits. Other combat support is available on request through ap-
propriate channels and is allocated by division or other controlling
command on a priority basis. Combat support organic to the
brigade includes the aviation platoon, command vehicle section and
the communication platoon. These elements must be supplemented
as required.
a. Fire Support. Fire support is provided the brigade by its
organic, attached, or supporting elements, or it is requested on
a specific mission basis. Fire support planning is conducted con-
currently with the development of the scheme of maneuver for
defense and continues throughout the operation. This planning
provides for long range fires delivered on attacking forces as soon
as they come within range, fires in support of the security echelon,
fires to disrupt enemy formations engaged in attacking the defen-
sive position and fires within the battle area. Fire support plans,
when formalized, become a part of the commander's defensive
order.
(1) Fire delivery means supporting the brigade defense are
positioned so that fires may be delivered to any part of
the sector. Special attention is given to the most likely
avenues of enemy approach into the position to insure
that maximum fires may be massed along these ap-
proaches. Under certain situations fire delivery means
must plan to occupy supplementary positions so as to
provide fire support throughout the defensive area. Plans
will include provision for occupation of alternate firing
positions by all fire delivery elements.
(2) The brigade fire support plan includes plans for all fires
of subordinate, attached and supporting elements. Fire
support plans of maneuver battalions attached to the
brigade will be integrated therein. Fires will be coordi-
nated with elements on the flanks and the plan will in-
clude provisions for coordination of fires of subordinate
elements.
AGO 3826B 141
 (3) While the brigade commander does not ordinarily direct
employment of fire delivery means organic to subordi-
nate elements, he has the prerogative of doing so. He
may direct that such elements deliver fires on specific
areas to support the defensive plan.
(4) Fire support planning will include the number and yields
of nuclear weapons intended :for use in selected areas
forward of the FEBA and on targets of opportunity, and
those to be retained in reserve to support counterattacks.
Specific attention will be given to planning nuclear fires
inasmuch as delivery means may or may not be under
control of brigade.
(5) Consideration will be given to fires deliverable by ex-
ternal agencies for special purposes. Under certain cir-
cumstances the brigade commander will request such
support in conjunction with developing his defense. As
an example, armed helicopters may deliver fire support in
areas not accessible to other fires. Close air support may
be desirable when targets are beyond the range or capa-
bilities of other fire support means, and navel gunfire, if
available, can furnish a considerable volume of fires in
certain areas.
(6) Biological and persistent toxic chemical agents are
particularly suitable means of fire support in defensive
operations.
b. Engineer Support. An engineer combat company is nor-
mally placed in direct support of the brigade for defensive opera-
tions. In addition, other engineer elements will normally be em-
ployed in the brigade area to support the brigade and perform
engineer tasks for the division. Supporting engineers will usually
be employed to assist in organizing the position and generally
increase the defensive capability of the brigade. See paragraph
148e.
c. Communication Support. To control the defense, the com-
mander must plan and insure adequate communication with higher,
lower, adjacent, attached and supporting units. All means, in-
cluding radio, wire, messenger, visual and sound, are used to the
extent practicable.
(1) In the area defense wire is a principal means of communi-
cation. When adequate wire communication is available,
radio is not used; however, radio nets remain open since
wire communication may be interrupted or may be in-
adequate for the situation. Use of radio is normally
restricted except during periods of enemy contact. Pyro-
technics and other visual signals may be used in the

142 AGO 3326B

 defense for identification of friendly units, to call for
lifting and shifting supporting fire and in the execution
of counterattack plans.
(2) Contingent upon the time factor, wire communication
may be provided the brigade COP. In the event it is,
plans must include provisions for a positive breach in
this system upon withdrawal of the COP.
(3) In a mobile defensive situation, primary reliance is placed
on radio communication.
(4) For detailed consideration of communication during de-
fense, see appendix II.
d. Limited Support. Limited Army aviation support is afforded
the brigade by the organic aviation platoon and other aircraft are
requested from outside sources. Aircraft under control or in sup-
port of the brigade normally operate under direct staff supervision
of the brigade aviation officer.
(1) In defensive operations, Army aircraft are initially em-
ployed for reconnaissance, limited aerial photography
and movement of reconnaissance parties. Subsequently
they are employed for command and control, observation,
surveillance, aeromedical evacuation, shifting or position-
ing of reserves, or resupply in support of the brigade
COP.
(2) In conduct of the defense, the aviation platoon may be
assigned specific missions for the brigade and a portion of
their capability is set aside to support subordinate ele-
ments in their conduct of the defense.

151. Administrative Support

Planning for defensive operations includes consideration of
material resources available and the capability for replacement of
material expenditures. Similarly, administrative servicing
agencies must be capable of and sufficiently flexible to sustain the
operation through the anticipated period of defense and subse-
quent operations.
a. The brigade headquarters is limited to coordination, control,
and planning in relation to administrative support. Planning is
based upon positive administrative support that is made available
from division for the defensive operation and such other resources
as are available to attached and supporting troops.
b. The brigade coordinates allocation of materiel on a priority
established by the defensive plan. Items in short supply are sub-
ject to controlled distribution and adjustments are made to insure
that essential requirements are satisfied.
c. In defensive operations, administrative support elements are

AGO 3326B 143

positioned to preclude their interference with maneuver. In highly
fluid operations, administrative support is positioned well to the
rear but those items that are exposed to a rate of expenditure, ex-
ceeding the time and space factors for routine resupply, are placed
in a mobile status for immediate responsiveness to meet require-
ments. The basic consideration in locating the brigade trains is
the support of the combat elements.

152. Counterattack Planning

a. The counterattack is a decisive element of the defense. Plan-
ning is conducted as soon as the general defensive scheme of
maneuver.. is reasonably firm and is continued throughout the
conduct of the defense. Initial planning is directed toward an an-
ticipated penetration along that avenue of approach into the defen-
sive position which the enemy is expected to select as a first
priority and is continued to include all probable avenues of enemy
approach. In a mobile defense, where the defender plans for de-
struction of an enemy penetration, the commander must anticipate
all likely penetrations. In the case of multiple penetrations, the
initial priority for counterattack planning must include destruc-
tion of the penetration that would most endanger the defense.
Normally, the brigade commander designates likely penetrations,
their priority for destruction, and all aspects that he desires inte-
grated into the plan. The commander of the force expected to
conduct the counterattack normally performs the detailed planning
and submits his recommended plan to the brigade commander for
alteration and/or approval.
b. The brigade counterattack plan will include an assumed
penetration, enemy forces expected to be within the penetration
or capable of reinforcing it, the counterattacking force, fire sup-
port, and certain specific control measures that direct and control
the attack (fig. 29).
(1) An organization for combat is normally developed that
relates to the probable task to be accomplished. This will
include appropriate provisions for a blocking force and
its control, provisions for a maneuver force and sub-
ordinate tasks and provisions for fire support either
integrated into the maneuver force or available on a
supporting basis.
(2) When the decision to launch the counterattack is made, a
route of advance is designated to insure appropriate
priority to movement of maneuver, blocking and fire sup-
port forces.
(3) A probable line of departure is designated to insure a
coordinated effort in launching the attack. This line of
144 AGO 8826B
 departure may be in relation to troops containing the
penetration or may be in relation to a specific terrain
feature. Inasmuch as an expected penetration may stall
early or gain unanticipated success, this control measure
may require considerable adjustment. Planning should
therefore include positive provisions for a contingency
control of departure when the attack is launched.

I X

FEBA
FEBA

C-ID

NOTE: NOT TO SCALE.

Figure 29. Essential control elements of a brigade counterattack plan.

AGO 3326B 145

 (4) A specific objective is selected in relation to each pene-
tration. This objective and the maneuver essential to
its attainment should provide for the accomplishment of
the mission of the counterattacking force.
(5) The plan may include a direction of attack, or less fre-
quently, boundaries or an axis of advance, or it may in-
clude all or a combination thereof. Whatever control
measures used should provide for essential controls and
take into consideration those forces that may be contain-
ing the penetration.
(6) A detailed fire support plan is included as part of each
counterattack plan. It must be flexible, coordinated and
provide for an appropriate adjustment of priorities of
fire with minor effects on other forces.
(7) Counterattack plans must be sufficiently flexible to pro-
vide for the following: alteration of the reserve struc-
ture at any time; enemy action, such as a vertical envelop-
ment and infiltration; loss of expected fire support; the
possibility that the counterattack will not be successful.
(8) Thorough reconnaissance by commanders expected to
conduct the counterattack is essential and should extend
to include all key personnel. If time and circumstances
permit, counterattack plans should be rehearsed.

Section IV. CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE

153. General
The brigade defends terrain, delays or withdraws, or initiates
offensive maneuver to destroy an enemy force or to restore the
situation. It may be required to establish a division security
echelon.
a. Active conduct of the defense is initiated when security ele-
ments from a higher echelon pass through the brigade COP, or
forward positions of a COP is not employed. At that time, the COP
initiates those actions previously planned but which they have
been prevented from executing while other security forces were
to their front. The tempo of aerial and ground reconnaissance is
increased and fire support registration is completed.
b. When approaching enemy forces are located, they are kept
under constant surveillance and if they present a lucrative target,
they are brought under long range fire. In the case of small enemy
reconnaissance elements, the commander of the COP may direct
that they be taken under ground attack by his reconnaissance
forces.

146 AGO 3826B

 (1) Reconnaissance elements forward of the COP maintain
contact with the enemy and assist in the rearward pas-
sage of the GOP forces as they withdraw. They harass
the enemy, delay him, and attempt to force him to deploy.
They report all information about the enemy to the forces
on the COP.
(2) When the enemy approaches the COPL, he is kept under
continuous surveillance and a constant volume of heavy
fires. All resources are employed to force his massing to
present targets for nuclear and/or nonnuclear fires. Fires
are delivered and defensive action conducted in such a
way as to cause the enemy to believe the COPL is the
forward defense area.
(3) The COP maintains its positions as long as possible with-
out becoming closely engaged with the enemy. If the
COP is expected to delay, the operation is conducted as a
normal delaying action as described in chapter 8. If the
mission is limited to early warning, action on the COP is
reserved to that action. The commander of the COP or
commanders of elements controlling the COP keeps his
higher commander continuously advised of the situation
and orders the withdrawal of the COP at a prescribed
time, or when specified conditions prevail.
c. When the COP is withdrawn, forces occupying positions on
the FEBA prepare to repel the attacker. Lanes through barriers
and obstacles for passage of security forces are closed, final regis-
tration of weapons is completed, local security is made aware of
the situation, and surveillance means are employed to maintain
a constant fix on the attacker. In the event enemy forces withdraw,
reconnaissance is employed forward of the FEBA to locate and
determine the enemy situations and, if appropriate, the COP may
again be established. In the event the attacker cannot be located
within the brigade area of responsibility, the brigade commander
should be prepared to make appropriate recommendations for a
reconnaissance in force beyond his area of responsibility to locate
enemy forces. He does not initiate such action without approval
of higher headquarters.
(1) As the enemy approaches the FEBA he is brought under
an ever increasing volume of fire. As he continues for-
ward movement, he is repelled by a combination of fires
and close combat. If he enters the forward defense area,
he is ejected by fires and/or counterattack. Minor pene-
trations are isolated and destroyed and enemy elements
capable of reinforcing a penetration are kept continu-
ously exposed to all available fires.

AGO 3S26B 147

 (2) If the brigade or a portion thereof is expected to delay or
withdraw to subsequent positions in the mobile defense,
the operation is executed at a predesignated time, when
the enemy reaches a certain point or when ordered to do
so due to enemy action in another area. The delay or with-
drawal is executed in a manner to cause the attacker to
mass and present a remunerative target for the de-
fender's fires. In these situations the defender must in-
sure that maximum destruction is inflicted upon the
enemy. If the enemy fails to follow up a withdrawal and
the mission is not affected by, the action, it may be
desirable for the forward forces to initiate reestablish-
ment of his forward position.
(3) If the defender is participating in an area defense, for-
ward positions are only vacated on approval of higher
headquarters. Under all conditions, commanders, partici-
pating in an area defense, routinely prepare plans for a
withdrawal in the event they are ordered to do so. If the
defender is expected to retain his position, he does so with
all methods and means available. If his position is pene-
trated, he causes fires to be delivered into the penetrated
area and causes the employment of reserves at successive
echelons to destroy the penetrating force if such action
appears feasible. In the event the defender considers a
counterattack to be infeasible he employs his forces in a
blocking role and advises higher headquarters of his
situation.
(4) In the event the brigade position is penetrated, the brig-
ade commander insures that positive controls are estab-
lished for those forces within and around the penetrated
area. In the event a major force on the FEBA is divided
and the parent unit cannot establish efficient control, the
fragmented portion or portions are frequently attached to
adjacent units. Forces remaining within the penetrated
area are normally attached to the counterattacking force
at the time the counterattack is launched. Blocking forces
on the periphery of the penetration are either controlled
directly by the brigade commander or placed under the
control of a subordinate commander. At brigade level,
blocking forces are only placed under control of the
counterattacking force commander under unusual cir-
cumstances. Preferably, blocking forces are retained
directly under control of the brigade to insure maximum
coordination when the counterattack is launched.
d. In the defense, the decision to counterattack and the timing

148 AGO 3326B

thereof are based upon the commander's professional judgment or,
on occasion, on orders from higher headquarters. When a pene-
tration appears imminent or has actually started, the brigade com-
mander advises higher command, alerts the counterattacking
force, increases surveillance over the threatened area, and provides
all available assistance to the subordinate commanders concerned.
(1) In the mobile defense, it is desirable to stop or slow the
penetration; however, these conditions are not essential
prerequisites. The counterattack should be launched
prior to the time that the attacking enemy can consolidate
his gains and reorganize or regroup his forces.
(2) In the area defense, the brigade commander counter-
attacks when the enemy has seized or threatens to seize
terrain critical to the defense.
(3) The attack may be launched when the enemy presents his
flanks or rear, when he becomes overextended or when
his momentum is dissipated.
e. When a preponderance of evidence indicates that a counter-
attack would fail, the brigade commander so advises higher com-
mand and blocks pending subsequent instructions from higher
headquarters.
f. In the event the FEBA has been penetrated at multiple loca-
tions the brigade commander selects those penetrations, the exten-
sion of which would jeopardize his mission, and establishes prior-
ities for their reduction. He does not fragment his reserve for re-
duction of all penetrations concurrently.
g. Immediately after commitment of the reserve the brigade
commander must immediately reconstitute another reserve from
all resources available to him. He will frequently impose condi-
tions on the commitment of reserves under the control of sub-
ordinate elements whose positions are intact.
h. Once the decision is made to counterattack, all resources are
employed to insure a decisive action. Appropriate control is estab-
lished for all elements in or adjacent to the penetrated area. Prior-
ities are adjusted to insure appropriate distribution of resources
and provisions are made for the original or a replacement force
to reestablish the FEBA in the penetrated area. If the counter-
attack does not attain its objective, all resources are employed to
stablize the situation and higher headquarters is informed.
i. When the counterattacking force has gained its objective,
enemy forces in the penetration are destroyed by either the coun-
terattack or blocking forces. It may be desirable to follow up
enemy forces withdrawing from the penetrated area or to conduct
a spoiling attack on enemy elements forward of the FEBA. In the
event such an operation appears desirable, plans are made to
AGO 3326B 149
execute the action, higher headquarters is informed and, if ape
proved, the attack is launched.
j. Throughout the conduct of the defense, the commander con-
siders conducting a spoiling attack. A spoiling attack is an offen-
sive operation launched against forces outside of the defended
area. Its purpose may be to destroy a portion of the enemy force,
to throw the enemy off balance, or to deny the enemy ground
observation and surveillance of the defended area. The successful
execution of a spoiling attack requires a high degree of mobility
and firepower.
154. Brigade Conducting a Mobile Defense
If a brigade is provided adequate forces and support in relation
to its defensive mission and the terrain, it is capable of conducting
a mobile defense on a limited scale. Forces available should include
armor and a mobility differential over the enemy. In conduct of
this defense the scheme of maneuver adopted is similar to that of a
division conducting a mobile defense on a reduced scale. (See
chapter 6, FM 61-100 and fig. 30.) Defensive measures are essen-
tially the same for any defensive operation; however, in the mobile
defense primary emphasis is placed on destroying enemy forces.
a. Planning a mobile defense requires holding certain terrain,
provisions for blocking a penetration and employing the reserve
in a counterattack.
b. The scheme of maneuver for a, brigade in mobile defense pro-
vides for minimum forces manning the forward position, the pre-
ponderance of forces retained in aEreserve or striking force and
adequate provisions for retention of that terrain that must be
denied to the enemy. Forces manning the portion of the area
where an enemy penetration is likely, should be as mobile as re-
sources will permit; and those elements expected to retain forward
positions, when the penetration occurs, should be provided ade-
quate resources for execution of their mission. Care should be
exercised to insure that forward forces are not neglected in favor
of a large reserve.
c. Fire support planning should include provisions for continu-
ous fires for forward forces and the flexibility necessary to shift
fires into the penetrated area to support blocking forces and the
counterattack when launched.
d. Conduct of the mobile defense is characterized by aggressive
action, rapid movement, frequent shifting of fires and their re-
sources to meet an enemy threat, and a high degree of responsive-
ness by all elements involved.
155. Defense of a Riverline
a. Fundamental considerations that apply in all other defensive

150 AGO 3326B

operations are appropriate to the defense of a riverline with special
emphasis given to the nature of the river being defended, terrain
contiguous to the river and capabilities of the enemy to cross the
river.
b. A riverline may be defended in two ways. In one method the
bulk of the defending force is positioned on or near the river's edge
with the intention of denying crossing to the enemy. In the other
method, minimum forces are positioned on or near the river's edge
with a large mobile reserve retained for counterattacks. The in-
tent of this method is to make crossing difficult, but if and when a
buildup on the near shore is started, to initiate the counterattack

COPLt COPL

x x

FEBA C)IC)2F

I I

NOTE: (1) BATTALIONS ON BOTH FLANKS TO CONDUCT AN AREA

DEFENSE.

(2) BATTALION IN CENTER TO CONDUCT DELAY, ON ORDER,

TO BLOCKING POSITION IN CENTER.

Figure 30. Brigade in mobile defense-schematic.

AGO 3326B 151

to destroy both the lodgement forces and those crossing the river.
Factors that dictate the manner of employment of defending forces
are-
(1) Width of the defensive sector assigned.
(2) Relative observation afforded by the far and near shore.
(3) The economy of force in employment of troops along the
shore of a river that creates a series of salients and re-
entrants.
(4) Defensibility of terrain on the near shore.
(5) Mobility of defending forces in relation to trafficability of
the area being defended.
(6) Presence of obstacles to maneuver in the area being de-
fended.
(7) Capabilities of the enemy force to cross the river.
(8) Nature of the river as an obstacle in relation to the
attacker's capability to cross the river.
(9) Capability of the enemy to attack by a vertical envelop-
ment.
c. Fire support is planned to cover all probable assembly areas
and approaches to the river on the far shore and provide close
defensive fires at all crossing and landing sites.

Section V. OTHER DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

156. General
In addition to the threat of an attacker attempting to overcome
defending forces on the FEBA and penetrations into the areas of
adjacent forces that threaten the brigade position, the commander
must be continuously alert to the probability of an armor penetra-
tion, air delivered forces, guerrilla elements in the rear areas, and
infiltration through gaps in the defensive positions. In many cases
these operations may be minor in nature but may be, and fre-
quently are, geared to disrupt operations in the rear area during a
critical period. Initial planning should include provisions for early
detection of these threats and their destruction when they ma-
terialize. Highly mobile forces with a self-sustaining combat capa-
bility are particularly effective for this type defense.
a. Initial planning should include provisions for establishment
of an observation and patrol capability in rear areas. The re-
sponsibility for establishment of this system may be given to the
reserve commander along with adequate authority to call upon
forces, both administrative and tactical, to assist in implementing
his plan. Initial provisions should include local security for all
elements in the rear area, an effective communication system,

152 AGO 3326B

armed convoy escorts, a barrier plan, and the establishment of
observation posts. All organic, attached, supporting, and other
units in the area, are integrated into the planning.
b. Observation posts are established throughout the brigade
area of responsibility. Establishment of the system should be in
conjunction with similar plans of adjacent elements and the divi-
sion system to the rear. These facilities should have communica-
tion links to similar elements and the control headquarters. Aerial
surveillance and observation should be employed whenever feas-
ible.
c. Reconnaissance patrols are employed into those areas that
cannot be effectively screened by observation and during periods
of reduced visibility. Once a threat is located, it is reported, main-
tained under surveillance and its actions continuously referred to
the controlling headquarters. Under no circumstances should an
area be neglected merely because of its isolation or considered
impassibility. Consideration should be given to aerial mounted
patrols.
d. A mobile force to destroy or contain an enemy threat in the
rear area is frequently made available from the brigade reserve.
It should include resources to independently sustain itself for the
period of time that will permit reinforcement. Desirably it should
contain armor and mechanized infantry. Airmobile forces provide
an instantly responsive combat force and should be employed in
conjunction with ground mobile elements.

157. Defense Against Armor

Enemy armor that has penetrated into rear areas is best de-
feated by isolation from infantry, denial of fuel resupply, maxi-
mum use of natural and artificial obstacles, antitank defense in
depth and proper employment of antitank weapons by units
occupying positions in rear areas.
a. Armor is extremely sensitive to terrain and when engaged
in an assault or under fire is normally "buttoned up" and observa-
tion is limited. Initial effort in defense against armor should pro-
vide for destruction of accompanying infantry.
b. Local security of elements in rear areas should provide for
antitank mines and obstacles covered by fire with antitank
weapons integrated to cover the best approaches into the area.
158. Defense Against Airborne Attack
Airborne forces are extremely vulnerable to mechanized attack.
It is particularly important that an airborne force be destroyed
prior to reinforcement that will probably include heavier weapons.
a. Observation posts and patrols should be alert to aerial move-
AGO 3326B 153
ment or forces being parachute delivered into rear areas. Im-
mediate report of such occurrences should be referred to the
reserve commander to permit early dispatch of a mobile force for
destruction of the enemy airborne elements.
b. At such time as the enemy airborne operational area is
located, it is taken under fire, by available fire delivery means, to
effect maximum disruption of the operation, inflict casualties and
prevent reorganization. If the enemy force is of sufficient size,
consideration should be given to employment of a nuclear weapon
in the area.
c. As early as is practicable a mechanized force should be dis-
patched to destroy the enemy airborne elements. If the mechanized
element can initiate an attack prior to the enemy's reorganization
and preparation for defense, the problem of destruction is mini-
mized.

159. Defense Against Guerrilla Attack

Unless they possess a local preponderance of strength or are
capable of achieving surprise, guerrilla forces are unlikely to at-
tack an organized military force. To a large measure, guerrilla
forces supply themselves through capture of military supplies and
use of pillaged supplies and equipment.
a. To preclude the probability of guerrilla interference with
brigade rear area operations, the area may be cleared of all civilian
elements and road blocks should be established to prevent reentry.
Civilian supplies should be placed under guard or evacuated with
the idigenous personnel.
b. In areas where a guerrilla threat exists, effective local secur-
ity for all installations is essential. Small installations should be
grouped to insure adequate strength for defense against an attack
until such time as reinforcing elements can arrive.
c. Air observation should be established as a means of detecting
infiltration. The extent and techniques used will vary; however, in
some instances continued air surveillance will be necessary.
d. Supplies must be closely guarded and, if it is necessary to
abandon them, they should be rendered unusable. Single supply
vehicles or small convoys should not be permitted and all convoys
should be heavily armed and escorted. See FM's 31-15, 31-20, and
31-21.
160. Defense Against Infiltration Forces
Infiltration becomes a particular problem when forward forces
adopt a dispersed formation. To prevent large scale infiltration,
gaps between positions should be covered by surveillance, patrols,
fires, positioning or reserve elements and antipersonnel obstacles.
An effective control of gaps between positions will prevent infiltra-

154 AGO 3326B

tion of large forces. In the event infiltration on a large scale can-
not otherwise be prevented, mobile forces should be organized to
cope with the problem. Small scale infiltration may be offset by
defensive measures similar to those prescribed for defense against
guerrilla forces.

Section VI. BRIGADE AS A SECURITY FORCE

161. General
The brigade may be used as the division security echelon (GOP)
or a division or corps covering force. Depending upon the mis-
sion assigned, in these cases, organization of the position is similar
to that of the delay. Normally a security force is not expected to
retain terrain but may be required to do so under conditions
wherein time is required for the main force to prepare for an
operation.
a. The execution of security mission is similar to that of a
delaying action in that the commander is expected to trade space
for time. His planning includes appropriate considerations for a
delaying action as outlined in chapter 8.
b. Inasmuch as the security force commander is normally faced
with an economic employment of his elements, certain undesirable
approaches may be lightly manned in favor of the better enemy ap-
proaches. Maximum consideration must be given to the extension
of natural obstacles. Rather than covering obstacles by fire, it may
be desirable to secure them by patrols which can be reinforced by
mobile forces. In placing obstacles, due consideration must be
given to subsequent operations of the main force and the probabil-
ity that the security force may be required to withdraw without
reduction of these hazards.
c. If the brigade is expected to delay, each position to be occu-
pied must be planned in relation to the length of time it is expected
to be occupied. A thorough reconnaissance of routes and positions
to the rear is desirable.
d. Proper conduct of a security mission requires highly effective
communication means. Because of the large area normally assigned
a security force, its elements will frequently occupy isolated areas,
move along routes that are not laterally accessible and operate
under semi-independent conditions. A high degree of coordination
is essential to insure effective discharge of the mission. Since
security operations are conducted by mobile forces over extended
frontages, communication will be primarily by radio.
e. Because of their relative nonsensitivity to terrain, range and
speed, due consideration should be given to use of a helicopterborne-
force supported by airborne fire delivery means to conduct a secur-
AGO 3326B 155
ity mission. If adequate aircraft are not available to lift the entire
force, at least a portion should be made airmobile in available air-
craft.
f. Forces to the immediate rear of a brigade security echelon
should establish liaison with the brigade and provide a reasonable
degree of security of the area over which the brigade is expected to
withdraw. Liaison must include provisions for support of the
brigade when it comes within the area of influence of elements to
its rear and coordination to insure a passage of lines when the
brigade withdraws.
162. Composition of the Brigade as a Security Force
The brigade commander is allocated appropriate forces to exe-
cute his security mission. Desirably, these forces should be at least
as mobile as the enemy they are expected to oppose. Mechanized
infantry and tank battalions, self-propelled artillery and elements
of the armored cavalry squadron are highly effective in executing
this type mission.
a. Because of the nature of a security mission, the proportion of
reconnaissance elements to other forces is increased. In the event
constituted reconnaissance units are not provided, the force com-
mander should form them from resources available. Airmobile
forces are suitable for this purpose; however, if aircraft are not
available in appropriate quantities, highly mobile ground forces
of combined arms teams are employed.
b. Security elements normally operate in a semi-independent
role at a considerable distance from the main force. For this
reason, attachment of combat support units is preferred over a
supporting relationship. The brigade commander will normally
further attach his resources to form combined arms teams capable
of operating along selected avenues of approach into his area of
operation.
c. The brigade commander conducting a security mission will
normally establish and organize his operation in a manner similar
to a defense. His security echelon is normally constituted of recon-
naissance elements, forward forces man the line of designated
security positions, and an appropriate reserve is retained consis-
tent with the nature of his mission.
163. Execution of a Brigade Security Mission
Essential to effective discharge of a security mission is gaining
and maintaining contact with enemy forces to the front, a flexible
plan of operation, and immediately responsive forces.
a. Concurrent with establishing the security position, self-sus-
taining reconnaissance elements are employed forward along all

156 AGO 8326B

appropriate avenues of approach to gain and maintain contact
with enemy forces to the front. This action must be coordinated
with similar actions that may be underway in adjacent areas. The
depth and range of this reconnaissance is contingent upon the
presence of other friendly forces to the front, the capabilities of
the reconnaissance forces in relation to the enemy, and guidance or
directives from higher headquarters. Once contact with enemy
elements is gained, fire delivery resources are employed to inflict
maximum destruction in coordination with ground action by the
reconnaissance elements. This operation is continued until the
reconnaissance forces are forced by enemy pressure to withdraw
through the security position.
b. When the main security position is approached by the at-
tacker the volume of fire is increased. If the mission provides for
retention of the position and the enemy pushes the attack, he is
repelled and any penetration effected is reduced by counterattack
or fires. If the brigade is not expected to retain the position, the
enemy is forced to mass as a target for destruction by fires and the
position is abandoned prior to a close engagement developing. This
action must carefully be coordinated to insure that flanks of
adjacent forces are not exposed and the estimate of. the enemy
situation must be accurate to avoid withdrawal before an inferior
force. In the event elements on the security position become
heavily engaged, they are extricated by fires or limited objective
counterattacks by the reserve.
c. The brigade routinely constitutes a reserve and employs it in
a manner generally similar to that of a regular defensive opera-
tion. Frequently, reconnaissance elements employed forward of
the security position are employed as the reserve upon their with-
drawal. In cases where the brigade is expected to delay during its
withdrawal, the reconnaissance elements will be unable to develop
positions to be subsequently occupied and a reserve must be formed
from other forces.
(1) The reserve is employed in a manner consistent with the
mission. It may counterattack to reduce a penetration
into the security position, block a gap, execute a spoiling
attack forward of the security position, counterattack to
extricate a heavily engaged force or to provide cover for
a withdrawal.
(2) In cases where the width of the sector allows, it may be
desirable to divide the reserve into two or more elements
and employ it laterally. In areas where lateral maneuver
is not practicable, segments of the reserve may be em-
ployed beyond the obstacles to movement, or forces
AGO 3326B 157
 operating on isolated axes may find it necessary to con-
stitute their own reserve.
(3) When the brigade is expected to delay and forces occupy-
ing the main security positions withdraw, reconnaissance
elements are placed forward to maintain contact with
attacking enemy forces during the withdrawal. This con-
tact is maintained until the reconnaissance element with-
draws through the new position.
164. Special Considerations
The nature of the type operation being conducted and the area of
operations dictate the manner in which the mission is discharged.
An expedient method that will enhance execution of the mission
should be adopted immediately. Certain special considerations are
appropriate.
a. If an attacking enemy forces security elements to abandon
their delaying position and fails to follow up the attack, recon-
naissance elements move forward to maintain contact with the
enemy. If feasible, positions abandoned may be reoccupied, forc-
ing the enemy to again mass to overcome these positions. Such
actions must be within the authority of the commander conducting
or approving the operation.
b. Unless so ordered, positions will not be abandoned until the
enemy clearly demonstrates strength capable of overcoming the
garrisoning element.
c. Covering or GOP forces are ideally suited for the employment
of stay-behind forces. Placement of these forces in conjunction
with a security mission precludes a requirement for penetration of
the enemy areas at a later time and reduces casualties resulting
from these actions.

Section VII. BRIGADE IN RESERVE

165. General
A brigade is normally the reserve of a division or larger force.
Under certain circumstances, maneuver elements that will be avail-
able to the brigade for a counterattack may be employed on a
mission directly under control of division with arrangements for
their immediate availability to and constant liaison with the
brigade commander. Airmobile employment may provide the
response needed. Limited aircraft available to the reserve may
prevent large scale airmobile employment.
a. The reserve brigade is routinely assigned the mission for
preparation and execution of counterattack plans. Counterattack
planning is conducted concurrently with development of the de-

158 AGO 3326B

fense plan and is continued throughout the defensive operation.
Adjustment in the defensive situation will frequently require a
change in the counterattack plans. Once plans are prepared and
approved, subordinate commanders are briefed and required to
rehearse their plans with their immediate subordinates.
b. The development of blocking positions and the general pro-
vision for depth to the battle area is normally assigned to the
reserve in the area defense. These positions are prepared in ac-
cordance with the division plan of defense, but not necessarily
limited thereto. In development of depth to the division battle posi-
tion the reserve brigade commander should make appropriate
recommendations for adjustments or additional positions.
c. The reserve brigade or a portion thereof normally mans the
division GOP. If the brigade is assigned this mission and is also
required to construct blocking positions, portions of the reserve
brigade may be allocated for each task.
d. Rear area security missions may be assigned the reserve
brigade in conjunction with rear area security activities of the
division support command commander. The reserve brigade com-
mander must prepare plans for employment of a portion of his
forces to destroy enemy elements in the rear area or relieve a rear
area element under attack.
e. The commander of the reserve brigade may be called upon to
conduct reconnaissance in force forward of the battle area.
f. The commander of the reserve brigade or a portion thereof
may be directed to relieve a brigade occupying a forward defen-
sive position or to replace an element that has been destroyed. The
reserve brigade commander and staff will remain continuously
abreast of the situation to permit expeditious action in these cases.
166. Contingency Planning
Commanders must give due attention to the possibility of a
failure on the part of defending forces or unexpected combat
power on the part of the enemy. Plans must be sufficiently flexible
to insure timely reaction to offset the unexpected and preserve his
force in the event the commander is unable to offset a threat to
accomplishment of the mission. Until authorized to do so, a defen-
sive position may not be abandoned. Contingency planning must
include consideration for these factors and include sufficient flexi-
bility to successfully encounter unexpected situations.

AGO 3826B 159

 CHAPTER 8
RETROGRADE

Section I. GENERAL
167. Introduction
A retrograde operation is any movement to the rear or away from the
enemy. It may be forced by enemy action or executed voluntarily as part
of an overall scheme of maneuver. It should be planned in advance.
Retrograde operations are characterized by centralized planning and de-
centralized execution. A retrograde operation because of its effect on
morale requires positive and effective leadership and places a premium on
initiative in smaller unit and task-force leade:rs.
a. The philosophy of all retrograde operations is to inflict as much
damage on enemy forces as the situation pernmits. Therefore, retrograde
operations are conducted as a series of defensive, offensive, and delaying
actions. Every occasion offered to inflict damage on enemy forces is
exploited to the maximum. When he masses, he is attacked by fires.
Enemy forces that advance too quickly and extend themselves are
attacked and destroyed by maneuver elements.
b. Retrograde actions are operations of movement. Withdrawing
forces must therefore possess mobility superior to or at least equal to that
of the enemy. If mobility resources are not adequate for the entire force,
the portion having mobility superior or equal to that of the enemy is used
to hold and harass the enemy.
168. Type Retrograde Operations
A retrograde operation is categorized as a retirement, withdrawal, or
delaying action. In a brigade operation, all three categories may be
employed simultaneously by different; elements with frequent changes to
meet the situation. Under all circumstances and categories of operations,
the movement is conducted in a deployed formation with all units pre-
pared to resist the enemy at all times. See chapter 7, FM 61-100 for
further details on retrograde operations.
169. Characteristics of Retrograde Operations
Retrograde operations are actions involving movement; therefore con-
siderable attention, during the planning phase, is given to terrain and
weather as it will affect the tactical plan and movement. Obstacles,
trafficable areas, long range observation, road networks and vegetation
are all evaluated in their relation to the operation.
a. Good approaches are denied the enemy or destroyed as the with-
drawing forces pass over them. Defiles are blocked and natural obstacles
are reinforced with artificial obstacles. Mined areas are contaminated

160 AGO 3326B

when appropriate; and if time permits, antipersonnel mines are employed
to delay and complicate clearance.
b. Good road nets are exploited for movement of the withdrawing
forces. Lateral roads are used for movement of reinforcing elements or to
strike enemy follow up forces in the flank. Once the withdrawing force
no longer requires use of lateral routes, they may be rendered impassable.
c. High ground astride avenues of approach is evaluated in respect to
its use as delaying positions. Defiles through rough terrain and untraffic-
able wooded areas are considered for ambush sites. Bridges are prepared
for destruction. All terrain appropriate for offensive maneuver is
reconnoitered as sites for possible offensive action against enemy ad-
vancing formations.

170. Control Measures

Basic control measures for a retrograde operation may include: bound-
aries, routes of movement, phase lines, checkpoints, traffic control posts, a
series of delaying positions.
a. A retirement does not visualize organized enemy opposition during
its conduct. Control measures are normally limited to routes of move-
ment, phase lines and traffic control posts.
b. A delaying action will include designated delaying positions, zones
of action, and routes of movement if road arteries are limited and priority
for their use is required. The division may confine control measures to
zones of action and phase lines with provisions for retention of positions
for a specified period of time or until certain situations occur. Under
these circumstances the brigade may subdivide the zone of action for
control of attached maneuver units and establish delay positions or phase
lines.
c. Control measures prescribed for a withdrawal are based on the
situations under which the withdrawal is expected to occur. When the
withdrawal is conducted during periods of reduced visibility with a proba-
bility of enemy pressure, highly restrictive control measures are essential.
If conducted during daylight under enemy pressure, control measures are
generally limited to those prescribed for a delaying action.
d. Designation of control measures must include the consideration that
unnecessary restrictions preclude initiative, flexibility and improvisation
on the part of subordinates. Control measures prescribed should be
limited to those essential to security, direct phasing of the operation and
maintenance of integrity of the command.
171. Planning
Planning of a retrograde operation is as detailed as time available and
resources will permit. In the development or refinement of plans for a
retrograde operation, the essential elements must include provision for:
positive and effective coordination; complete control of routes of move-
AGO 3326B 161
ment; control of civilian personnel to the rear; responsiveness of all
resources; and means to insure flexibility in the operation.
a. The nature of a retrograde operation places primary reliance on
radio communication. The use of wire should be planned to compensate
for possible enemy electronic countermeasures and wire systems may be
developed during the planning stage. As a minimum, wire systems
planned should include trunks along routes of movement of major sub-
ordinate command and control elements and integrated systems on all
delaying and covering positions. To provide for the loss of contact and
insure unity of effort in this situation, the plan of operation should be
made known to the lowest subordinate leaders, consistent with security.
Concurrent with planning, liaison should be established with adjacent
elements to insure mutual support, flank security and to provide for unity
of effort. In the event adjacent units do not employ forces in a manner
so as to prevent envelopment of withdrawing forces, reserves are set
aside for this purpose.
b. Control of routes of movement is normally exercised by division or
higher level. Frequently, however, military police personnel are made
available to the brigade for this purpose. Under this condition the
brigade must establish a route control[ system. Positive measures should
be taken to insure that all elements in the zone of movement respond to
route control measures.
c. Early liaison should be established with the division civil affairs
officer and the provost marshal to insure that plans for evacuation and
control of civilian personnel meet the needs of the brigade plan.
d. To insure responsiveness to provision of the plan by all elements,
appropriate arrangements are made for reconnaissance by representation
from subordinate units. Elements that are expected to perform support-
ing tasks in the operation are made as self-sufficient as practicable con-
sistent with the missions to be executed. Plans for providing support
to operational elements of the command are thoroughly integrated into
the overall plan.
e. In development of the plan for the operation, careful consideration
is given to maximum flexibility. Essentially, the mission and contribut-
ing task are fixed. Alternate plans are developed to meet anticipated
changes that may affect the principal plan and all aspects are analyzed to
insure that maximum freedom of action is given subordinate commanders
under contingency situations.
172. Organization for Combat
Organization for combat is effected to insure maximum flexibility and
full utilization of resources consistent with the type operation and the
mission to be executed. In cases where control and security of supporting
elements cannot be effectively established, appropriate fragmentation
and attachment is effected.

162 AGO 3326B

 Section II. WITHDRAWAL

173. General
A withdrawal is an operation wherein a main force disengages from
enemy contact. Contact may be general or confined to certain portions
of the force. Certain elements remain in contact with the enemy to
prevent his unrestricted followup of the main force and to inflict maximum
damage on his formations by fires or appropriate maneuver action. In a
division withdrawal, the brigade may control all or part of the with-
drawing elements or provide a covering force as security to the forces
engaged in the withdrawal. These operations are typed as daylight and
night withdrawals and techniques of execution are based on the type to
be employed.
a. Essentially a night withdrawal is planned and based on secrecy and
deception and a daylight withdrawal envisions the withdrawing unit
fighting its way to the rear by a series of delaying actions. In view of the
losses associated with a daylight withdrawal, it is avoided whenever
possible in favor of a night withdrawal.
b. Normally the time and conditions for a withdrawal are prescribed in
directives from higher command. When the decision for the type with-
drawal rests with the brigade commander, he is guided by weighing losses
expected from a daylight withdrawal against those he will accrue in de-
laying the withdrawal until the hours of darkness. In arriving at such a
decision and in the conduct of a directed daylight withdrawal, maximum
use should be made of smoke and all other resources to create deception.

174. Planning
Planning for a withdrawal involves close attention to detail, thorough
briefing and reconnaissance by all subordinate elements. Consistent with
security requirement, commanders should provide for their subordinate
leaders to reconnoiter the area wherein they are expected to operate.
Elements that are expected to operate on independent missions are per-
mitted to conduct reconnaissance in any case. Planning and directives
for the operation must include the following essential elements. See figure
31.
a. Time and priority of withdrawal of subordinate units.
b. Zones, phase lines, and routes of withdrawal to be employed.
c. Provision for security and covering forces and the locations of each.
d. Provisions to prevent compromise of the intention to withdraw.
e. Organization for combat and time phasing of attachments and sup-
port.
f. Provisions for disposal or destruction of supplies and equipment,
except medical, in a manner and at a time so as not to compromise the
plan of withdrawal.
g. Provisions for administrative support during the operation.
AGO 3326B 163
 h. Provisions for locating, treating and evacuation of all wounded
prior to the withdrawal.
i. Location of position to be occupied subsequent to the withdrawal
and disposition of forces therein.
j. The detailed plan must include provisions for breaking contact in
a daylight withdrawal and action to be initiated in the event the enemy
attacks to follow up a night operation.

FEBA FEBA

BDSERVE

BDE COVERING
POSITION

COPL ~~/ COPL

FEBAQ @ i /Mir
Y FEBA

NOTE: NOT TO SCALE

Figure31. General scheme, brigade withdrawal.

164 AGO 8326B

175. Conduct of a Night Withdrawal
The brigade commander prescribes the strength and disposition of
forces to be left in contact upon withdrawal of the main force. In addition
he designates a brigade level command element to control the operation
and carry on such communication traffic as will approximate normal
operations. Under certain circumstances and in absence of such action
at division level, brigade will establish a covering position utilizing the
brigade reserve. See chapter 7, FM 61-100 and chapter 7, FM 7-20.
a. As soon as a concept of operation is reasonably firm, the commander
issues a warning order with sufficient detail contained therein to permit
reconnaissance and planning by subordinate commanders during daylight
hours.
b. Time of withdrawal is normally specified in the division order. In
cases where it is not, the brigade commander prescribes the time of with-
drawal of subordinate elements. In order to provide the maximum period
of darkness for the entire operation, the operation should commence as
early as darkness permits.
c. In order to insure that the withdrawal is accomplished as expedi-
tiously as practicable, certain elements in the rear area are designated
for daylight infiltration to the rear to prevent road congestion when the
main force withdraws. These elements will include those not immediately
essential to the operation and will frequently include a portion of the
brigade CP. Where necessary, due to limited road networks, fire support
elements in the rear may withdraw ahead of forward elements on the
same road.
d. In a night withdrawal operation when tanks or other heavy equip-
ment are to be moved, provision should be made to preclude noise of their
movement from compromising the operation. The delivery of heavy
volumes of fire at the time of their withdrawal will help screen the move-
ment. In situations where the operation is conducted in terrain restricting
movement during darkness, the equipment may be infiltrated to the rear
preceding the-withdrawal.
e. In designating forces to be left in contact, every effort should be
made to provide mobility superior to that of the enemy.
f. To insure adequate control of the operation and provide for orderly
movement, elements located in the areas of major subordinate units are
attached thereto prior to initiation of the withdrawal.
g. In the absence of such guidance by the commander directing the
operation, the brigade commander provides the commander of the brigade
detachments left in contact the conditions under which he will withdraw.
This action may be initiated on order of the brigade commander or at a
selected time. Withdrawal of detachments left in contact should be
initiated in sufficient time to permit their withdrawal prior to daylight.
h. When division or the controlling headquarters provides a covering
force, the reserve is withdrawn prior to movement of the forward elements.
Under this condition the brigade reserve starts organization and prepara-
AGO 3326B 165
tion of positions to be manned by the brigade after withdrawal. When a
covering force is not provided from the directing headquarters and the
brigade commander considers one necessary, it is constituted from the
brigade reserve and assumes positions securing the main elements. When
the main elements have passed through the covering force it assumes the
mission of and conducts the appropriate actions for a brigade COP.
Normally a portion of the brigade reserve is left in position to represent
the reserve communication systemn, simulate normal activities of a full
brigade reserve and assist withdrawal of the detachments left in contact.
i. At battalion and lower level, assembly areas are frequently desig-
nated to insure control of forces prior to forming a march column. The
assembly area is not normally used. at brigade level.
j. In the event the night withdrawal is discovered, the brigade elements
conduct the action as a daylight withdrawal. Planning should provide
for such a contingency and all subordinate leaders will be made aware of
the alternate plans.

176. Conduct of a Daylight Withdrawal

A daylight withdrawal is based on elements fighting their way to the
rear, utilizing delaying tactics. Terrain permitting, this action is best
accomplished by mechanized and armor elements. In the event a force
conducting a daylight withdrawal contains both infantry and mechanized
infantry, the mechanized elements are employed in the delay action with
the infantry providing covering positions during enemy displacement
forward. A high degree of coordination and skillful employment of
obstacles and terrain is essential under these conditions.
a. Control measures used for a daylight withdrawal are the same as
those of a night withdrawal except that zones of action replace routes of
withdrawal for the movement of tactical elements. Routes of withdrawal
are designated and their use is controlled for movement of roadbound
forces when road networks in one or more zones are limited.
b. In a daylight withdrawal reserves at all echelons are employed so as
to provide cover to forward elements when they withdraw. In addition,
certain portions of the reserve are normally employed to extricate units
that are too heavily engaged to break contact.
c. In a daylight withdrawal the least heavily engaged elements are
withdrawn first. Those heavily engaged generally withdraw through
cover provided by the reserve and the massed fires of all delivery means
available.

Section III. DELAYING ACTIONS

177. General
In a delaying action, units engaged trade space for time and at the same
time inflict maximum damage and casualties on the attacking force. In
terrain permitting maneuver, mechanized infantry and armor elements are

166 AGO 3326B

ideally suited for this type operation. Under normal conditions and
varying terrain a combination of mechanized infantry, infantry and armor
can conduct an effectiveo peration.
a. A delay may be conducted from a single position or within a specified
area with or without the designation of specific positions on a specified
time schedule. The techniques for delaying on a single position are
essentially those of the defense.
b. Planning a delay is highly centralized and execution is decentralized
to the lowest level that specific missions are assigned. Movement of
delaying forces is coordinated to a degree essential to insure preservation of
security and maintenance of command integrity. Commanders at lower
echelon are frequently given authority to execute offensive maneuver
against enemy forces provided such action does not, in their judgment,
endanger accomplishment of the mission.
c. In the conduct of delay within a specified area, the brigade com-
mander should provide for delay on alternate or successive positions.
When a high degree of mobility is available the delay may be conducted
from successive positions and will provide stronger forces to delay.
Terrain not permitting, or in the absence of adequate mobility, a delay
from alternate positions is desirable.

178. Planning the Delay

a. A directive to initiate a delaying action may be broad in scope and
provide that enemy forces be retained beyond a designated line for a
specified period. In this case the brigade commander establishes an
initial and other delaying positions and sufficient lateral boundaries to
insure effective control of subordinate elements. The order for the delay-
ing action which the brigade receives from a higher headquarters will
usually specify: boundaries, phase lines, the time schedule for the delay,
the initial delaying position, and the line along which the delay will
terminate. It may also include interim delaying positions.
b. The brigade commander evaluates the area wherein the delaying
action is to be conducted in relation to trafficability, obstacles, key
terrain, road networks and routes of withdrawal, defensibility and the
width of the area.
(1) Trafficability of the area is determined in relation to the forces
available for employment. That portion of the area that
enhances maneuver of mechanized and armor forces is considered
for employment of such forces. Areas that do not provide
maneuver space are evaluated in regard to a requirement for
delaying forces to operate therein.
(2) Natural obstacles within the area are located and evaluated to
determine whether they will interfere with or enhance the
operation. Those obstacles which favor the enemy are given
immediate attention for reduction. Obstacles that offer an
advantage to delaying forces are extended or reinforced.
AGO 3326B 167
 (3) Key terrain features throughout the area are identified and given
close attention. Designated elements may delay on key terrain
features until such time as the progress of the operation extends
beyond a further need for this terrain.
(4) Road networks in the area are analyzed as to usability and
adequacy in relation to the number of using forces and equip-
ment. Unusable roads are considered for repair, and, if the
road network is limited, plans are made for coordination and
control of their use. Ideally, an adequate network of roads
should be available within the zone of each major maneuver unit.
(5) All defensible terrain providing observation and fields of fire is
considered for delaying positions. Ridgelines perpendicular to
the axes of withdrawal should be considered. Obstacles such
as rivers, lakes, ponds, and swamps that reduce the delay front-
age should be considered in selecting delay positions. Prepara-
tion should be initiated immediately on delay positions selected.
(6) If the width and other characteristics of the area on delay
positions preclude an even distribution of delay forces, the
brigade commander should assign priority to the better ap-
proaches and provide for surveillance, in conjunction with
mobile forces, on others. In wide zones, consideration should be
given to the use of forces in conjunction with natural and artifi-
cial obstacles in developing delaying positions.
179. Conduct of the Delay
The brigade commander strives to establish and maintain continuous
contact with the enemy. Once contact has been established, all re-
munerative targets presented within range of fire delivery means are
subjected to fires. Thorough reconnaissance forward of delaying forces is
employed as far as is consistent with the mission and security. See
figure 32.
a. As the enemy approaches the delaying position he is forced.to deploy
and is subjected to fires whenever he presents a target. The position is
retained in the same manner as in a defensive operation, but forces
normally avoid decisive combat. If the delaying element is forced to
give ground, the reserve of the maneuver element of which it is a part
may initiate a limited objective attack to relieve the pressure.
b. In the event a delaying element is forced to abandon its position, the
commander estimates the strength of the enemy force opposing it. If
feasible and appropriate, he may direct a counterattack to reduce the
penetration. Minor penetrations are either destroyed by fire, counter-
attacked, or contained, pending withdrawal action by the main force.
Under no circumstances should a delaying position be abandoned solely
on the basis of a penetration unless it is of such a magnitude as to endanger
the entire position.

168 AGO 3326B

 \\
Ix~~~~~~~~~~ 6 // INITIAL
DELAYING
POSITION

- -L L _PL

NO'E: ~I
) BRIGADE RECONNAISSANCE.

G BRIGADE RESERVE.

O BRIDGE SECURITY AND DEMOLITION PARTY.

Q DIVISION COVERING FORCE.

Figure 32. Brigade in delay.

AGO 3326B 169

 c. At a preselected time or when the position becomes untenable, the
brigade commander orders a withdrawal. In the event the position is
tenable at the prescribed time for withdrawal, and further delay will
contribute to the intent of the operation the brigade commander may
inform higher command and retain his position.
d. During withdrawal of the main body the opposing force is kept under
continuous pressure by maneuver elements and fires. Areas and ap-
proaches not previously used by enemy forces are kept under surveillance
to detect a displacement of forces or a new attack.
e. As early as practicable the brigade commander should effect liaison
with elements to his rear and begin planning for withdrawing through the
cover provided. Every effort will be made to insure that adequate gaps
through the covering positions are provided to prevent massing of forces
when the passage is executed. See paragraph 182.

Section IV. RETIREMENT

180. General
A retirement is an operation in which forces move away from the enemy
without direct pressure. A withdrawal becomes a retirement when enemy
contact has been broken.

181. Conduct of the Retirement

A retirement is conducted in a formation appropriate to arteries of
movement and the expected dispositions of forces at the destination with
such security as is dictated by the situation. The operation may be con-
ducted as in an administrative move or a tactical move. If the movement
is not covered or if a threat from enemy forces is considered possible,
the brigade will be deployed to meet the threat.
a. A retirement is most effectivel]y accomplished on multiple routes.
On most occasions after the brigade has passed through the covering force,
road passage is on a priority basis and arteries and time of use will be
dictated.
b. The brigade commander may designate march objectives or require
that subordinate elements do so based on his scheme of operation and
consistent with adequate controls.
c. A retirement is best controlled by attaching smaller units to major
subordinate elements, to distribute forces over available road nets. Heli-
copters may be employed to assist in retirement over restricted terrain.

Section V. WITHDRAWAL, THROUGH A REARWARD

POSITION
182. General
Withdrawal of the brigade through a rearward position may not be
under enemy contact or may involve constant contact until the with-

170 AGO 3326B

drawing forces come under covering fires of the rearward element. Con-
trol and coordination of a rearward passage of lines involves detailed
attention to certain aspects of the operation.
a. Initial liaison with a rearward unit through which a passage is
anticipated must include provisions for effective and compatible com-
munication. Since communication during a passage of lines will normally
be by radio, provisions should be made for the exchange of radio fre-
quencies and call signs.
b. When a force is to execute a retrograde operation through the area
of influence of elements to its rear, plans should include provisions for
the use of the fire support resources available to the rearward force.
Similarly provisions must be made for centralized control of fires to
prevent inadvertent delivery of fires on friendly forces. This coordination
may be accomplished by the exchange of artillery liaison personnel,
designation of a series of fire coordination lines or routine liaison and
exchange of plans, if time permits.
c. Plans for the passage of lines must include a traffic control plan that
will expedite movement through the position with the minimum dis-
ruption of activities of the forces involved. The use of multiple routes
will permit passage with minimum lateral movement and reduce the time
of exposing a high density of troops to enemy fire. Assembly by the with-
drawing forces will normally be avoided immediately before or behind the
position and passing troops will move directly to the rear after completing
the passage. Assembly is normally effected beyond the battle area and
the commander of the rearward position will normally provide guides.
d. To insure positive coordination and an orderly passage, arrange-
ments are frequently made wherein the commander of the rearward
position will assume command of forces passing through his lines. The
transfer of control may occur when the withdrawing forces pass a certain
line or at a specified time.

AGO 8326B 171

 CHAPTER 9
RELIEF OPERATIONS

Section I. GENERAL
183. Purposes and Types
a. Conservation of fighting power, maintenance of effectiveness, and
the tactical plan and changes thereto, may require the periodic relief of
committed units. Under nuclear conditions it may be necessary to replace
company and battalion size units whose combat effectiveness has been
destroyed or greatly reduced by nuclear fire. Such reliefs are effected by
a relief in place, a passage of lines, or withdrawal through a rearward
position.
b. The entire brigade may participate in a relief, a passage of lines, or
a withdrawal through a rearward position, or it may direct and control
any or all of these operations internally.

184. Definitions
a. Relief in Place. A relief in place is an operation in which all.or part
of a unit is replaced in a combat area by another unit. The combat mission
and area of operation responsibilities of the relieved unit are assumed by
the relieving unit. The relief in place is executed when the unit being
relieved is on the defense. The relieving unit may have the mission of
continuing the defense or preparing for a subsequent attack. In either
case the relieved unit or elements are withdrawn.
b. Passage of Lines. A passage of lines is an operation in which an
incoming unit attacks through a unit which is in contact with the enemy.
Elements of the unit being passed through remain in position and support
the attacking unit until their fires are masked, at which time they may
remain in position, be withdrawn, or committed to other action in the
area of the attack.
c. Withdrawal Through a Rearward Position. A withdrawal through a
rearward position is a passage of lines to the rear in which the unit with-
drawing transfers responsibility for the sector to the unit through which
it withdraws. This operation is normally conducted as part of the defense
or delaying action and is discussed 'in chapter 8.
185. Considerations Affecting the Choice of Reliefs
A unit may be relieved of zone or sector responsibility by a relief in
place or a passage of lines.
a. Relief in Place. When sufficient time is available, the relief in place
prior to an attack should be employed in those situations where-
(1) The unit being relieved is required in another area prior to, or
just after the attack is launched.

172 AGO 3326B

 (2) The capability of the enemy is such that the troop density in-
volved in a passage of lines constitutes an excessive risk.
(3) The attacker requires more detailed familiarity with the terrain
and the enemy situation.
b. Passage of Lines. The passage of lines is preferred prior to the attack
when-
(1) There is insufficient time to conduct a relief in place.
(2) When more flexibility is desired in the selection of the formation
for the attack.
(3) When the fire support of two units is desired in a particular area.
(4) When a major change in the direction of attack is planned.
(5) When it is desired to maintain continuous offensive pressure
against the enemy.

186. Basic Considerations

The following considerations are common to the planning and execution
of all types of reliefs.
a. Planning. The scheme of maneuver adopted should be as simple
and uncomplicated as possible. However, plans must be detailed and
complete. Control measures, particularly movement control and time
phasing, should be prescribed in detail. Plans must be developed con-
currently by and jointly with the units involved. Planning should begin
as far in advance of the relief or passage of lines as possible.
b. Reconnaissance. Brigade planning must provide for adequate time
for a thorough reconnaissance by commander and staffs of units conduct-
ing the relief or passage of lines. Routes to be used in the movement must
be thoroughly reconnoitered.
c. Exchange of Liaison Personnel. Liaison must be established early
between the units involved.
d. Movement Control. Joint coordination between the relieving and
the relieved units must be made for the control of units moving into and
out of the area. Coordination must include-
(1) Routes and areas to be used and priorities for their use.
(2) Responsibility for traffic control.
(3) Location of entrucking, detrucking, and turn-around points.
(4) Provision for guides.
e. Intelligence. The unit being relieved transfers to the relieving unit
all information and intelligence concerning the enemy and the area of
operations. Upon request, it obtains additional information required
by the relieving force.
f. Transfer of Command. Unity of command must be preserved at all
times. The time or circumstances under which the relieving unit com-
mander will assume responsibility for discharging the mission of the
element being relieved and/or its area of responsibility is clearly es-
tablished in advance.
g. Enemy. Because of the massing of troops inherent when two units
AGO 3326B 173
operate in an area normally used only by one, relief operations may pro-
vide the enemy lucrative nuclear targets. In addition, enemy attacks
during the operation will seriously impede and complicate the relief or
passage of lines. For these reasons, the planning and execution of
relief operations must include all possible measures to insure secrecy and
surprise and to deceive the enemy.

Section II. THE RELIEF

187. Planning the Relief
a. General. When the brigade relieves another brigade in place, the
warning order it receives will specify as a minimum the unit or units to be
relieved, the time the relief is to begin and end, and the mission of the
brigade subsequent to completion of the relief. If the brigade is con-
ducting an internal relief, this same information must be included in the
warning order to subordinate units. Upon receipt of relief orders, the
brigade command post is established in the vicinity of the unit it will
relieve and liaison established. Planning then begins.
b. Planning.
(1) The brigade commander and his staff and the commander and
staff of the relieved unit work closely together to produce a
coordinated plan to accomplish the mission. In cases where
agreement can not be reached on details of the plan, each unit
notifies its higher headquarters and requests a decision. When
the brigade is conducting an internal relief, it closely monitors
and coordinates planning conducted by subordinate units.
(2) The incoming unit commanders and staffs must be briefed and
become thoroughly familiar with the existing defensive plans to
include fire plans, barrier plans, and counterattack plans. To
facilitate the efficient transfer of information concerning the
plans, dispositions, and area of operation, the unit being re-
lieved leaves liaison personnel with the relieving unit. Nor-
mally, they will remain with each combat and combat support
headquarters of the relieving unit until the relief is completed.
The number of these personnel and the duration of their stay
with the relieving unit vary with the situation.
c. Sequence of Relief. The order received or issued by the brigade may
specify the sequence for the conduct of the relief. To insure the strongest
defense during relief, the relief in place is executed by stages, whether rear
to front, or front to rear. If the first method is used, reserves are relieved
first followed by relief of forward defense units. This process is reversed
in the second method. In determining the sequence of the relief, both
commanders should consider-
(1) The subsequent mission of the relieving unit.
(2) The strength and combat efficiency of the unit presently in the
forward defensive area.

174 AGO 8326B

 (3) The capability of the enemy to detect and react against the
relief, and his estimated activity during the relief.
(4) The characteristics of the area of operation.
(5) The need to vary the pattern of relief.
(6) The size and type of elements involved in the relief.
(7) The time available for the relief.
(8) The conditions of visibility under which the relief is to be
conducted.
d. Passage of Command. The time or circumstances under which the
relieving unit commander will assume responsibility for the area must be
clearly established and specified in the relief order. Until command
passes, the outgoing unit commander retains responsibility for the area
and mission and exercises operational control over all subordinate elements
of the relieving unit which have completed their portion of the relief.
During this period, the incoming units must fit into and accept the general
defense plans of the outgoing unit. Normally, command passes to the
relieving commander when the units in the forward defensive area have
been relieved by his subordinate units and when adequate communications
means have been established. When command passes, the incoming
commander assumes operational control of all units of the outgoing unit
which have not yet been relieved.
e. Reconnaissance. Whenever possible, reconnaissance should be con-
ducted jointly by both commanders and staffs of the units involved.
This insures that incoming units receive the full value of the knowledge
of the area which the outgoing units possess. Particular attention
should be given to routes, assembly areas, weapons positions, and supply
and administrative installation. Reconnaissance should be conducted in
vehicles of the unit being relieved.-
f. Security. Every effort must be made by all echelons of the relieving
and relieved units to prevent the enemy learning that a relief is taking
place. Whenever possible, the relief is conducted during periods of
reduced visibility. The following security measures should be taken:
(1) Every form of normal activity in the area of operations must be
maintained during the relief. The relieving unit should pick up
the normal pattern of harassing and interdiction fires; patrols,
communication traffic, and movement previously employed by
the outgoing unit.
(2) Restrictions on the size of advance parties and reconnaissance
parties must be enforced. These parties should move to the
area of operations by infiltration.
(3) Aerial reconnaissance by members of the relieving unit should be
made in aircraft of the unit being relieved and follow the
pattern of air operation previously established by the relieved
unit.
(4) Radio nets of the relieving unit should not be used in the new
area until after the relief is complete.
AGO 3326B 175
 (5) Registration of fires of the relieving unit should be controlled
by the outgoing unit until command passes.
(6) An integrated tactical deception plan should be executed by
both the relieving and relieved units.
(7) Once begun, the relief of units in the forward defense position
is accomplished as rapidly as possible.
(8) The plan must prescribe what action is to be taken in the event
the enemy discovers the relief and reacts to it.
g. Transportation. The infantry brigade should be provided with
sufficient transportation to move walking elements of the brigade from
old locations to new assembly areas or dismount points. Plans should
provide for joint use of this transportation by both the relieving and
relieved units.
h. Exchange of Equipment. Units should arrange to exchange equip-
ment, including weapons and vehicles, to the maximum extent possible
within authorization. This facilitates the relief, reduces movement, and
aids in security and deception.
i. Organization for Combat. When one unit of the brigade relieves
another to assume the defense mission of the relieved unit, the task
organization of the two units should be as simrilar as possible. This facil-
itates the defense by allowing the incoming unit to occupy the same
defense position and by enabling it to use the existing defense plan with
only minor changes. Attachments ito the incoming unit from the unit
being relieved remain in place and come under control of the new unit
at a specified time.
j. Fire Support.
(1) When the brigade relieves another brigade of the same division,
artillery supporting the relieved unit need. not normally be
relieved. This procedure insures that artillery units which are
familiar with the fire support plans and the area of operations
are in position to fire during the critical period of the relief of
forward units. For coverage of relief operations for artillery
units, see FM's 6-20-1, 6-20-2, and 61-100.
(2) Fire support plans must provide for fires to protect and cover
movement into forward defense positions.
k. Administrative Support. Movement of administrative support units
and reliefs conducted by them must be carefully planned and coordinated.
Transfer of supplies, especially classes I, III, and V should be accom-
plished to reduce movement as much as possible. Elements of the brigade
trains, if possible, should move to the new location before the remainder
of the brigade so that they can be positioned and prepared to support
the relief.
188. Conduct of the Relief
a. Execution of the relief is decentralized. It consists of a series of

176 AGO 3326B

reliefs conducted by brigade elements time phased over the entire period
bf the relief.
b. Delays in assembly areas close to the area of relief are brief, and,
in the case of the mechanized brigade or the infantry brigade when
motorized, the move may be made from assembly areas distant from the
area of relief, with units halting only to refuel and dismount.
c. Departing units clear the area as quickly as possible to reduce
vulnerability to enemy fire.
d. Once the relief in place is begun, the brigade staff is primarily con-
cerned with-
(1) Supervising the timing and movement of subordinate units.
(2) Coordinating joint use of transportation between relieving and
relieved units.
(3) Supervising the execution of traffic control.
(4) Preparing for resumption of centralized control after the transfer
of command.
e. The unit being relieved continues its defensive mission during the
relief operation and assists the incoming unit in every way possible.

Section III. PASSAGE OF LINES

189. Planning the Passage of Lines

a. General. A passage of lines may be made to regain or continue the
momentum of an attack, to resume the offensive after a period of sta-
bilized defense, to counterattack, or to rotate troops for rest and mainte-
nance.
b. Planning Procedures. The planning procedures involved when a
brigade, or element thereof, passes through another unit are similar to
those described in paragraphs 187 and 188, for a relief in place. Upon
receipt of a warning order which directs an operation requiring a passage
of lines, the brigade commander and his staff make early contact with
the unit being passed through. When the tactical situation permits,
arrangements are made to establish the brigade command post in the
vicinity of the command post of the unit to be passed through. Fre-
quently, time will not permit as detailed planning as for a relief in place,
particularly if the passage of lines is made to continue or exploit an attack
already in progress in a fast moving situation. Reserve units of the
brigade must be prepared to make a passage of lines on very short notice.
c. Coordination. Prior to the passage, the units concerned coordinate
on the following to the extent permitted by time:
(1) Exchange of intelligence.
(2) Exchange of tactical plans.
(3) Arrangements for reconnaissance by elements of the units
passing through.
AGO 3326B 177
 (4) Measures to be taken to provide security during the passage.
(5) Selection of areas of passage and provisions for guides.
(6) Priorities for use of routes and areas and provisions for move-
ment control.
(7) The time or circumstances when responsibility for the area of
operations will be transferred to the unit passing through.
(8) Extent of fire support and other tactical support to be provided
by the unit being passed through.
(9) Extent of administrative support to be provided by the unit
passed through.
d. Selection of Areas of Passage. When possible, the areas selected for
the actual passage of lines should be the unoccupied areas between ele-
ments of the unit in position or on its flanks. This procedure reduces the
vulnerability that results when onE unit passes directly through the
occupied positions of another unit. Vulnerability is also reduced when
the subordinate units of the brigade making the passage move directly to
the areas of passage and on into the attack without occupying forward
assembly areas.
e. Prioritiesfor the Use of Routes. The unit, passing through must have
priority for use of routes to and within the area of the unit being passed
through. Route priority should be established by the headquarters
directing the passage of lines. Traffic control in the area of the unit being
passed through is the responsibility of that unit until the responsibility
for the zone passes to the passing unit. The passing unit may augment
the traffic control capability of the unit in position during the time of
passage.
f. Transferof Command. The time or circumstance when responsibility
for the zone of action is transferred to the commander of the unit executing
the passage of lines must be mutually agreed upon by the two commanders
concerned or as directed by higher authority. Normally, the commander
of the unit making the pasasge of lines assumes responsibility for the zone
of action at or prior to the time of attack, i.e., when the attacking ele-
ments cross the line of departure. The responsibility for the zone may
shift at the time of the firing of the preparatory fires or earlier at the
direction of the headquarters ordering the relief. The brigade normally
specifies the time that the transfer will become effective when a passage of
lines is made involving only subordinate elements of the brigade.
g. Combat Support. The unit in contact provides all possible aid to
the unit passing through, e.g., identifying and clearing lanes through
friendly minefields, provision of guides, fire support, and other tactical
support within its capabilities. Normally, the indirect fire means of the
unit in contact will furnish the bulk of the fire support for the passing
unit. See FM's 6-20-1 and 6-20-2 for coverage of artillery operations
in the passage of lines.
h. Administrative Support. The unit being passed through assists
the unit making the passage administratively by evacuation of casualties

178 AGO 3326B

and prisoners of war, civilian control, provision of supplies, and traffic
control.
i. Nuclear Considerations. Use of nuclear fires can greatly assist the
passage of lines by reducing the effectiveness of enemy units opposing the
force in contact. Small yield weapons available to brigade units, such as
Davy Crockett are especially effective for this purpose.

190. Conduct of the Passage of Lines

a. Elements of the brigade move, preferably during periods of reduced
visibility, from rearward positions in order to cross the line of departure
at the scheduled time.
b. If the passage of lines is preceded by a nuclear preparation, two
nuclear safety lines may be required because of the different degree of
protection available for both the attacking unit and the unit being passed
through. The timing of the movement of the attacking elements must
provide time for these units to take the prescribed safety precautions,
and then move across the line of departure at the specified time after the
nuclear preparation.
c. In some situations it may be desirable to displace the reserves of the
unit in contact to rear assembly areas just prior to the beginning of the
passage of lines. This procedure reduces troop density during the pas-
age.
d. See FM's 7-11, 7-20, and 17-15 for passage of lines operations by
tactical battalions and companies.

191. Passage of Lines by Armored and Mechanized

Infantry Units
a. Passage of lines by armored and mechanized infantry units are
planned and conducted generally as described in paragraphs 189 and 190.
However, the following characteristics of armor and mechanized infantry
must be considered in a passage of lines: the noise created by movement
of large numbers of tracked vehicles; sensitivity of tanks and armored
personnel carriers to terrain, which may restrict the number of routes
or areas suitable for the passage; the length of the columns; and increased
vehicular density in the area of passage.
b. Restrictions on movement of armored vehicles imposed by the
terrain may require shifting of some of the units being passed through to
adjust their positions to facilitate the passage.
c. For detailed coverage of passage of lines by armored units see FM's
17-15 and 17-30.

AGO 3326B 179

 CHAPTER 10
OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS

Section I. GENERAL

192. Scope
a. This chapter discusses the following operations in relation to the
infantry, airborne and mechanized brigade and is appropriate to the
separate brigade with changes where necessary for differences in organiza-
tion.
(1) Airborne operations.
(2) Linkup operations.
(3) Amphibious operations.
(4) Antiguerrilla operations.
(5) River crossings.
(6) Raids, feints, and demonstrations.
(7) Combat in fortified and built.up areas.
(8) Long range patrols.
b. The brigade has the capability of conducting all of the above opera-
tions, although it may have to be augmented with special equipment and
undergo specialized training for some. The tactical principles covered
in other portions of this manual are applicable to these tactical operations.
c. Appendix I lists other manuals -which cover in greater detail the
tactical operations covered in this chapter.

Section II. AIRBORINE OPERATIONS

193. General
a. Scope. This section covers the broad aspects of airborne operations
in which the brigade may participate. Detailed information on the
planning and conduct of airborne operations at battalion level is con-
tained in FM 57-10 and FM 57-35.
b. Definitions. See figure 33.
(1) Airborne operation. An airborne operation is the movement
and delivery by air of tactical and tactical support elements
and their logistical support into an objective area for execution
of a tactical or strategic mission. Ground forces participate in
an airborne operation in either a parachute or an air-landed
role. Airborne operations include joint airborne and airmobile
operations.
(a) Joint airborne operations. In joint airborne operations,
participating forces are provided by two or more services;

180 AGO 3326B

 Zn
II.

LU
0-
.<
j0
woo
'Z,,;
LUL

::U U

uz / Z
0 0

;.
oo

z
0~~~>

LU
I-- II
,m U

w~ F

mm uL
CI-

uiin 0'i
ui

O0

- I- ~~~~~~~~II~~~~~~~~~~~~1 i
co 0

z u

AGO 3326B 181

 the Air Force usually furnishes the airlift and the Army the
combat forces.
(b) Airmobile operation. An airmobile operation is one in which
combat forces and their equipment are moved about the
battlefield in aerial vehicles under the control of a ground
force commander to engage in ground combat.
(2) Administrative air movement. This is a nontactical movement
of troops and equipment in which subsequent combat action is
not anticipated. It is not considered to be an airborne opera-
tion, although some of the techniques employed in airborne
operations are used.

194. Air Transportability of the Brigade Headquarters

and Headquarters Company and Brigade Units
a. The Airborne Brigade. The airborne brigade headquarters and
headquarters company as well as all units of the airborne division normally
attached to the brigade, for operations, have been organized and equipped
for airborne assaults. All of their equipment :is air transportable in heavy
and medium transport aircraft and all can be delivered by parachute.
b. The Infantry Brigade. The infantry brigade headquarters and head-
quarters company's equipment is all transportable in medium and heavy
transport aircraft. However, the two armored personnel carriers in the
Command Vehicle Section may not be used since an APC requires a
single heavy transport aircraft for air movement. These are supple-
mentary command vehicles and need not be replaced for the operation.
All equipment of units of the infantry division normally attached to or
supporting the infantry brigade can be transported by air except the
tanks, tank recovery vehicles and armored vehicle launched bridges
(AVLB). Thus, the infantry brigade would have no tank elements
attached for airborne operations.
c. The Mechanized Brigade. The equipment of the mechanized
brigade headquarters and headquarters company is air transportable.
However, the brigade headquarters relies heavily on APC for command
and staff vehicles and for radio stations. All APC of the company would
have to be replaced by wheeled vehicles and radios before the brigade
headquarters could operate effectively in an airborne operation. The
mechanized infantry battalion may participate in airborne operations
without its heavy equipment. Towed artillery of the mechanized
division must be substituted for the self propelled artillery for airborne
operations. Retention of the mechanized characteristics of the brigade
in airborne operations is not practicable.

195. Characteristics of Airborne Operations

a. Airborne operations are characterized by their ability to achieve
tactical surprise, to strike deep anywhere in the enemy's rear, to bypas's

182 AGO 3326B

obstacles, and to obtain decisive results. The mere presence of air-
borne units or an airborne capability exerts a significant influence on
the enemy and may cause him to divert sizeable forces to counter the
threat.
b. Limitations imposed by air movement compel airborne operations
to be conducted with reduced antitank capability, reduced mobility,
limited armor and artillery, and reduced equipment of other types.
Logistical support is furnished on somewhat reduced basis. Adverse
weather may seriously restrict the conduct of airborne operations. The
force is vulnerable to enemy air during all phases of the operation. For
this reason adequate air superiority must be achieved prior to launching
an airborne attack.
c. The assault is usually made into lightly defended areas. Nuclear
weapons employed prior to the assault may be used to reduce the enemy's
strength in a particular area to a sufficient degree to permit its use for
a landing zone. After objectives have been secured brigade operations
in the objective area usually take the form of a perimeter defense.
d. Unity of command is highly important during airborne operations;
particularly joint airborne operations.
e. Successful execution of airborne operations requires gaining and
maintaining air superiority in the objective area during the assault
phase.
f. Because of the limited artillery support available and the reduced
antitank capability of the force, necessary close air support must be
provided for the airborne force. Aircraft on air alert may be scheduled
for execution of on-call strikes. If the brigade is conducting an independ-
ent operation, a tactical air coordinator must be provided who, ac-
companied by a brigade representative, operates over the objective area
in an aircraft and controls the close air support. Forward air control
teams of the brigade's attached battalion are landed early in the opera-
tion to assist forward air controllers in controlling air strikes. Armed
Army aircraft are suitable in many instances to augment fire support.
g. Training and the development of unit SOP for airborne operations
enable a unit to prepare for and execute airborne operations on short
notice. Unit training influences tactical operations on the ground, speed
and precision in loading and unloading aircraft, techniques of assault
landing, and assembly after landing. Airborne operations are rehearsed
as thoroughly as time and facilities, including aircraft, permit.
h. Communications pose special problems in airborne operations,
especially during the assault phase. Radio is the principal means used.
Communication plans must be integrated and coordinated at all levels
and communications established between the brigade and the support-
ing Air Force or Army aviation units, fire support agencies, administra-
tive support installations, and linkup forces.
i. Logistical planning must be detailed and produce a flexible plan of
AGO 3326B 183
resupply. Aerial resupply, in many instances, will be relied on until
assault strips are in operation to allow air landing or until ground linkup.

196. Echelonment for Joint Ailrborne and Airmobile

Task organization and operational and administrative plans provide
for the echelonment of forces as discussed in a and b below.
a. Joint Airborne Operations.
(1) Assault echelon. The assault echelon is composed of those
forces required to seize the assault objectives and the initial
objective area and includes the reserve and supporting troops.
(2) Followup echelon. The followup echelon is that part of the
airborne force (less rear echelon) which is not brought into the
objective area in the assault but normally enters the objective
area as soon as practicable, by air or surface movement, or a
combination of these methods. Depending on the means of
transportation used, the followup echelon will consist of addi-
tional vehicles and equipment of units in the assault echelon
and tactical, tactical support, and administrative units not
required in the assault echelcn.
(3) Rear echelon. The rear echelon is that part of the force not
required in the objective area and therefore left in the departure
area, and those units whose functions can be performed more
efficiently in the departure area.
b. Airmobile Operations.
(1) Assault echelon. This echelon consists of those forces and their
equipment that are landed in the objective area to engage in
ground combat. It may require one or more lifts, depending on
its size and the number and type aircraft available.
(2) Rear echelon. This echelon consists of the remainder of the
force and includes those elements not immediately needed in
the objective area, such as administrative personnel and equip-
ment; and those which cannot be transported in available
aircraft. This echelon accompanies the ground linkup force.

197. Joint Airborne Operations

a. Employment of the Brigade. The brigade conducts airborne opera-
tions using all or part of the brigade as an independent army force or as
part of a larger army force. Airborne operations, independent or semi-
independent, may be conducted frequently by the airborne brigade, less
frequently by the infantry brigade, and seldom by the mechanized
brigade. For appropriate mission see FM 57--10.
b. Security. From the initiation of planning to the completion of the
operation, security is of paramount importance throughout all phases of
airborne operations.
c. Liaison. The brigade establishes liaison as soon as it receives its
warning order for an airborne operation with army headquarters, if one

184 AGO 3326B

is present, or the joint force headquarters; air force troop carrier units,
other supporting forces, and the linkup force.
d. Plannzity.
(1) For a detailed discussion of planning for an airborne operation,
see FM 57-10 and FM 7-20.
(2) The order received by the brigade for the airborne operation
initiates the planning. Joint planning is conducted with the
transport aircraft unit which will transport the brigade.
(3) Plans are developed from anticipated actions in the objective
area first and continuing the planning in reverse sequence as
indicated below:
(a) Ground tactical plan. The ground tactical plan for the
brigade includes the assault plan to seize objectives, and
plans for defense, linkup, withdrawal, and subsequent
operations. Assault and defense plans are prepared con-
currently and include the scheme of maneuver and the fire
support plans. Alternate plans are prepared. Planning is
generally the same as discussed in chapters 6, 7, and 8.
(b) The landing plan. The landing plan outlines the sequence,
time, and place of arrival of troops and material. It is based
on the ground tactical plan. In it, the brigade designates
landing areas for subordinate units.
(c) Air movement plan. The air movement plan is prepared
jointly by the army and troop carrier commanders concerned.
It is based on the landing plan and includes the composition
of aircraft loads, organization of serials and instructions for
flight of the aircraft from the loading area to the objective
area. An air movement table, which is published as an
annex to the operation order or as an appendix to the air
movement plan annex, is developed jointly by the ground
and transport unit commanders. The table gives the
executing units detailed instructions on flight serial composi-
tion, the number of aircraft allocated, time for loading and
takeoff, loading sites, and drop or landing zones. An air
loading table, based on the air movement table, is prepared
by the ground commander. Flight manifests are also pre-
pared.
(d) Marshalling plans. The marshalling plan is based upon the
air movement plan and provides for final preparations for
combat, movement to loading sites, and loading in assigned
aircraft. The air loading tables indicate the personnel,
vehicles, and equipment assigned to each aircraft, the loading
site, and the times of arrival and departure. During the
marshalling phase, all possible active and passive defensive
measures against nuclear attack are taken. This requires
that both air and ground units avoid concentration during
AGO 8326B 185
 the marshalling phase, and that maximum advantage be
taken of all available concealment and cover.
e. Brigade Orders.
(1) The brigade commander issues a warning order as soon as
possible so that the subordinate unit commanders can make
their plans and preparations concurrently. The warning order
for an airborne operation may include special security measures
and advance information of the number and types of aircraft
allocated to the battalion.
(2) Brigade plans and orders give battalion commanders the
following additional information peculiar to an airborne opera-
tion as indicated in (a) through (j) below.
(a) Assault objectives for the attached battalions and sectors of
responsibility.
(b) The location and assignment of drop and/or landing zones.
(c) Requirements for special reports not covered by SOP.
(d) Coordinating instructions for initiating the ground phases of
the operation.
(e) Data for the air movement plan to include location of loading
areas and/or departure sites, allocation of aircraft, composi-
tion of aircraft serials, flight route diagrams, and the time
for loading, takeoff, and arrival at the destination. Data
for priority of movement, phase back of units, and logistical
support is also included.
(f) Data on marshalling including special security measures to
insure secrecy.
(g) Details of air-sea rescue, when applicable.
(h) Details of time and place of arrival and the use of troops and
equipment in the followup echelon, when applicable.
(i) Organization of and instructions to the rear echelon.
(j) The supply and evacuation plan, including special measures
for air resupply and air evacuation.
f. Brigade Reserve. The brigade reserve is normally of battalion size
and is moved into the objective area as early as the ground situation and
availability of aircraft permit. However, if the brigade elements are
committed simultaneously in widely separated areas, the brigade reserve
may be held in readiness in the departure area prepared for aerial delivery
in an assault role.
g. Conduct of the Joint Airborne Operation.
(1) When marshalling has been. completed, the air movement is
made to the drop and landing zones. The movement is under
the control of the troop carrier commander. During this
phase, the brigade commander relinquishes control of his unit
and does not regain it until the landing has been made.
(2) Immediately upon landing, the brigade commander reorganizes
by collecting equipment and assembling his attached battalions.

186 AGO 3326B

 Security elements move directly to the areas assigned and
accomplish their mission. The brigade commander resumes
control of his subordinate elements as rapidly as reorganization
permits.
(3) The attack phase of the airborne operation is conducted as
described in chapter 6.
h. Administrative Support. Each assault battalion of the brigade
takes with it elements of its combat trains. Elements of the brigade
trains are phased into the objective area as soon as the tactical situation
and availability of aircraft permit. Followup supplies are delivered as
close to battalions of the brigade as possible. As the objective area is
consolidated and secured, the brigade train assumes its normal functions
as discussed in chapter 5.
i. Subsequent Operations. After seizing its objectives, the brigade may
defend (ch. 7); linkup with surface forces (pars. 200-202); conduct
retrograde operations (ch. 8); or it may conduct further offensive opera-
tions (ch. 6).
j. Defense of the Objective Area. The defense of the objective area is
conducted essentially as described in chapter 7. When the brigade
must defend a large area, the brigade commander may organize his
defense around strong points, generally of battalion size. Gaps between
these strong points must be covered by fire and by continuous surveillance
of all types.
k. Airborne Raids. An airborne raid is an attack to accomplish a
specific mission with no intention of holding the invaded area. The
entire brigade may be used on a raid of extensive scale, or the brigade
may conduct a raid using only a part of its attached forces. The mission
of the raid may be to obtain information about the enemy, to capture
or kill enemy personnel, to rescue or assist friendly units or personnel,
seize critical equipment or similar intelligence objectives, to destroy
enemy installations, or to harass and disrupt the enemy. Airborne
raids are similar to other raids as discussed in paragraphs 220 through
222, except that movement to the objective area is by air. Withdrawal
may also be by air, or it may be over land or by sea.

198. Airmobile Operations

a. General. The infantry and airborne brigades conduct airmobile
operations as a routine part of land combat ranging in size from a squad
to the entire brigade. The mechanized brigade, less its heavy equip-
ment, can conduct airmobile operations, but its use for this purpose is
infrequent. The airmobile capability of the infantry and airborne
brigades enables them to-
(1) Increase the speed and flexibility of operations.
(2) Pose a constant threat which may cause the enemy to dissipate
his forces to protect vital installations and hold key terrain in
rear areas.
AGO 3326B 187
 (3) Extend the area over which the brigade can exert its influence.
(4) Improve rear area security.
(5) Concentrate forces quickly and effectively at critical points
and redisperse them after accomplishing the mission.
b. Missions. Appropriate missions for brigade airmobile operations
include-
(1) Raids.
(2) Antiairborne and antiguerrilla operations.
(3) Over-obstacle assault operations.
(4) Exploitation of nuclear fires.
(5) Seizure of key terrain.
(6) Blocking or screening enemy avenues of approach or escape.
(7) Feints and demonstrations.
(8) Reconnaissance and security missions.
(9) Counterattack of enemy penetrations.
(10) Ship-to-shore operations.
(11) Economy of force missions.
c. Basic Considerations.
(1) Using the airlift capability organic to the division, the brigade
can conduct company-size airmobile operations. Operations of
greater magnitude require that aircraft be provided by corps
or field army aviation units.
(2) Aviation support for airmobile operations can be provided by
attachment, attachment for operational control for a specified
period, direct support, or various combinations of these methods.
The lowest echelon capable of effecting control and coordina-
tion of the operation exercises control of supporting aerial
vehicles in accordance with the overall plan. This includes
coordination of artillery, air defense, air support, Army air
traffic with other users of the air space over the area of opera-
tions, and the plan of maneuver with those of lower, higher,
and adjacent units.
(3) Army pathfinder teams or personnel trained in terminal guidance
are normally used in airmobile operations when consistent with
security aspects and especially at night or during periods of
reduced visibility. Pathfinder teams are trained and equipped
to provide terminal guidance to aircraft to assist in the assembly
of troops and to reconnoiter and recommend drop or landing
zones. Personnel from the units that routinely conduct air-
mobile operations are trained for this purpose and may be used
in lieu of regular pathfinder teams.
(4) When possible, routes flown by aircraft should avoid areas
occupied by enemy forces. Ground patrols or small air-
mobile patrols are useful in determining safety of the routes
and in securing them. Pathfinders are used under certain

188 AGO 8326B

 conditions to set up and operate navigational aids to provide
accuracy in controlling flight routes.
(5) Airmobile operations normally are unsuited for the direct
assault of heavily defended objectives. Forces land at nearby
landing zones and seize the assigned objectives in dismounted
attacks. Nuclear or chemical fires can be used to reduce
enemy defenses to permit landing in selected areas (fig. 32).
(6) A daylight operation permits more effective air and artillery
support than one conducted at night and facilitates assembly

COPL

BJ 6

ILZ H/ LZ'

LZ , I J
/I, I . \Z
,/ 7) o ,/

PL

®
COPL 4

1 2 3

FCL -- FCL
EFFON
LEGEND: ORDER
* SECURITY DETACHMENTS
NOTE: NOT TO SCALE.
LINKUP POINTS

Figure 34. Scheme of maneuver, airmobile operation-schematic.

AGO 8326B 189

 of troops and equipment. However, darkness aids tactical
surprise and reduces the effectiveness of enemy fire.
d. Planning Airmobile Operations.
(1) The reverse planning sequence described in paragraph 197 for
airborne operations is followed.
(2) Brigade plans and orders for airmobile operations will normally
be simpler and in much less detail than those used for air-
borne operations. The marshalling plan for example, may
consist only of designating assembly areas and departure
sites, possibly at the unit's location, for major subordinate units.
Troops and equipment are then loaded as prescribed in unit
SOP and as dictated by the ground tactical plan.
(3) The ground tactical plan is developed as prescribed in chapters
6, 7, and 8. Assembly areas may not be required when troops
are air landed on or near the objective area since, in most
cases, unit integrity and control will be kept during both the
air movement and the landing phase. Security forces and
pathfinders, if used, land directly on, or as close to their objec-
tive as possible, to provide early security for the airmobile
operation. The brigade may control the security element on
the COP or may delegate its control to the tactical battalion
manning the FEBA. See figure 34 for a schematic presenta-
tion of a brigade scheme of maneuver for an airmobile operation.
(4) The brigade retains a small :reserve in airmobile operations in
order to influence the conduct of the battle. The reserve may
vary in size from a reinforced, rifle company to a battalion task
force, depending on the number of attached tactical battalions
of the brigade, the area to be defended, and the enemy threat.
The reserve frequently moves into the objective area in the
assault echelon, but not necessarily in the initial lift when air-
craft availability makes shuttle movement mandatory.
(5) The landing plan, when the brigade is moved by helicopter or
air landed, is relatively simple since reorganization is minimized.
(6) The air movement plan is prepared by the brigade or by battal-
ion task forces and other subordinate brigade units in coordina-
tion with the army aviation element. Control measures used
in the air movement plan include-
(a) Flight routes from battalion loading areas to the objective.
(b) Flight corridors to protect aircraft from friendly fires and for
flight control.
(c) Flight formations which insure that flight units and ser-
ials are arranged in the formation to conform with
the ground tactical plan and that flight safety precautions
are observed.
(d) Altitude at which the flights will fly.
(e) Flight speeds.

190 AGO 8326B

 (f) Movement control information, including designation and
location of flight control elements, emergency procedures, and
communication and navigation information.
(7) Alternate plans are prepared to cover contingencies resulting
when-
(a) Part of the force fails il its particular mission.
(b) Signal communication is disrupted.
(c) Weather conditions or enemy action prevents the use of
designated routes or landing zones or interferes with landings.
(d) Withdrawal from the objective area becomes necessary or
desirable.
(8) Selection of the hour of landing is influenced by-
(a) Mission of the brigade.
(b) Enemy situation and capabilities (air and ground).
(c) Predicted weather.
(d) Visibility (day and night).
(e) Availability of artillery, air, and nuclear fires.
(f) Availability of ground and aerial vehicles.
e. Conduct of the Airmobile Assault.
(1) Control of the loading, takeoff, and movement of brigade units
is decentralized, usually at battalion level. Flights arrive at
the IP at the designated time in the prescribed formation, and
proceed along flight routes to the RP. Upon reaching the RP,
flight units leave the air column and proceed to their respective
landing zones. Aircraft unload rapidly and return by flights.
Pathfinders provide orientation for troops and assist rapid
aircraft departure at the landing zone. If the landing is
observed and taken under fire by the enemy, the brigade or
battalion commander may decide to use alternate plans to
avoid excessive losses of personnel and aircraft.
(2) Units reorganize quickly and conduct the ground attack to
seize objectives in area.

199. Withdrawal by Air

a. General.
(1) A withdrawal by air is an operation in which all or a part of the
brigade disengages from the enemy and is moved by air to
another location. The withdrawal may be forced by enemy
action or made voluntarily.
(2) All three brigades have the capability of withdrawing by air.
However, withdrawal of the mechanized brigade is limited to
personnel and light equipment only.
(3) Local air superiority is desirable for a successful withdrawal by
air, during daylight periods, but a small force relatively close to
the line of contact may withdraw without air superiority by
AGO 8326B 191
 taking advantage of darkness or other conditions of poor
visibility.
(4) A force withdrawn by air normally may move to an assembly
area behind friendly lines or directly to another battle area.
(5) Army transport aviation, arid/or other military aircraft may be
employed to move the withdrawing force.
(6) For a detailed discussion of withdrawals by air, see FM 7-20 and
FM 57-10.
b. Command and Control.
(1) The commander ordering the withdrawal provides the air trans-
port means, establishes a general time limit for executing the
operation, designates the location to which the force will with-
draw, and prescribes the action it will take in the new position.
(2) To insure continuity of action and concerted effort in planning
and conducting the withdrawal, responsibility and authority
for all forces and all actions in the perimeter must be vested in a
single commander. Within the bounds imposed by the require-
ments of the situation, the commander ordering the withdrawal
provides maximum support and grants full freedom of action to
commanders in the perimeter.
c. Planningfor the Withdrawal.
(1) Brigade and subordinate units plan a withdrawal by air in as
great a detail as time permits. Brigade normally allocates
available airlift to subordinate units, and specifies when the
withdrawal begins and ends. Brigade plans rely heavily on
unit SOP to reduce the amount of details in orders.
(2) When an operation involves a high degree of risk and tbere is a
probability that a withdrawal by air may be necessary, plans
for a withdrawal by air are made concurrently with the plan of
operation. These plans are revised and kept current as the
situation develops.
(3) Commanders and staffs at brigade and battalion levels make as
thorough a reconnaissance as possible consistent with time
limitations and security.
d. Timing of the Operation. The commander of the withdrawing force
selects the time of withdrawal within limits imposed by the commander
ordering the withdrawal. Periods of reduced visibility aid in deception
and maintenance of secrecy, and enhance the chances of achieving tactical
surprise for a withdrawal by air. A force withdrawing in daylight, under
direct enemy observation and fire, wil]l sustain heavy casualties; however,
the situation may require a daylight withdrawal. A decision regarding
the best time for withdrawal can be made only after careful consideration
of the following factors:
(1) The mission assigned.
(2) The relative effectiveness of enemy and friendly air.
(3) Enemy observation.

192 AGO 3326B

 (4) The proximity and effectiveness of enemy forces.
(5) The enemy's capability for placing fires on loading areas.
(6) The difficulty of control of ground forces and aircraft at night
and under conditions of reduced visibility.
(7) The capability to deny the enemy observation by the use of
smoke.
(8) The capability to neutralize the enemy by fire.
e. Organization of the Withdrawal. When the entire brigade is to be
withdrawn by air, the brigade commander normally designates a brigade
covering force to cover the withdrawal. This force is usually a balanced
task force, and operates under brigade control. The covering force is
tailored to provide minimum essential forces required to accomplish the
mission. If only a battalion or smaller size unit is to be withdrawn, the
brigade commander may specify the size of the detachments left in contact
by the withdrawing unit (fig. 35).
f. Fire Support. The requirement for supporting fires increases as the
forces withdraw and the capability to repel the enemy diminishes. Em-
phasis is placed upon nuclear and nonnucelar fires from fire support
agencies, including close air support, armed army aircraft, artillery and
naval gunfire. If a portion of the perimeter is under attack or is threat-
ened, a large portion of the fire support units may be required to remain
with the covering force.
g. Reserves. The brigade reserve may range in size from a company
task force to a battalion task force, and is given missions that will assist
in the withdrawal of the main body; i.e., blocking enemy penetrations, or
counterattacking. Its withdrawal is normally covered by covering force;
or, if small in size, the reserve may be attached to the covering force upon
withdrawal of the remainder of the brigade.
h. Loading. Withdrawing forces must emphasize speed and provide
for maximum coordination between the arrival of units in loading areas
and the arrival, loading, and departure of aircraft. Aircraft on the
ground for an excessive period invite destruction by enemy fires and
failure of the operation. Routine loading instructions are included in
unit SOP's. The amount of detail included in the plan is determined by
the size of the operation, experience of personnel, and the time available.
The following may be included:
(1) Schedule and priorities for loading.
(2) Designation of loading areas.
(3) Designation of and instructions for loading control personnel.
(4) Schedule for movement of units to loading areas.
i. Landing and Loading Areas. General landing and loading areas
are usually designated by the brigade. They are as close to unit battle
positions as the terrain and enemy situation will permit. To achieve
maximum speed in the landing, loading, and takeoff, and to provide
passive protection against mass destruction weapons, multiple landing and
AGO 8326B 193
loading areas are desirable. Factors to be considered in selecting the
location and number of landing and loading areas are-
(1) Landing area requirements for the types of aircraft to be used.
(2) Number of aircraft and rate of landing.
(3) Availability of facilities for improvement of landing areas.
(4) Availability of aircraft control facilities.
(5) Availability of dispersed parking and loading sites.
(6) Protection from enemy observation and fires.
j. Loading Control. Loading control personnel from brigade and sub-
ordinate units are provided in each 'loading area to summon and guide
units from the assembly areas to the loading areas and to expedite load-
ing. The actions of all loading control personnel are coordinated by a
loading control officer designated by the commander. Constant liaison
is maintained between the loading control officer and the air movement
control facility to maintain balance between the arrival of troops and
aircraft in loading areas.
SMALL SECURITY ELEMENTS ALONG OBSTACLE WILL COME LINDER CONTROL OF THE BRIGADE
COVERING FORCE UPON WITHDRAWAL OF THE MAIN BODY.

LOADING

FEBA RESERVE

LOADING
AREA _FEBA

) FEBA

NOTE: NOT TO SCALE.

TF n .7IL O0

0 BRIGADE COVERING FORC,;

O O
0 0

Figure 35. Infantry brigade of four battalions withdrawal by air.

194 AGO 3326B

 k. Air Movement Control.
(1) The air movement control required to insure precision timing
and minimum delay in the withdrawal depends upon the number
of aircraft involved, landing facilities, and visibility. Control
facilities are usually established by the brigade.
(2) In withdrawals employing Air Force aircraft, the Air Force
provides movement control and control and support detach-
ments at landing areas.
(3) In withdrawals employing Army transport aviation, the
brigade commander may appoint a movement control officer to
direct the movement of aircraft and to coordinate with loading
control personnel. Pathfinders provide terminal guidance as
required.
1. Deception and Secrecy. The brigade takes all possible deceptive
measures to cover the withdrawal and to hamper the enemy's intelligence
effort. Supporting fires, including air strikes on enemy positions, may
be employed to divert attention from transport aircraft.
m. Administrative Support.
(1) Plans are made for the early disposition of heavy equipment
and supplies. The quantities to be evacuated depend on the
availability of aircraft and the amount of time for outloading.
Equipment and supplies that cannot be airlifted, other than
medical, are destroyed.
(2) Adequate ammunition and supplies are dumped on position to
sustain the covering force and/or the detachments left in
contact and supporting troops.
(3) The evacuation of casualties may present a major logistical
problem. Casualties are given high priority and are evacuated
early in the operation. A detachment of medical personnel
remains with the covering force and/or detachments left in
contact.
n. Communication. The covering force takes over existing wire lines
and continues, within its capabilities, to maintain normal radio
traffic after the main body withdraws. Strict communication security
is enforced to preserve secrecy. Clear text radio messages concerning
the withdrawal are forbidden. Wire and messenger are the primary
means of communication in the loading areas and between loading
control personnel and the command post.
o. Conduct of the Withdrawal.
(1) The brigade covering force takes over defense of the perimeter
by replacing COP forces on their positions; or by a relief in
place; or, if the enemy situation permits and adequate space
is available in the perimeter, by occupying positions through
which elements of the brigade main body withdraw. In
exceptional circumstances, covering force may be created by
AGO 3326B 195
 attachment and detachment utilizing units already in position
on the FEBA and from the reserve. The covering force may
take over responsibility for the defense of the entire perimeter
simultaneously, or this shift of responsibility may be time phased
with the air movement plan to permit units to remain in
position and begin their withdrawal at the latest practicable
time before their scheduled arrival in the loading area.
(2) Supporting fires, close air support, mines, and obstacles are
fully exploited to prevent the enemy from pursuing the with-
drawing force. Smoke may be used to obscure enemy observa-
tion.
(3) During a night withdrawal, emphasis is placed on secrecy and
the simulation of normal activity as long as possible.
(4) On arrival in the loading area, units complete preparations for
loading and form into plane-load groups. These groups move
to the loading area when summoned by the loading control
personnel. Tactical loading may be sacrificed for speed and
maximum use of the capacity of aircraft.
(5) As soon as the remainder of the brigade completes its withdrawal,
the covering force begins its withdrawal. The withdrawal of
the covering force is under brigade control and is conducted as
prescribed by FM's 7-11 and 7-20.

Section III. LINKUP OPERATIONS

200. General
A linkup involves the juncture of two converging ground forces. It
may be conducted as a part of the following operations: airmobile or
joint airborne operations; an attack to assist, or the breakout of, an
encircled force; an attack to join a force of infiltrators; or in the conver-
gence of separate forces. The brigade may participate in linkup opera-
tions as a part of a larger force or it may conduct operations within its
own resources which require linkup.
201. Planning for Linkup
Planning for linkup must insure close coordination of the efforts of the
linkup force and the force with which linkup is made (the stationary
force). Plans are prepared and coordinated in advance and include the
following (fig. 36).
a. The command relationship of forces involved in a linkup operation
must be established prior to the operation to insure a clear delineation
of responsibilities. The stationary force may be attached to the linkup
force or the linkup force may be attached to the stationary force. In
addition, both forces may come or remain under control of a higher
commander. The headquarters directing the linkup establishes the

196 AGO 3326B

command relationship including the time or conditions under which
command will be assumed.
b. Command and staff liaison is accomplished before and during the
operation. Information and plans are exchanged early in the planning
phase. As linkup becomes imminent, additional liaison personnel may
be exchanged to insure coordination of fires and of any changes in tactical
plans; army aviation may be used to facilitate this exchange.

LINKUP POINTS / \

/ I \C FCL
FCL / \ - EFF ON
EFF ON , 3 5 -- ORDER
ORDER \
/ _ _

NFL 6L NS \
EFF ON LINKUP NFL 6

~~~~~~~NF
~~L 5
EFF ON ORDER 4 NFL 5
ok1 N % EFF ON ORDER

NFL 4 NFL
4
ORDER EFF ON

NFL 3 NFL 3

(SURFACE
LINKUP
FORCE)

NOTES:

1. A BOMB LINE WOULD NORMALLY BE LOCATED AROUND THE STATIONARY FORCE IN

EARLY STAGES OF THE OPERATION. WHEN LINKUP IS IMMINENT, THE BOMB LINE
MAY BE MOVED BEYOND THE STATIONARY FORCE.

2. NFL OF LINKUP FORCE WILL BEMOVED FORWARD AS REQUIRED.

3. NFL 6 BECOMES EFFECTIVE FOR AND APPLIES TO BOTH FORCES AFTER LINKUP.
ADDITIONAL FIRE CONTROL MEASURES SUCH AS BOUNDARIES WILL BE ESTABLISHED
AT THAT TIME.

Figure 36. Coordinationfor linkup-schematic.

AGO 3326B 197

 c. A system of mutual recognition is devised to preclude the possibility
of friendly troops firing on one another. This system may include:
pyrotechnics, arm bands, panels, vehicle markings, lights of a distinctive
pattern and/or color, colored smoke, infrared and radar devices, arm and
hand signals, and use of a password.
d. Communication plans are coordinated to include establishment of
nets and exchange of call signs, authentication procedures, radio fre-
quencies, SOI, SSI, and of radio equipment, if required.
e. Schemes of maneuver are exchanged to include current and planned
locations of friendly elements. Control measures are established in
advance to include use of linkup points, boundaries, axes of advance and
delineation of objectives, if appropriate. Linkup points are selected at
easily recognizable points at which physical contact between the two
forces is expected to occur. Sufficient linkup points are established to
accommodate possible changes in the scheme of maneuver. Checkpoints
and phase lines may also be used to determine by reference the location
of one or both forces and thereby facilitate control.
f. Coordination of fires is accomplished by exchange of fire support
plans and by use of control measures such as bomblines, no-fire lines,
fire coordination lines, and nuclear safety lines. Definitions and use of
fire control measures are discussed in chapter 4.
g. Assistance from the stationary force is provided to the linkup force
to facilitate linkup aMid reduce the time of passage through positions
of the stationary force. Obstacles are removed, where appropriate,
immediately prior to linkup and lanes through barriers are opened.
Guides provided by the stationary force assist in traffic control through
and within the defense positions. The linkup force must be fully in-
formed of all minefields and other obstacles in front of and within the
stationary force defense sector.
h. Actions to be taken following linkup are established in advance. The
linkup' force may reinforce or assume the defense' of the area, conduct a
coordinated attack with the stationary force, or pass through or around
the stationary force and continue the attack.
i. Alternate plans are considered in view of the possibility that the
linkup force may be unable to reach the stationary force in the pre-
scribed time. The plans should provide for fire support, close air support,
and aerial resupply for the stationary force for such a contingency.
202. Administrative Support
Administrative support requirements may be greater than those for an
ordinary attack if the linkup force must anticipate and provide for the
needs of the stationary force. Planning should provide for the possible
use of aviation to perform such missions as resupply of the stationary
force, and evacuation of casualties.

198 AGO S326B

 Section IV. AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS
203. General
An amphibious operation is an attack launched from the sea by naval
and landing forces embarked in ships and craft, involving a landing on a
hostile shore.
a. The brigade, when appropriately reinforced, is organized and
equipped to conduct amphibious operations. The brigade participates in
an amphibious operation as the army component, or an element thereof,
and conducts its operations within the principles, doctrine and procedures
for unified and joint operations as established by the Joint Chiefs of Staff.
b. As an entity, the typical amphibious operation includes planning;
embarkation of land forces and equipment in naval ships; amphibious task
force rehearsals; movement to, or from, the objective area (includes
ocean and land area); final preparation of the objective; assault landing,
or withdrawal, in landing craft, amphibious vehicles and aircraft (pri-
marily helicopters) of the land forces with accompanying supplies and
equipment; and joint service support of the landing or withdrawing force
until termination of the amphibious operation. The amphibious opera-
tion may include integrated, small scale airborne operations employing
shore-to-shore parachute or air landed forces and supplies and equipment.
c. Detailed information on the conduct of amphibious operations is
contained in FM's 31-5, 31-12, 31-13, and 60-30.
204. Types of Amphibious Operations
The brigade may participate in any of the following types of amphibious
operations:
a. An amphibious attack involving invasions to obtain lodgment areas
from which to carry out further combat operations ashore are: seizure
operations to obtain advanced air, naval, or logistical base areas; or
operations to deny the enemy use of the seized areas.
b. Demonstrations to prompt the enemy into adopting courses of
action which are unfavorable to him.
c. Raids to destroy selected enemy installations, to obtain infor-
mation, or to capture or evacuate individuals or materiel.
d. Reconnaissance by minor elements, involving stealth rather than
force of arms, to secure information. It may be followed by a planned
withdrawal.
e. Withdrawals for the purpose of redeployment or for evacuation of
objective areas..
f. Show of force or other missions in situations short of war as part
of a U.S., Allied or UN force.

205. Organization for Embarkation and Command Afloat

In amphibious operations, the division is organized as an embarkation
group. The brigade will constitute an embarkation unit when part of
AGO 3326B 199
the division, or an embarkation group when operating as an independent
army unit. Embarkation groups and units are formed to assist in the
planning, preparation, and movement to the objective area and to inte-
grate joint command and control facilities and multiple service resources.

206. Operations Ashore

The tactical battalions of the brigade, appropriately reinforced, form
the assault landing teams of the assault echelons of the force. The
ground tactics during the operations ashore are substantially the same
as for any ground operation.

Section V. ANTIGUERRILLA OPERATIONS

207. General
a. Guerrilla warfare is conducted primarily by irregular forces organized
on a paramilitary or military basis to attack, harass, and divert the
enemy. As a normal part of its tactical operations, the brigade protects
itself against guerrilla attack. Enemy guerrilla operations are usually
associated with other resistance activities such as: passive resistance,
espionage, subversion, sabotage, diversion, reprisal, and propaganda.
b. The brigade may conduct operations to reduce or eliminate large
scale guerrilla activity as part of the division or independently using all
or part of its attached elements.
c. Antiguerrilla operations which the brigade may perform include-
(1) Offensive action to destroy or capture guerrilla forces and
underground elements supporting them.
(2) Providing security for vital military and civil installations.
(3) Eliminating bypassed enemy conventional forces whose actions
resemble guerrilla actions.
(4) Securing and maintaining supply lines.
(5) Denying guerrilla forces all sources of supply, reinforcement,
communication and recruiting including the denial of civilian
support to the enemy guerrilla forces.
d. The brigade may also be directed to conduct operations in con-
junction with U.S. sponsored guerrillas operating in its area of influence.
Normally operations of such guerrilla forces are coordinated by special
forces detachments, but the brigade may have to deal directly with
the guerrilla force.
e. For detailed information on antiguerrilla operations, see FM's 31-15,
31-21, and 31-21A.
208. Basic Considerations for Antiguerrilla Operations
a. In order to function effectively, guerrilla forces normally require
four essential elements: a secure base of operations, a source of supply,
an intelligence system, and adequate communications. In an anti-

200 AGO 3326B

guerrilla operation, the actions involve reduction or elimination of one
or more of these essential elements.
b. Guerrilla operations normally require civilian support, gained
willingly or through coercion, in order to succeed. Specific action must
therefore be taken to eliminate such support; consideration and protection
for the general populace must be an adjunct to such action, since guerrilla
forces will frequently resort to terroristic attacks to elicit support.
Coordination with civilian agencies will assist in attaining these objectives.
The division civil affairs officer will assist in such coordination.
c. In their operations, guerrilla forces capitalize on stealth, surprise,
speed, violence, rapid withdrawal, and dispersal. Hit and run tactics
are employed and decisive engagement is normally avoided because
guerrilla forces do not have the capability to fight conventional forces
on even terms. Guerrilla forces do not follow an established pattern of
operations and, therefore, are difficult to find, fix, and destroy or capture.
d. In the conduct of antiguerrilla operations, every effort is made to
gain information of guerrilla activities. Maximum use is made of aerial
reconnaissance, combat and reconnaissance patrols, and information
obtained from captured or surrendered guerrillas and reliable civilian
sources. Raids and ambushes are conducted to keep guerrilla forces in
a constant state of alarm for their security, to lower morale, to prevent
rest, and to hinder their conduct of operations.

209. Sequence of Antiguerrilla Operations

a. The operations against guerrilla forces normally follow a logical
sequence as indicated below-
(1) Establishing combat bases in areas of guerrilla activity.
(2) Establishing control over civil populace.
(3) Carrying out offensive operations against guerrilla forces.
(4) Conducting psychological operations to separate the guerrilla
from his civilian support and weaken the will of the guerrilla
elements.
b. Normally, the procedure in (1) through (4) above will be conducted
concurrently as the situation allows.

210. Establishment of Combat Bases and Static Security

Posts
a. The brigade commander will normally be assigned an area of
responsibility when he is given the mission of combating guerrillas. He
usually further subdivides his area into battalion areas of responsibility.
The battalions then organize strong combat bases, normally at least of
company size, within their assigned areas. Forces are grouped in
sufficient strength to prevent defeat in detail by guerrilla forces. See FM
7-20.
b. Security, including use of warning and surveillance devices, is
established for installations, equipment and troops. Since the guerrilla
AGO 8326B 201
force has limited supplies, emphasis is placed on safeguarding military
equipment, food, ammunition, and weapons.

211. Establishing Control Over Civil Populace

Positive steps are taken to reduce any existing sympathy and deny
support for the guerrilla forces. This can be accomplished by having
friendly troops arrive unexpectedly at villages; by enforcing strict troop
discipline and conduct; and by establishing close liaison and coordina-
tion with civil authorities. Every effort is made to isolate the guerrilla
force from its source of supply, reinforcement, and recruiting. Surprise
attacks supported by an active psychological operation campaign
conducted against located guerrilla forces will encourage the populace to
resist.

212. Major Offensive Actions; Against Guerrilla Forces

When guerrilla forces are located or reported, offensive actions are
carried out against them. Those forces willing to fight in open battle
are isolated to prevent escape and are immediately attacked; those
which avoid open battle are forced by a series of police and military
actions into areas which permit encirclement. Once surrounded, such
forces are destroyed by continuous determined attack.

213. Types of Offensive Action

a. General. The major offensive actions taken against enemy guerrillas
may be broadly classified as the encirclement, attack, and pursuit.
The brigade conducts such operations independently or as part of a
larger force.
b. Encirclement. A sudden and complete encirclement of guerrilla
forces is the most effective method of destroying them. For this reason,
secrecy and security are stressed in movement to the line of encircle-
ment (fig. 37). Normally, this iss expeditiously accomplished; pre-
ferably during periods of limited visibility. Units organize the line
of encirclement and then progressively contract the encirclement and
send patrols forward to locate the guerrilla forces. Once the enemy has
discovered the encirclement, prompt and violent reaction may be expected
as he probes for gaps or weak points in the defense. Friendly forces
continue the contraction of the encirclement and take appropriate
offensive action as required by the situation. Thorough combing of
every area, including those most inaccessible, is mandatory. When
enemy resistance is strong in the area of encirclement, a task force may
be employed to drive directly into the objective area while the encircling
forces support its attack. Airborne forces will frequently be employed
in the conduct of a surprise attack on the redoubt area. In this and all
encirclement maneuver, maximum use is made of indirect fires and
tactical air support.
c. Attack. When time, inadequate forces, or the nature of the terrain

202 AGO 3326B

do not allow use of large scale encirclement, the brigade may conduct an
attack on located guerrilla forces by using the normal offensive maneuvers
in conjunction with ambush patrols on likely escape routes to interdict
the guerrilla force. Helicopterborne troops should be employed when-
ever feasible. Planning and conduct of such an operation is similar to
that discussed in chapter 6. However, emphasis is placed on secrecy in
order to achieve surprise in the attack.

LINE OF ENCIRCLEMENT
(PHASE LINE ALFA)

(PROVIDES BRIGADE RESERVE)

NOTES: (1) TROOPS MOVE QUICKLY AND SILENTLY TO POSITIONS ON THE ENCIRCLEMENT
(PHASE LINE ALFA) TO ACHIEVE SURPRISE.

(2) ON ORDER, STRONG PATROLS ARE SENT FORWARD AND THE LINE OF ENCIRCLE-
MENT IS CONTRACTED

(3) UPON REACHING PHASE LINE BRAVO, TROOP MOVEMENT MUST BE CLOSELY
COORDINATED TO PRECLUDE FIRING INTO OTHER UNIT AREAS. A TASK
FORCE MAY BE SENT INTO AREA TO CLEAR OUT REMAINING GUERRILLA FORCES.

(4) IF ELEMENTS OF THE ARMORED CAVALRY SQUADRON ARE ATTACHED TO THE

BRIGADE THEY MAY BE USED TO PATROL THE AREA IN REAR OF THE LINE
OF ENCIRCLEMENT TO LOCATE AND KILL OR CAPTURE GUERRILLAS WHO HAVE
ESCAPED THROUGH THE LINE. ELEMENTS MAY ALSO BEUSED ON RECONNAIS-
SANCE MISSIONS WITHIN THE ENCIRCLED AREA.

Figure37. Infantry brigade in encirclement operationagainst guerrillaforces.

AGO 3326B 203

 d. Pursuit. The brigade, or elements thereof, may be required to
pursue guerrilla forces after an attack or following breakout from an
unsuccessful encirclement. Planning and conduct of the pursuit is
similar to that discussed in chapter 6. Because of the unstable nature of
this type operation, rigid fire control measures must be established.
Emphasis is placed on aerial and ground surveillance to insure that enemy
forces do not escape or set up an ambush. Airborne forces are frequently
used in cutting off guerrilla escape routes.
e. Objective. The objective of an attack on guerrilla forces is unlikely
to be an easily identifiable terrain feature. The objective is the enemy
force, which is usually a poorly defined, fleeting target.

214. Administrative Support

a. If the brigade's area of responsibility is large, the division support
element for the brigade may be augmented and attached to the brigade.
In turn, the brigade may attach such supporting elements to battalions
who are operating at considerable distance from the brigade. The pro-
vision of supplies and evacuation of casualties may pose serious problems
because of the distances involved and the nature of antiguerrilla opera-
tions. Protected convoys may be required for supply trains and medical
evacuation. Emphasis will be placed on aerial resupply and aerial
medical evacuation. Conditions may dictate frequent use of hand-
carrying parties for some resupply operations. When practicable, local
civilian labor is used.
b. Within the restrictions of international law, particularly as expressed
in Article 151, Chapter 7, DA Pam 27-1, maximum use is made of non-
U.S. forces and personnel for all activities in which they may be profitably
employed. These include combat operations, security of the civil
populace and critical facilities and installations, and use as guides and
interpreters.

Section VI. RIVER CROSSINGS

215. General
a. The purpose of a river crossing is to pass over the river obstacle as
rapidly and as efficiently as possible and continue an attack to destroy
the enemy or seize an assigned objective which will protect the crossing
of the remainder of the force. It is an offensive operation differing from
other offensive actions primarily in the application of techniques. How-
ever, it usually requires specialized crossing equipment and trained
personnel. For detailed considerations of river crossing operations, see
FM 31-60.
b. Whenever possible, a crossing is accomplished on a broad front to
facilitate dispersion. However, crossing sites are usually limited in
number, thus resulting in the canalization of attacking forces. Plans
must therefore include provisions for control of forces on the near shore

204 AGO 3326B

and rapid dispersion on the far shore, both in width and depth, to avoid
presenting a lucrative target to enemy fires. Airborne forces may be
employed in conjunction with a river crossing to seize crossing areas or
crossing sites (par. 227).
216. Types of River Crossings
Attacks of river lines are classified as hasty or deliberate. All crossings
are initially planned as hasty crossings with contingent plans for a delib-
erate operation.
a. A crossing is termed "hasty" when it is conducted as a continuation
of an attack by forces which advance to the river line and cross with a
minimum loss of momentum. Since a hasty crossing is characterized by
speed, surprise, and a minimum concentration of personnel and equip-
ment, it is less vulnerable to enemy counteraction. Once a hasty crossing
is effected at one or more sites, all forces are employed over the obstacle
to build up forces in the bridgehead area.
b. A deliberate crossing is characterized by some delay, more detailed
preparation and planning at all levels, and the buildup and employment of
extensive and specialized river crossing means. A deliberate crossing also
entails neutralization of enemy positions in the zone of attack on the far
shore.
217. Reconnaissance
a. Detailed information of the enemy situation and the nature of the
river is essential. Since even small enemy forces can seriously interfere
with a crossing, the commander executing the operation should have
detailed knowledge of the location of any enemy force that can place
observed fire on the river. The location of enemy reserves also assumes
great importance because of the initial vulnerability of the crossing
force to counterattack, especially by armor. Reconnaissance is there-
fore directed toward locating these enemy units so that their effectiveness
may be reduced by nuclear and/or nonnuclear fires at the time of attack.
Employing Army aircraft for radar, visual, and photographic reconnais-
sance is a fast and effective means of obtaining information of the enemy
and area of operations. All possible landing areas should be noted in
case a diversionary attack by airborne forces is desired in conjunction
with the crossing attack. Aerial reconnaissance should be kept to the
minimum necessary to accomplish the mission and should not reveal the
crossing sites by remaining in the immediate vicinity.
b. Much information of the river is usually available from engineer and
civilian sources. Nonetheless, the brigade may frequently be required
to reconnoiter for its own crossing sites.
218. Planning the River Crossing
Considerations for planning a river crossing are essentially the same as
AGO 3326B 205
those discussed in planning for an attack in chapter 6. However, addi-
tional emphasis is required in certain areas as indicated below:
a. General Considerations. Planning must provide for speed of opera-
tions, maximum dispersion, and the seizure of deep objectives. If trans-
portation equipment such as APC and/or aircraft is available in quantity,
it may be possible to achieve all of these aims. If crossing means are
limited to boats and footbridges, resulting initially in a lack of mobility
on the far bank, closer objectives may have to be seized, and the entire
initial concept may have to be based. on seizing and protecting a limited
bridgehead until bridges and ferries suitable for carrying heavy equipment
can be built. Smoke may be used to deny the enemy observation and the
ability to visually adjust fires on crossing areas. Deception measures,
including.use of dummy smoke screens, may be used to confuse the enemy
as to the exact crossing sites.
b. Long Range Planning. While every attempt must be made to seize
intact bridges over rivers which form :major obstacles in a unit's zone, or to
traverse them in hasty crossings, planning to make deliberate crossings
over them should begin as early as practicable. Long range planning for
deliberate crossings over major rivers is usually initiated by division or
higher levels and the brigade begins its planning as soon as it becomes
apparent that the brigade may be employed in the crossing.
c. Crossing Sites. The following are desirable characteristics for a
crossing site, regardless of whether the crossing is made by vehicle or boat:
(1) A far shore that is undefended or lightly held. However, a
strongly held position may be neutralized or destroyed with
fires to obtain a desirable crossing site.
(2) Terrain on the near and far bank which facilitates rapid move-
ment forward and early seizure of key terrain features.
(3) A moderate river current (not over 9.6 Kmph for M59, and 6.6
Kmph for M113 APC).
(4) An unobstructed water area.
(5) Suitable banks for entry and exit.
(6) Sites suitable for ferries and bridges to carry tanks and other
heavy equipment.
(7) A bend in the river line toward the attacker in areas where
nuclear weapons are not available to neutralize enemy river
defenses.
(8) Dominating terrain including observation and fields of fire on
the near bank superior to that of the far bank.
(9) A narrow crossing site to facilitate use of AVLB, if available.
(10) Covered approaches, assembly areas, and attack positions.
d. Time of Attack. A time of attack is selected, if possible, that
allows units to move forward in darkness but reach the far bank at day-
break. Care should be taken that repeated use of dawn attacks does not
eliminate surprise.
e. Deception. Surprise is essential in a river crossing operation. As-

206 AGO 3326B

sault units should be able to reach the far bank and launch their attacks
without major enemy interference. Feints and demonstrations are used
to draw the enemy away from attack points and permit the assault units
to get a firm foothold on the far bank.
f. Fire Support. The fire support plan is designed to permit an un-
interrupted movement across the river and far enough forward to allow
units to obtain dispersion. If' available, nuclear weapons are placed on
the far bank to neutralize or destroy enemy forces that can interfere with
the crossing. Enemy reserves that can interfere with the crossing are
taken under fire. Smoke is planned against enemy observation posts.
In the early stages of the attack, tanks may provide overwatching fire to
facilitate the crossing. Supporting weapons displace across the river
early enough to insure continuous support to the attacking units.

219. Conduct of River Crossing

a. Units move from positions well in rear of the river to the near edge,
which is the line of departure. Every effort is made to maintain a con-
tinuous flow of personnel with no appreciable stopping on the near bank.
Crossing of the river is as rapid as possible. Units do not attempt
extensive reorganization on reaching the far bank, but move rapidly away
from the river to eliminate remaining enemy and to gain dispersion. As
the attack progresses, reorganization is continuous until, eventually, the
units are reconstituted in the formation necessary to continue the attack.
The attack then proceeds as described in chapter 6.
b. The reserves remain on the near bank until sufficient ground has
been gained on the far bank for their employment. They are prepared
to move to the far bank quickly if the enemy's countermeasures threaten
the success of the operation. The brigade reserve may be a tank heavy
task force, providing means are available for crossing which can be used
to exploit any success on the far bank and to seize deep objectives re-
quired to expand and secure the bridgehead.
c. All available crossing means are used to achieve maximum speed in
the crossing and the subsequent exploitation of the bridgehead, and to
reduce the criticality of any one crossing means. Army aircraft, particu-
larly helicopters, are capable of moving fire support units, reserves, and
supplies to speed the buildup on the far bank and should be considered.

Section VII. RAIDS, FEINTS, AND DEMONSTRATIONS

220. Raids
a. General. A raid is an attack within an enemy position to accomplish
a specific mission, with no intention of holding the invaded territory. A
raid may be executed within or beyond supporting distance of the parent
unit, in daylight or in darkness. When the area to be raided is beyond
supporting distance, the raiding force may be organized and operated as
AGO 3326B 207
an independent task force. Raids may be conducted dismounted, motor-
ized, mechanized, or by airborne means (pars. 193-199).
b. Purpose of Raids.
(1) Raids are designed primarily to capture prisoners, gain specific
information of the enemy, or to capture or destroy specific
enemy material and installations. They may be conducted to
seize or destroy an objective, but not to hold it for an extended
period. They are also used frequently to exploit nuclear strikes
forward of the friendly battle area. In this operation, the
raiding force sweeps into the area and eliminates remaining
enemy personnel. Attack planning considerations for raids are
similar to those described in chapter 6.
(2) Raids may be conducted by any size force. The brigade com-.
mander may be ordered to conduct raids by higher headquarters
or may conduct them on his own initiative. It is often desirable
for the force to be highly mobile and to be composed of all arms.
A task force with the battalion as its nucleus is particularly
suitable for a brigade raiding force.
(3) Since permanent retention of terrain in the enemy area is not
contemplated, a raiding force plan of withdrawal must be made
in advance. Easily identifiable rallying points should be
designated for use in case unforeseen situations do not permit
the original plan of withdrawal to be executed.
221. Feints
a. General. A feint is a shallow, limited objective attack to mislead
the enemy by drawing the enemy away from the main attack. It may
vary in size from a small raid to a sizable secondary attack. A feint
may affect the ultimate development of the enemy force. It is most
effective when the enemy has a large reserve, when there are several
feasible courses of action open to the attacker, and when the force em-
ployed is of adequate strength and composition to cause the desired
enemy reaction. Planning and conduct of feints are similar to those of
other offensive operations.
b. Purpose. A feint is designed to cause the enemy to react in a manner
predetermined by the attacker. The attacker may desire the enemy to
react physically or to confuse him causing his reevaluation of the at-
tacker's capabilities and intentions. Enemy reactions which draw his
defenses away from the main attack include: employing his reserves im-
properly; using his supporting fires con the feint rather than on the main
attack; and revealing his defensive fires.
222. Demonstrations
a. General. A demonstration is an operation designed to deceive the
enemy by a show of force in an area where a decision is not being sought.
It differs from a feint in that there is no advance against the enemy

208 AGO 3326B

The basic considerations and techniques of planning other attacks also
ahpplies to demonstrations.
b. Characteristics. Fewer troops are required for a demonstration
than for a feint, and the force involved need not necessarily be balanced.
Withdrawal of demonstrating forces and their subsequent employment
elsewhere are possible. Demonstrating forces can use extensive fires,
smoke, sonic devices, and decoy equipment. A demonstration lacks the
realism of a feint and is more susceptible to identification by the enemy
as a deception. It is not a positive means of causing the enemy to react.
c. Use. Demonstrations are particularly effective when the enemy and
demonstrating forces are separated by an obstacle. These can be used
to good advantage to depict the buildup for operations such as river
crossings or attack of fortified areas.

Section VIII. COMBAT AT FORTIFIED AND BUILT-UP AREAS

223. General
Combat in fortified and built-up areas is discussed in detail in FM
31-50.

224. Combat in Fortified Areas

a. Attack. Whenever possible, fortified positions are contained by
minimum forces while the main force continues the advance to seize more
distant and decisive objectives. Reduction of a fortified area may in-
clude a direct assault, siege or an attack from the rear.
b. Special Considerations. The special considerations in the attack of
a fortified area are-
(1) The defender is anchored to his fortified position, thus severely
limiting his maneuver ability. The attacker on the other hand
is forced to mass and present a profitable target to enemy fires.
(2) Nuclear and CB weapons facilitate the destruction and neutrali-
zation of fortified areas. Surface and subsurface nuclear
bursts can create gaps in the fortified area or isolate sections
of it; however, when a surface or subsurface burst is used, the
fallout produced may cause operations in the area to be im-
practicable for some time.
(3) Detailed intelligence is required upon which to base training,
rehearsals, and plans.
(4) Planning and preparation are centralized, but the execution is
decentralized to the point that the reinforced infantry platoon
is the basic assault unit.
(5) The area selected for penetration must be isolated. Nuclear
fires are particularly well suited to this task. Smoke isolates
individual strongpoints from the observed fires of other forti-
fications. Indirect fire weapons destroy camouflage, neutralize
AGO 3326B 209
 and destroy enemy field fortifications and artillery, fire on
enemy counterattacks, and screen the movement of as-
sault troops.
(6) The assault elements are tailored to their specific missions and
are specifically trained and rehearsed on replicas of the position.
Their principal weapons are demolitions, flamethrowers, and
direct fire weapons.
(7) Reserves follow closely behind the assault echelon to exploit
the penetration, maintain the continuity of the attack, or
defend critical areas against counterattack.
(8) Airborne forces may be used in conjunction with other attacks
of the fortified area principally to block the movement of
large general reserves and to attack the fortifications from the
rear.
(9) Unless required for use by the attacker, captured enemy
armament and fortifications are moved or destroyed to prevent
their use if recaptured.
c. Defense. Considerations in the defense of a fortified area include-
(1) Fortified positions permit an economy of force in the forward
defensive area. This releases proportionately larger forces for
the reserve.
(2) The reserve must be provided suitable mobility and be aggres-
sively used if the defense is to be successful.
(3) Fortifications are organized in depth and provide for all-round
defense. Field fortifications supplement the fortified area.
(4) The defense is conducted in the same manner as set forth in
chapter 7.
225. Combat in Built-Up Areas
a. Attack.
(1) When possible, built-up areas are isolated and bypassed. ,In
the event the built-up area must be assaulted, terrain dominat-
ing approaches is seized to isolate the town. Highly mobile
forces, to include airborne elements, are desirable for this
action. An assault of a built-up area is closely controlled and
includes designation of objectives that divide enemy defenses.
(2) The advantages gained through the use of nuclear weapons and
intense nonnuclear bombardments must be weighed againstthe
creation of obstacles to the assault elements.
(3) Measures to control or evacuate the civilian population are
essential.
b. Defense.
(1) Since built-up areas are obstacles to the movement of friendly
counterattack forces as well as to the attacking enemy, con-
sideration should be given to defending outside the built-up
area. Under some conditions, elements of the brigade may hold

210 AGO 3326B

 towns while the remainder of the brigade counterattacks in the
open.
(2) The defense of a built-up area is organized around key terrain
features and key portions of the built-up area, which preserve
the integrity of the defense and provide ease of movement to
the defender. Subterranean systems may facilitate the move-
ment of forces and may provide protection against nuclear
attack. They are incorporated in the organizations of the
defense. Maximum use is made of rubble and other obstacles.
Defenses are prepared in depth to facilitate continuous defense
throughout the area.
(3) Plans should provide for the control of the civilian population,
and the use of friendly elements in the preparation of defensive
positions. Evacuation of civilians from the area should be
considered.
(4) For further details on combat in built-up areas, see FM's
7-11, 7-15, and 31-50.

226. Long Range Reconnaissance Patrols

See FM 21-75 and FM 100-1.

Section IX. PASSAGE OF DEFILES

227. General
A defile is any terrain feature, natural or artificial, which tends to
constrict the passage of troops. Therefore a mountain pass, a gap
through a minefield, a river crossing site, a bridge, or an area between two
radiated areas are all defiles.
a. Preparation and Passage. The reconnaissance must consider all
possible routes. Planning for an alternate route is essential. Major
engineer effort required to prepare a defile for passage should be conducted
preferably at night or under conditions of low visibility. All movements
to the defile target area must be very rigidly controlled by traffic control
points or by a coordinator separate and distinct from the target area
coordinator. Traffic control points must insure that the flow of vehicles
is maintained constant, without halts or grouging directly into the defile
target area or into the designated dispersed holding areas on a scheduled
plan. Units must plan in advance to move directly into a holding area or
the attack position upon clearance of the defile target area. Since an
obvious defile is a prime enemy target, deception will serve to hide the
real intentions and insure successful passage.
b. Passage Procedure. Rapid passage of a defile is the best defense
against annihilation. Where relatively high speed is not feasible,
perfectly timed traffic control which insures no large gaps, no halts, and
optimum use of the route will achieve the same purpose. Increased
AGO 3326B 211
spacing between march elements will serve to make the target offered to
the enemy less lucrative, but such a procedure slows the advance and
prolongs the concentration of combat strength and the prompt commit-
ment of exploiting forces. In most tactical situations the speed of
advance is paramount, consistent with not offering the enemy a truly
profitable target.
c. Control. Traffic control must be absolute. One individual with
intimate knowledge of the defile and its approaches must be designated
by the commander as the defile target area coordinator and made com-
pletely responsible for planning and regulating its passage. This indi-
vidual is preferably the S3 who has paramount interest, although the
commander may designate the Engineer or his Military Police Officer
upon occasion. One of the coordinator's primary functions is to insure
continually that the defile target area is maintained devoid of all un-
essential personnel and equipment. Regardless of the individual so
designated, competent assistants (preferably trained MP's) must be
posted at all critical points to insure the uninterrupted flow of traffic.
Route locations which may cause accidents or halt traffic must be pre-
determined and wreckers positioned to clear the routes in any emergency
(fig. 38).

HOLDING
CA_~~~XHOLDING
,....,~~~~~~ /

EXIT APPROACH CONTROL

PASSABLE PASSABLE POINTS
AREA AREA (CROSSING)

DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT / -
AREA

EFFECTIVE RANGE

NUCLEAR BURST

Figure 38. Defile target area.

212 AGO 3326B

 APPENDIX I
REFERENCES

AR 55-355 Military Traffic Management Regulations

AR 59-106 Air Transportation
AR 320-5 Dictionary of United States Army Terms
AR 320-50 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes
AR 345-5 Personnel Management, Personnel Records
AR 600-7 Personnel Services Guide
AR 600-30 Character Guidance Program
AR 735-35 Supply Procedures for TOE Units, Organizations,
and Non-TOE Activities.
AR 750-5 Organization, Policies, and Responsibilities for
Maintenance Operations
AR 750-8 Command Maintenance Inspections
FM 1-5 Army Aviation Organization and Employment
FM 1-15 Aviation Battalion, Infantry, Airborne, Mecha-
nized and Armored Divisions
FM 1-100 Army Aviation
FM 3-5 Chemical, Biological, and Radiological (CBR)
Operations
FM 3-( ) Operational Aspects of Radiological Defense (when
published)
FM 5-1 Engineer Troop Organizations and Operations
FM 5-135 Engineer Battalion, Infantry, Mechanized, and
Armored Divisions
FM 5-136 Airborne Division Engineer Battalion
FM 6-20-1 Field Artillery Tactics
FM 6-20 Field Artillery Techniques
FM 7-11 Rifle Company, Infantry, Airborne Infantry, and
Mechanized Infantry Battalion
FM 7-15 Infantry, Airborne Infantry, and Mechanized In-
fantry Rifle Platoons and Squads
FM 7-20 Infantry, Airborne Infantry, and Mechanized
Infantry Battalions
FM 8-35 Transportation of the Sick and Wounded
FM 8-15 Division Medical Service, Infantry, Airborne,
Mechanized, and Armored Division
FM 8-55 Army Medical Service Planning Guide
FM 9-1 Ordnance Service in the Field.
FM 9-3 Ordnance Direct Support Service
FM 9-5 Ordnance Ammunition Service
FM 9-30 Maintenance Battalion, Division Support Command
FM 10-33 Airborne Division Quartermaster Air Equipment
Support Company
AGO 3326B 213
FM 10'-5f Supply and Transport Battalion, Division Support
Command
FM 11- 50 ' Signal Battalion, Infantry, Mechanized, and Ar-
mored Divisions
FM 11-57' Signal Battalion, Airborne Division
FM 12-11 Administration Company, Infantry, Airborne,
Mechanized, and Armored Divisions
FM i.-1i Armor Operations; Small Units
FM 17.-t5 Tank Units, Platoon, Company, and Battalion
FM 17-30 Armored Division Brigade
FM 17-360 Armored Cavalry, Units, Platoon, Troop, and
Squadron
FM 11-5f0 Armor Logistics
FM 19-15 Civil Disturbances and Disasters
FM 19-25a Military Police Traffic Control
FM 19-40 Handling Prisoners of War
FM 20-60' Battlefield Illumination
FM 21-5; Military Training;
FM 21-6 Techniques of Military Instruction
FM 21-liS Foot Marches
FM 2i-26& Map Reading
FM 21-3) : Military Symbols
FM 21-46 Small Unit Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and
Chemical Warfare
FM 21-41 Soldier Handbook in Nuclear, Biological, and
Chemical Warfare
FM 21-48 Chemical, Biological, and. Nuclear Training Exer-
cises and Integrated Training
FM 22- 1)00 Military Leadership
FM 23-20 Davy Crockett Systems in Infantry Units
FM 24-18' Field Radio Techniques
PM 24-20 Field Wire and Field Cable Techniques
FM 27-10 : The Law of Land Warfare
FM 30-5 Combat Intelligence
'
FM 301-0 Terrain Intelligence
FM 30-15 Intelligence Inter:rogation (U)
FM 30-1,6 Technical Intelligence
FM 30-19 Order of Battle Intelligence
FM 30-20 Aerial Surveillance-Reconnaissance, Field Army
FM 30-1017 Aggressor, The Marneuver Enemy
FM 30-102 Handbook on Aggressor Military Forces
FM 30-103' Aggressor Order of Battle
FM 31-10 Barriers and Denial Operations
FM 31-12 Army Forces in Amphibious Operations
FM 31-3 ? Battl'e Group Landing Team, Amphibious (Pro-
posed)
AGO 3326B
FM 31-15 Operations Against Irregular Forces
FM 31-21 Guerrilla Warfare and Special Forces Operations
FM 31-21A Guerrilla Warfare and Special Weapons Operations
(U)
FM 31-25 Desert Operations
FM 31-30 Jungle Operations
FM 31-40 Tactical Cover and Deception (U)
FM 31-50 Combat in Fortified Areas and Towns
FM 31-60 River-Crossing Operations
FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual
FM 31-71 Northern Operations
FM 31-72 Mountain Operations
FM 32-5 Communications Security (U)
FM 33-5 Psychological Warfare Operations
FM 41-5 Joint Manual of Civil Affairs/Military Government
FM 41-10 Civil Affairs/Military Government Operations
FM 41-15 Civil Affairs/Military Government Units
FM 44-1 Air Defense Artillery Employment
FM 44-1A Air Defense Artillery Employment (U)
FM 54-2 Division Logistics and the Support Command
FM 52-10 Corps and Army Support of Divisions
FM 55-6 Transportation Services in Theaters of Operations
FM 57-10 Joint Airborne Operations
FM 57-30 Airborne Operations
FM 57-35 Airmobile Operations
FM 60-30 Embarkation and Loading, Amphibious
FM 61-100 The Army Division
FM 100-1 Doctrinal Guidance (U)
FM 100-5 Field Service Regulations; Operations
FM 100-10 Field Service Regulations; Administration
FM 101-5 Staff Officers Field Manual; Staff Organization and
Procedures
FM 101-10 Staff Officers Field Manual; Organization, Techni-
cal, and Logistical Data, Parts I and II
FM 101-31 Staff Officers Field Manual-Nuclear Weapons
Employment (U)
TC 3-7 Capabilities and Employment of Biological Agents
(U)
TC 3-10 Defense Against V-Agents
TC 5-2 Employment of Mobile Assault Bridging
TC 100-1 Employment of Nuclear Weapons (U)
TC 101-2 Tactical Operations Centers
TM 3-( ) U.S. Army Fallout Prediction Methods (when
published)
TM 3-200 Capabilities and Employment of Toxic Chemicals
TM 9-2810 Tactical Motor Vehicles
AGO 8326B 215
TM 23-200 Capabilities of Atomic Weapons (U)
TM 57-210 Air Movement of Troops and Equipment
DA Pam 108-1 Index of Army Motion Pictures, Filmstrips, Slides,
and Phono-Recordings
DA Pam 310-series Military Publications Indexes
DA Pam 750-1 Preventive Maintenance Guide for Commanders

216 AGO 3326B

 Appendix II
BRIGADE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND
COMMUNICATION PLATOON

Section I. GENERAL
1. Responsibilities
a. The brigade commander is responsible for the installation, opera-
tion, and maintenance of the brigade communication facilities and for
the brigade functioning as part of the division signal system. All
subordinate commanders of the brigade are responsible for, and exercise
tactical and technical control over, the communications system within
their commands. Tactical control insures that the systems are established
and maintained properly to meet the operational requirements of the
tactical situation and operational environment. Technical control
includes the supervision of the methods of installation, operation,
maintenance, and supply of the signal equipment employed. A properly
established communication system provides the commander with parallel
means of communication for efficient command, control, and administra-
tion of his unit. The system provides the commander with the capability
to control the actions of his units; to coordinate his supporting fires; to
receive and transmit orders and information; to maintain contact with
higher, lower, attached, supporting, and adjacent units; and to coordinate
logistical and personnel matters. The communication platoon is under
the operational control of the brigade communication officer.
b. Establishing and maintaining communication between units is
governed by the following rules:
(1) The higher unit is responsible for establishing and maintaining
communication with the subordinate (including attached)
units.
(2) A unit supporting another is responsible for establishing and
maintaining communication with the supported unit.
(3) Lateral communications (except radio) between brigades is
established by a forward command communication signal
section and a forward area signal center platoon of the division
signal battalion. Lateral radio communication between bri-
gades withina division is undertaken, without prior arrangement,
on the division command/operations net and division intel-
ligence/operations net. The rule for establishing lateral
communication from left to right is applicablefor the subordinate
units of the brigade.
(4) When contact is lost, units share the responsibility of reestab-
lishment of communication.
AGO 3326B 217
2. Communication Support for the Brigade
a. The establishment of a division area communication system by the
division signal battalion provides for the installation of forward area
signal centers and forward command communication signal sections
within or near the major divisional elements (FM 11-50). These
installations are operated by the forward communication company of the
division signal battalion, and provide the connecting link between the
brigade headquarters and the division area communication system
(fig. 9).
b. Each forward command communication section of the forward
command communication platoon locates itself within the CP area and
provides each brigade with-
(1) Radio relay, telephone carrier, or field wire circuits as necessary
to connect the brigade headquarters into the two main command
echelons of the division.
(2) A radio teletypewriter station in the division command net.
c. Each forward area signal center platoon connects the brigade head-
quarters into the area communication system as well as providing signal
communications to units in the division area supplemental to organic
capabilities on a 24 hour-a-day basis. This platoon is normally located
in vicinity of the brigade trains. They establish and operate-
(1) Message center, cryptographic, teletypewriter terminal and
switching service.
(2) Manual telephone central, installation of telephone lines to
users and provision of telephone instruments if otherwise not
available to users.
(3) Patching and switching facilities for wire and radio relay trunk
circuits in the division area communication system
(4) Radio relay, telephone carrier, or field wire circuits as necessary
to connect users into the division area communication systems.
(5) An FM radio/wire integration station to connect mobile FM
radio stations into the division area communication system.

3. Mission and Organization of the Communication

Platoon and Duties of Communication Personnel
a. The communication platoon installs, operates, and maintains all
communication facilities within the brigade headquarters. In addition,
it establishes and maintains communication with the attached battalions
and units. It provides continuous communication for the brigade
headquarters by using all means of communication. It provides second
echelon maintenance support for all signal equipment of the brigade
headquarters.
b. The platoon is organized into a headquarters and two sections.
The sections can be subdivided further into teams of varying personnel
strength depending on each team's mission, the priority of the operation,
and the type of terrain over which the unit is operating.

218 AGO 2326B

 (1) The platoon headquarters consists of the platoon leader,
communication chief, one light truck driver, one senior radio
mechanic, and one radio mechanic, the latter also being a
light truck driver.
(2) The message center and wire section consists of a section ser-
geant, a chief message clerk, two message clerks, two manual
teletypewriter operators, and two motor messengers. The
wire section is composed of four wire team chiefs, two switch-
board operators, four senior wiremen and four wiremen.
(3) The radio section is composed of a radioteletype team chief, two
radioteletype operators, and one driver.

4. Duties of Platoon Headquarters Personnel

a. The communication platoon leader commands the platoon and
assists the brigade communication officer. His duties include-
(1) Training and controlling his platoon.
(2) Supervising the installation, operation, and imaintenance of
the signal equipment issued to the platoon and brigade head-
quarters.
(3) Supervising the operation of communication installations.
(4) Assisting the brigade communication officer and representing
him in his absence.
(5) Insuring that the brigade communication officer's instructions
are carried out by the sections of the communication platoon.
(6) Supervising the movement of communication installations when
the command post displaces.
b. The communication chief is the principal enlisted assistant to the
platoon leader. His duties include-
(1) Organizing the advance echelon for displacement of the com-
mand post.
(2) Coordinating the work between the sections of the platoon.
(3) Supervising the section of locations for communication installa-
tions.
(4) Supervising ground-to-air communication.
(5) Insuring that platoon records are kept properly.
(6) Insuring that assigned vehicles and equipment are maintained
and dispatched correctly.
(7) Supervising the activities of the assigned radio mechanics,
(8) Keeping the platoon leader informed as to status of maintenance
of all equipment and vehicles.
c. The senior radio mechanic's duties include-
(1) Second echelon maintenance of radio sets and other signal
equipment organic to the brigade headquarters.
(2) Maintaining records of maintenance and of modifications per-
formed on each item of signal equipment in the brigade head-
quarters.
AGO 8326B 219
 (3) Maintaining the authorized level of repair parts for signal
maintenance and keeping the communication chief informed of
the status of signal maintenance and the supply of authorized
repair parts.
(4) Coordinating with the radio team chiefs of the platoon and
staff section for the prompt repair of any radio or radioteletype
equipment requiring repair beyond the capabilities of organiza-
tional maintenance. This repair work may be completed by
the mobile signal repair teanm of the forward support company
from the maintenance battalion.
(5) Supervising the radio mechanics.
d. The radio mechanic's duties include those duties listed in c(l)
through (3) above. In addition, he is the driver of the YA-ton truck of
the headquarters.
e. The light truck driver drives the hi-ton vehicle of the platoon head-
quarters.

5. Duties of Message Center and Wire Section Personnel

a. The section sergeant is responsible to the communication platoon
leader for the discipline, training, and operation of the message center
and wire section. His duties include--
(1) Selecting the exact location for the message center and messenger
station and establishing the :message center facilities.
(2) Processing, filing, servicing, and selecting the method of trans-
mission for outgoing messages.
(3) Supervising the operation and first echelon maintenance of
message center equipment.
(4) Checking the flow of message traffic and reporting to the
originator when a message cannot be delivered within the
prescribed time.
(5) Supervising cryptographic procedures of communication clerks
and manual teletypewriter operators.
(6) Maintaining a status log on the effectiveness of each means of
communication.
(7) Signing for messages.
(8) Keeping the official time.
(9) Supervising messenger communication.
(10) Posting message center signs or guides.
(11) Maintaining a record of the locations of command posts of
units with which the brigade maintains communication, in-
cluding the best routes to them.
(12) Maintaining a supply of message center forms.
(13) Scheduling of message center personnel to provide operations
on a 24-hour-a-day basis.
(14) Selecting the exact locations for wire installations.
(15) Supervising the wire team chiefs in the installation, operation,

220 AGO 3326B

 and maintenance of the wire system within the command post
and to all subordinate or attached units.
(16) Selecting general routes for wire lines.
(17) Preparing and recording line route maps, circuit diagrams, and
traffic diagrams.
(18) Keeping the communication chief informed of the status of
wire communication.
(19) Maintaining a sufficient supply of wire and other necessary
supplies to permit continuous wire operations.
(20) Keeping records, such as status of wire supply and the mainte-
nance forms on wire equipment.
(21) Supervising the driver maintenance of the vehicles in the
section.
(22) Allocating wiremen to the wire teams based on the current
mission of each team.
b. The senior message clerk's duties include-
(1) Assisting the section sergeant.
(2) Supervising one of the message center teams during displace-
ment of the command post.
(3) Encrypting and decrypting messages as required.
(4) Receiving, recording, and dispatch of incoming and outgoing
messages and documents.
(5) Maintaining a code file of processed messages.
(6) Processing encrypted messages, to include insertion of call signs
when messages are to be transmitted by electrical means.
c. The manual teletypewriter operator's duties include-
(1) Transmitting, receiving, and processing teletypewriter messages
in the message center.
(2) Correcting message errors and obtaining receipts for completed
transmissions.
(3) Encrypting and decrypting messages, employing message center
cipher machines.
(4) Establishing and posting the station log.
(5) Performing first echelon maintenance on teletypewriter equip-
ment by cleaning and making minor adjustments in the equip-
ment and replacing minor parts as authorized by first echelon
maintenance.
(6) Keeping the message center chief informed of the status of
teletypewriter communications.
(7) Insuring that supplies and repair parts required for operation
and first echelon maintenance are on hand or have been re-
quested.
(8) Performing other communication duties as directed.
d. The messengers' duties include-
(1) Carrying messages.
AGO 38826B 221
 (2) Driving and performing required driver maintenance on the
messenger vehicles.
(3) Performing other communication duties as directed.
e. The wire team chief's duties include-
(1) Assisting the section sergeant.
(2) Supervising the wiremen, as organized into teams, in the correct
techniques of laying and maintaining the wire lines.
(3) Selecting wire routes and assisting in the preparation of line
route maps and circuit diagrams.
(4) Insuring that wire lines are policed so as to minimize their
damage by traffic and enemy fire.
(5) Informing the communication chief of the status of wire supply
and the serviceability of wire circuits.
The senior wiremen's duties include-
(1) Installing, testing, and maintaining wire circuits and telephones.
(2) Tagging, testing, and splicing field wire lines.
(3) Locating and correcting deficiencies in wire lines.
(4) Operating switchboards.
(5) Keeping the wire team chief informed of the status of wire com-
munication and wire supply.
(6) Driving and performing proper driver maintenance of wire
section vehicles.
(7) Performing other communication duties as directed.
(8) Supervising the wiremen.
(9) Wiremen's duties are as listed in f(1) through (7) above.
g. The switchboard operators' duties include-
(1) Installing, operating, and performing first echelon maintenance
on switchboards.
(2) Preparing and maintaining traffic diagrams.
(3) Routing traffic and rerouting calls when normal circuits fail.
(4) Supervising traffic to insure satisfactory service to the user.
(5) Performing other communication duties as directed.

6. Duties of the Radio Section Personnel

a. The radio team chief is responsible to the platoon leader for the dis-
cipline, training, and operation of his section. His duties include-
(1) Selecting the exact locations for the radio, radioteletype, and
visual installations.
(2) Supervising the installation, operation, and maintenance of
radio and radioteletype equipment.
(3) Insuring that visual signaling equipment is available.
(4) Preparing operating schedules for radio and radioteletype opera-
tors.
(5) Supervising the maintenance of communication security, to
include the use of authorized codes, ciphers, and authentication
systems.

222 AGO 3326B

 (6) Insuring that the radio is operated according to prescribed
procedure and current communication orders.
(7) Informing the section sergeant and/or message clerk and the
communication chief of the status of radio and radioteletype
communication.
(8) Supervising the driver maintenance on the section's vehicles.
(9) Informing the communication chief of the operating condition
of radio and radioteletype equipment and coordinating with the
radio mechanics for repairs when needed.
(10) Maintaining records of the section, such as station logs, work
schedules, and equipment maintenance schedules.
(11) Supervising first echelon maintenance of radios and other equip-
ment issued to the section.
b. Team chiefs in staff section duties include-
(1) Supervising the installation, operation, and first echelon main-
tenance of radio teletype equipment.
(2) Establishing operators' work schedules to provide operations
on a 24-hour-a-day basis.
(3) Performing duties of radioteletype operator as required.
(4) Informing the communication chief of the current status of
radioteletype communication.
(5) Coordinating with the radio mechanics for the repair of radio-
teletype equipment.
c. The radioteletype operators' duties include-
(1) Setting up and operating manual and radioteletype equipment.
(2) Transmitting messages, correcting message errors, and obtaining
receipts for completed transmissions.
(3) Receiving and processing incoming teletype messages and pre-
paring such messages in proper format for delivery.
(4) Performing first echelon maintenance on radioteletype equip-
ment.
(5) Establishing and posting station logs.
(6) Driving and performing driver maintenance on assigned vehicles.
(7) Performing other communication duties as directed, particularly
during periods when radio stations are under silence or on
standby status.
d. Radioteletype teams and intermediate speed (IS) radio operators
are assigned to the command group and to the operations, intelligence,
and logistical staff sections, and remain a part of those sections during
field operations. The communication platoon operates a radio teletype-
writer (RATT) station in a net of the higher headquarters as required.
This station may operate with the command group or as an alternate
station during operations, such as the displacement of the command post.
7. Supply
a. Authorized items of signal equipment are prescribed in tables of or-
ganization and equipment (TOE). Additional equipment may be
AGO 3326B 223
authorized by higher commanders. Initial supply and replacement is
made through normal supply channels. Requests for replacement and
supplies are submitted through normal supply channels. The head-
quarters supply sergeant consolidates these requests and submits requisi-
tions for the equipment and supplies. The brigade communication officer
assists in preparing these requisitions. Signal supplies are delivered to
the class I, II, and IV distributing point established in the brigade
trains area by the division support command elements. Unserviceable
signal equipment that cannot be repaired or replaced by the signal
repair sections of the forward suplport company of the division main-
tenance battalion are normally replaced by direct exchange for service-
able items from the reserve stock with the division support command. In
an emergency, the brigade communication officer may obtain signal
supplies directly from a supply point.
b. Repair parts consist of parts, assemblies, or components required for
installation in the maintenance of an end item. Allowance for stockage
of repair parts at the various echelons are established by repair parts
and special tool lists of the equipment technical manual. Quantities of
repair parts authorized for first echelon maintenance are issued initially
with the equipment and are authorized to be kept on hand by the oper-
ator. Repair parts for second echelon maintenance are authorized for
stockage or for requisition as required, whichever is appropriate. Signal
mobile repair teams will normally issue repair parts for organizational
maintenance.

8. Maintenance of Communications Equipment

Each unit maintains and repairs its communications equipment within
the limits of its maintenance facilities, available parts, authorized tools
and test equipment, and the capabilities of assigned maintenance person-
nel. Maintenance performed .by using personnel includes protecting the
equipment from weather and rough usage, cleaning and drying, adjusting,
and lubricating. When the equipment becomes inoperative, or an in-
spection reveals it may fail to operate because of excessive wear of some
parts, it is turned in to the radio mechanic for repair. Items that cannot
be repaired by the platoon mechanics are repaired on site by the forward
repair teams of the forward support company of the division maintenance
battalion or evacuated by the teams to the rear. For information on
brigade and division maintenance procedures, see chapter 5, this manual,
and FM 54-2.

9. Means of Signal Communication

a. Signal communication includes all means of conveying information
of any kind from one person or place to another except by direct conversa-
tion and mail. In this manual, the term signal communication is ab-
breviated to communication except where misunderstanding might result.
b. The means of communication available to the brigade are radio,

224 AGO 3326B

 wire, messenger, visual, and sound. The composition of the means in
-each unit is limited by the men, equipment, and transportation provided
by the TOE and the unit or higher commander. The various means have
different capabilities and limitations. They are used so that they supple-
ment each other, and entire dependence is not placed on any one means.
The reliability of communication systems is greatly increased by the use
of all practical means. The means used most in a given situation is the
one which provides maximum reliability, flexibility, secrecy, and speed
with a minimum of effort and material.

10. Radio Communication

a. Radio is a principal means of communication within the brigade.
Radios are provided for all commanders including squad leaders. Addi-
tional radios are provided for command posts, fire control, and other uses.
All sets issued within the brigade are capable of voice operation.
This affords person-to-person communication between ground stations
and between ground stations and aircraft. Radio communication is less
vulnerable to enemy fire than wire, but it is subject to interference from
static, jamming, and other radio stations. Its reliability is limited by the
skill of the operators. Security requirements may restrict its use in
certain operations, and the need for encoding messages slows down the
delivery time. Figures 11, 12, and 13 show radio nets in which the
brigade operates.
b. Radio equipment issued to the brigade includes portable and vehic-
ular radio sets. Portable sets can be carried and operated by one man.
Since vehicular sets are normally operated from vehicular power sources,
their use is limited to situations and terrain where vehicles can be utilized.
To permit proper siting of vehicular sets remote control equipment must
be used extensively. Modification kits are available as auxiliary equip-
ment to permit the use of certain vehicular set components in a dis-
mounted role.
c. The tactical use of a radio set depends on its characteristics. To
be capable of operating together, radio sets must have a common or
overlapping frequency range, transmit and receive the same type of
signal, be located within the operating range of the weakest set in the
net, and be of the same type modulation. The operating range given in
technical manuals pertaining to an individual radio set is for average con-
ditions; the range obtained may be more or less, depending on the opera-
tor's skill, weather, terrain, interference, use of proper antennas, and
location of the set. Power lines and steel structures located close to
operating sites reduce operating ranges. The greatest ranges are ob-
tained between sites affording line of sight operation, including siting by
means of army aircraft radio relay.
d. Radio is the least secure means of communication. It must be
assumed that interception takes place every time a transmitter is placed
in operation; therefore, communication security is a constant considera-
AGO 3326B 225
 tion when using radios. The enemy obtains valuable intelligence infor-
mation merely by knowing that friendly radios are operating, by analyzing
the number of radios in operation, the volume of traffic, and by determin-
ing the location of the sets. The use of radio may be restricted or pro-
hibited for security reasons. Important measures for defense against
enemy radio intelligence are listening silence and cryptography. Nor-
mally, messages are encrypted before being sent by radio. The decision to
silence radios or to send messages in the clear is made after all the factors
have been carefully considered. For example, radios are not silenced
when the commander determines that the need for radio communication
outweighs the value of the information that the enemy might gain.
Usually they are not silenced within units in contact with the enemy. A
message is sent in the clear when prompt action is called for and the
urgency of sending the message in the clear outweighs the value of the
information to the enemy.
e. Since only one station can transmit at a time, the message-handling
capacity of a radio net is limited. The time required for a message trans-
mission to its addressee is primarily dependent on whether it is encrypted
or sent in clear text and on the volume of traffic of similar or higher pre-
cedence awaiting transmission. The speed and message handling capacity
of a radio net is increased by training all operating personnel in radio
procedure and net discipline, and by training the using personnel in
message writing. Messages that are written before transmission can be
sent more efficiently.
f. The power supply is an important factor in radio communication.
Used dry batteries, when approaching the end of their service life, reduce
the range of the sets and may render them inoperative at a crucial
moment. An adequate supply of serviceable batteries should be main-
tained for dry battery-operated sets. Every effort should be made to
obtain maximum service from the batteries through operator training
and supervision, and by maintaining a log of hours and conditions of
use for each battery pack.
g. By using certain types of remote control equipment, a radio operator
may be located at a distance from the set he operates. Other remote con-
trol units connect a radio set to a switchboard, which makes the radio
available to commanders and staff officers through their telephones.
Remote control facilities are normally established at the brigade CP.
h. The brigade maintains communication to higher and adjacent head-
quarters over telephone and teletype circuits provided by the division
area communication system, and by operating subordinate stations in the
following division radio nets:
(1) Division command operations net (RATT). The brigade opera-
tions section operates in this net from the command post area.
This net is used to extend the communication range for the
brigade and to transmit situation and other detailed reports
to the division operations section. When authorized it may be

226 AGO 8326B

 used for communication to other brigades, division artillery,
and other divisional units in the net.
(2) Division command net FM. For communication with division
the brigade commander maintains a radio in this net from the
command post or the command group.
(3) Division intelligence net (RATT.) The brigade intelligence
officer (S2) operates a station in this net for exchange of intelli-
gence information with division headquarters and other division
units.
(4) Division logistical net (RATT.) The brigade logistical officer
(S4) and his section operate two medium power RATT stations
in this net. One radio is located in the command post area
(under control of the S4), and the other in the trains (controlled
by the assistant S4). This net provides a means for transmission
of logistical information to the division support units. When
authorized and when the traffic load permits, this net may be
used for communication with attached and supporting logistical
elements of the brigade.
(5) Division air request net AM. The brigade S2-S3 air operates a
subordinate station from the command post area in this net,
using voice or CW.
(6) Division warning broadcast net AM. An AM receiver is mon-
itored by the S3 air's in this voice net, which is used by division
to transmit alerts, warnings, and CBR data.
(7) Spot report receiver system UHF. This allows the brigade to
monitor reports direct from fighter bombers and reconnaissance
aircraft.
i. Brigade maintain the following radio nets to subordinate units.
(1) Brigade command net (RATT.) This net is the primary link for
operational command and control of major subordinate elements
of the brigade. The net control station is operated in the com-
mand post area under the direction of the operation officer and
by RATT operators assigned to the section. An alternate NCS
may be provided when required. Qperation sections of all at-
tached tank and infantry battalions maintain stations in this net.
(2) Brigade command net FM. Tactical command and control from
the brigade commander to commanders of subordinate elements
and staffs are provided by this net. Brigade command staff
members also operate in this net, which is controlled by the S3,
for operational interstaff coordination and communication to
subordinate elements. Support elements such as artillery, en-
gineer, and tactical air representatives may enter this net.
(3) Brigade logisticalnet FM. This net is used for the transmission
of administrative and logistical messages, primarily within and
between the command post and trains area. The brigade S4
operates the net control station, and uses the net to contact the
AGO 3326b 227
 trains. The S4's of battalions may operate in this net for coor-
dination of logistical matters. The scout section of the brigade
headquarters enters this net. Elements of attached and sup-
porting units, when located in the brigade trains area, maintain
a station in this net for coordination of logistical matters.
j. For communication with supporting elements, the brigade organized
for combat contains elements that enter either the brigade command or
logistical net. These elements also maintain communication with their
parent organization and usually include artillery, engineers, medical,
military police, maintenance, and other elements.

11. Wire Communication

a. Wire is a principal means of communication and includes the use of
field wire, wirelaying and recovery equipment, battery-operated and
sound-powered telephones, switchboards, teletypewriters, and associated
equipment. Except for the transmission of messages, such as maps and
documents, wire communication is highly effective. It affords person-to-
person conversation with break-in operation (capability of interrupting
the conversation) and is more secure than radio communication. How-
ever, security is never assured when transmitting in the clear. The
decision to establish wire communication depends on the need for it and
the time available to install and use it. The supply of wire on hand, the
expected resupply, and the future needs are also considered. Wire com-
munication can be used in most terrain and situations. Tables of
organization and equipment provide the units with the equipment to
install and maintain wire communication systems. Figure 10 shows a
typical wire system installed by the brigade communication platoon.
b. Using battery-operated telephones, the maximum operating range
of field wire circuits is approximately 37 kilometers. Using the sound-
powered telephone (TA-1/PT), the dependable range is from 6 to 13
kilometers. The range of wire communication varies, depending prin-
cipally on the weather and the condition of the wire. ' Wet weather, poor
splices, and damaged insulation reduce the range appreciably. The
operating range can be increased by using electrical repeaters or amplify-
ing telephones. Cable is used to increase the telephone range and the
available number of circuits, but is issued only to the division signal
battalion and higher echelons.
c. The time required for wire installation depends mainly on the length
of the line and the method of laying it (aircraft, vehicle, or manpack).
Wire can be laid by men on foot at the rate of 3 kilometers per hour, and
by vehicle at 5 to 8 kilometers per hour. In estimating the required time,
it is necessary to consider the number of available men, their training, the
terrain, routes, weather, enemy action and visibility. One man can lay a
wire line by using a wire dispenser or light reel. When the terrain or the
tactical situation precludes conventional methods of wire laying, Army

228 AGO 3326B

aircraft (both fixed- and rotary-wing) can be used. Wire from dispensers
can also be cast a short distance over an obstacle (such as a stream) by
attaching it to a rifle grenade or a rocket fired from a launcher.
d. Wire lines are laid off roads with 15 to 20 percent slack. They are
placed overhead in command posts or other areas where it is impracticable
to bury them or leave them lying on the ground. In crossing roads, wire
may be buried, placed overhead, or laid under bridges and culverts. Areas
where wire is likely to be damaged by traffic or enemy fire are avoided.
Part of a wire team lays the wire and the remainder of the team police it
(throws it off the road, makes road crossings, splices it, etc.). The laying
of line is not delayed by policing.
e. Switchboards are used to increase the flexibility of wire systems and
to reduce the number of lines needed. Party lines may be used to expand
the subscriber capacity of the various switchboards in the brigade.
f. The number of telephone messages that can be transmitted simul-
taneously over a wire system is limited. For this reason, calls are kept
brief; the telephone is reserved for occasions when there is a need for
discussion, speed, and relative secrecy. During critical periods, the
telephone may be restricted to designated personnel, except for emergency
calls. Telephones are not used for long reports or orders when other
means can be used effectively. To reduce the time the telephone is in
use and to facilitate entry in the unit journal, messages are written or
notes are prepared before a conversation begins.
g. Teletypewriter service is established as required. Teletypewriters
provide both division and brigade headquarters with a written record of
messages exchanged. Teletypewriter equipment in the brigade commu-
nication platoon increases substantially the volume of messages that can
be handled by the brigade.

12. Messenger Communication

a. Messenger, the most secure means of communication, is flexible and
reliable. But messenger service has some limitations in that it is vul-
nerable to enemy action in forward areas and does not permit conversa-
tion between the originator and the addressee. It is the only means
available within the brigade for transmitting messages such as maps and
documents. Messengers are used when security is required and when the
time of delivery by messenger is less than that required for message
preparation and transmission by other means. Messengers are the best
means for transmitting long messages over short distances. They may
travel by foot, motor vehicle, or aircraft. The efficiency of messenger
service is improved by the proper selection and training of the messengers.
b. Double messengers are used when the mission involves great per-
sonal risk. They keep within sight of each other, but far enough apart to
avoid simultaneous ambush or exposure to the same shell or burst of fire.
Very important messages may be sent over two different routes utilizing
either single or double messengers. Messengers are briefed on their route,
AGO 3326B 229
rate of travel, and the location of the delivery points. They are told if an
answer is expected. If a messenger cannot locate his destination or
becomes lost, he reports to the nearest command post and requests assist-
ance. When practicable, a daylight reconnaissance is made of the routes
that are to be traveled at night. Oral messages are kept short and simple.
They are not used when time and security permit their being written.
Messengers memorize oral messages.
c. When required by the urgency of the message, special messengers are
used. When locations are fixed and the amount of traffic warrants a
fixed schedule, a scheduled messenger service is established. Messenger
relay posts may be established when messages are carried frequently
between the same points or units, and when distance, difficult terrain, and
hostile activity make them desirable.

13. Visual Communication

a. The use of visual signals is a supplementary means of communica-
tion. Visual signals are transmitted by flags, lights, pyrotechnics,
panels, arm-and-hand, and other prearranged visual means. They are
suitable for transmitting prearranged messages rapidly over short dis-
tances when their use is not prohibited for security reasons. The enemy
may use similar signals for deception and confusion. Visual signals are
easily understood. They cannot be used during poor visibility or when
line of sight locations are not available.
b. Improvised signaling lights such as flashlights may be used to send
prearranged messages. The meanings are given in the SOI or prescribed
by the commander. Messages may be transmitted by lights, using the
Morse code.
c. Pyrotechnics, including smoke, are issued in various colors and
types. The meanings of certain signals are given in the SOI. Signals are
included for identifying units as friendly, lifting or calling for fire, marking
targets, and reporting an objective reached. Transmission and reception
of pyrotechnic signals are preplanned. Pyrotechnics can be used for
communication within and between ground units, between ground units
and aircraft, and between ground units on shore and ships.
d. Two general types of panels are issued for communication with air-
craft: marking and identification panels, which are made in bright fluores-
cent colors; and black and white panels, which are used on light and dark
background, respectively. The marking and identification panels can be
used to mark positions and to identify friendly units. The black and white
panels are used to transmit brief messages or to identify a particular unit.
This is done by using the combined panel system and panel recognition
code, which is included in the SOI (par. 16 this appendix).
e. Infrared devices are used for signaling and as landing any assembly
aids. In amphibious operations, they are used as landing aids. Airborne
units use them as assembly aids.
f. Aircraft maneuvers, such as zooms, rocking of wings, or alternate

230 AGO 3326B

opening and closing of throttle, can be used for limited air to ground com-
munication. Prearranged signals from aircraft to ground units, used
primarily for emergencies or aircraft identification to radar operators,
should be included in the SOI.

14. Sound Communication

Sound is a supplementary means of communication and is available to
all units. Sound signals are transmitted by whistles, bugles, horns,
gongs, klaxons, weapons, and other noisemaking devices. They are
used chiefly to attract attention, transmit prearranged messages, and
spread alarms when their use is not prohibited for security reasons.
Sound codes are kept simple to prevent misunderstanding. The range
and reliability are greatly reduced by battle noise. Sound signals and
their meanings are prescribed in the SOI or are assigned by commanders.

15. Radio/Wire Integration System

a. An FM-voice radio/wire integration station is operated at each
division forward area signal center to connect mobile FM radio stations
into the division area communication system on a push-to-talk basis.
This is one of the more important features of the area system.
b. This system of integration stations is used to establish communi-
cation between mobile FM radio stations and elements connected to
the area communication system by telephone. It is also used in lieu of
FM radio relay stations to establish communication between FM radio
stations operating beyond their rated range. Typically, this system is
used--
(1) By the division commander and his staff, when traveling, to
contact division elements connected to the area communica-
tion system by telephone, and for use as relay stations in the
division CG/Comd Net (FM-voice).
(2) For establishing initial telephone service from the division area
communication system to the using units (including brigade
headquarters) until wire links are established.
(3) For voice communication between mobile tactical elements in
the division forward area and those supporting division logistics
elements in the rear area who may be connected to the area
communication system by wire or radio/wire integration links.
(4) For communication between low-flying Army aircraft operating
in remote portions of the division area and the airstrips (or
flight control elements connected to the area communication
system), in the event direct FM radio contact is impossible.

16. Signal Operation Instructions (SOI) and Standing

Signal Instructions (SSI)
a. The signal operation instruction (SOI) is a type of combat order
issued for the technical control and coordination of communication
AGO 8326B 231
within a command. It includes items covering codes and ciphers, radio
call signs and frequencies, telephone directory, and visual and sound
signals. Current items are listed in the index to the SOI. The division
SOI is prepared by the division signal officer and distributed to lower
units. The brigade receives enough copies of the appropriate items of the
division SOI for distribution to the attached units.
b. Standing signal instructions (SSI) may be issued in a separate
publication, or the information can be included in the SOI. The SSI
includes items of operational data not subject to frequent change and
instructions for the use of the SOI. The SSI is prepared by the division
signal officer and distributed to the brigades. The brigade receives
enough copies for distribution to attached units.

17. Standing Operating Procedure

An SOP is a set of instructions prescribing the manner in which routine
jobs are done within a particular unit in the absence of other instructions.
In the brigade, the communication SOP is based on and conforms to the
division SOP. The brigade communication officer prepares the signal
SOP for the commander's approval. Periodic revision of the SOP is
necessary for its effectiveness and conformance with the next higher
unit's SOP. An SOP is particularly applicable to the communication
platoon because many of its operations are the same regardless of the
type of tactical operation. The platoon is not bound to its SOP to the
extent that flexibility and individual initiative are destroyed.
18. Paragraph 5 of an Operation Order
a. Paragraph 5 of an operation order contains orders and instructions
relative to communications and command posts. The brigade com-
munication officer prepares it for his cornmander's approval. As a
minimum, a paragraph 5 contains the location of the issuing unit's
initial command post or the place to which messages are to be sent, and
the index of the SOI in effect.
b. Information contained in a paragraph 5 may be oral or written.
Applicable portions of the following instructions are covered in this
sequence:
(1) A reference to the signal annex or index to the SOI in effect:
restrictions, if any, on the use of ally means of communication;
visual and sound signals; and other information not contained
elsewhere in a paragraph 5, such as lateral lines to be laid.
(2) The command post location of the unit issuing the order, the
prescribed locations of the command posts of the lower units,
and the axis of the command post displacement. The time of
opening the command posts also may be given. The informa-
tion relative to command posts and axis may be shown on an
operation map or overlay.

232 AGO 3326B

 (3) The location and time of opening an advance message center,
march control point, or other location to which messages may
be sent.
19. Oral Communication Orders
After his communication plan is approved, the brigade communica-
tion officer issues oral orders to the brigade communication platoon leader.
The installation of the communication system may be expedited when
available section chiefs also are present. The urgency of the situation
may require the communication officer to issue orders directly to the
section chiefs. In this case, the communication platoon leader is
informed of the situation as early as possible. His oral orders to the
section chiefs may be supplemented by an operation map. Detailed
orders for routine operations governed by the SOP are not included.
The platoon leader's oral orders include-
a. Information of the enemy and friendly forces as required for the
efficient operation and security of the communication system.
b. The platoon's mission.
c. Instructions to each section chief, which may include any or all of
the following:
(1) Instructions to the message center and wire section chief con-
cerning the location of the message center and messenger station;
schedules and routes; uses of codes and ciphers; and command
post location of lower, attached, supporting, adjacent, and next
higher headquarters, and routes to them. Instructions to the
wire team chiefs concerning the switchboard location; number
and location of local telephones (including long locals such as
the line to the observation post); number and routes of trunk-
lines and other applicable special instructions.
(2) Instructions to the radio team chief concerning the location of
radio installations; operation instructions and schedules; use
of voice radios; location of panel display, message-drop and
message pickup areas; and restrictions, if any, on using radio
and visual means.
d. Administrative details such as location of the motor park, bivouac
area, and division signal supply point.
20. Communication Security
a. Communication security is the protection resulting from all measures
designed to prevent or delay unauthorized persons from gaining informa-
tion of military value from communication sources. It includes physical,
cryptographic, and transmission security. Officers and enlisted men who
personally transmit radio messages are concerned particularly with
security. The commander must insure that communication security
orders and regulations are understood and observed. He establishes
security by stating general principles in the unit SOP, by announcing
AGO 3326B 233
 before an operation the extent to which security is to be practiced in
that operation, and by making security decisions during an operation.
When prompt action is called for, he considers the time in which the
enemy can act on the information contained in a clear-text message. He
then decides whether the urgency of sending a message in the clear out-
weighs its value to the enemy. Messages that compromise plans, opera-
tions, or cryptosystems of other units are not transmitted in the clear.
Messages to be transmitted in the clear by radio operators (including those
sent through message center) are marked "send in clear" over the signa-
ture of the commander or his authorized representative. They are
signed by the commander or his authorized representative.
b. Physical security protects the signal equipment and classified docu-
ments (including plain-language copies of messages and carbons) from
capture, damage, or loss. Complete items such as SOI codes and ciphers
are limited in distribution. Before a command post is vacated, it is
inspected for messages, carbons, cipher tapes, and copies of maps or orders.
Wire lines are patrolled to prevent the enemy from tapping them. When
SOI, codes, or cryptographic equipment is lost or captured, the facts are
reported promptly to the next higher commander. Instructions are
issued on how to destroy equipment and classified documents to prevent
their capture or use by the enemy.
c. Cryptographic security means technically sound cryptosystems and
strict observance of instructions to prevent or delay the enemy from
reading message. Time spent in encrypting gives a high return in
security. The use of cryptosystems other than those authorized by the
unit SOI, however, compromises security. Most unauthorized systems
are susceptible to easy solution and give the user a false sense of security.
Security hazards may be minimized by being brief and avoiding stereo-
typed phraseology (particularly at the beginning and end of a message).
Identical messages are not sent in both clear and encrypted text. When
using clear text, landmarks that can be associated with encrypted map
locations are avoided as references. When messages cannot be sent in
the clear, individuals and small units that do not have cipher devices
use prearranged message and operations codes. When using security
codes clear and encrypted text (except coded map locations) are not
mixed in the same message. When authorized, a reasonable degree of
security can be obtained by using codes prepared locally, according to the
SOI, and frequently changed.
d. Transmission security limits the enemy's ability to intercept trans-
missions and prevents him from using our communication systems for
deception. A message is transmitted by the most secure means available,
consistent with its precedence. Radio is particularly susceptible to
interception, position-finding, traffic analysis, and deception. The radio
operators are trained on the dangers of giving information to the enemy
through faulty operating procedures or techniques. Operators and men
preparing radio messages must be aware of the enemy's ability to gain

234 AGO 3326B

information from radio traffic. Those transmitting clear-text messages
by voice radio use prescribed radiotelephone procedure and preplan the
content and wording of each transmission. They use prescribed authen-
tication systems and eliminate unnecessary transmissions. A high
standard of net discipline among operators is essential in maintaining
communication security. Training in the correct procedure is continuous.
For additional information on communication security, see AR 380-5,
ACP 122, and FM 32-5.

21. Training
a. Communication training is conducted in these phases: individual,
unit, and operational readiness training. During basic combat training
and advanced individual training, communication personnel are trained
in basic military subjects and qualified in their MOS. They also receive
some specialist training in their primary duties. Each man is taught
how to fight as an infantryman. Specialist training is conducted best in
division and lower unit schools (particularly applicable to radio opera-
tors). Certain specialists, such as brigade communication officers, com-
munication chiefs, and radio mechanics, should receive their training at
service schools. Other specialist training is best conducted at unit
schools.
b. During basic and advanced unit training, specialist training is com-
pleted and communication personnel are trained in the communication
technique for all types of tactical operations. Before participating in
exercises involving entire units, command post exercises are conducted
with commanders and staffs present. These develop skill in procedure
for the installation, operation, and movement of command posts. The
personnel are trained to install, operate, and maintain communication
systems in fast-moving situations, during all conditions of weather,
visibility, and terrain.
c. In the field exercises and maneuvers phase (combined arms training),
tactics and techniques of communication units working with higher,
supporting, attached, and adjacent units are emphasized. This phase
includes each unit participating, as part of a larger unit through a series
of field exercises and maneuvers. As specialists become proficient in
their primary duties, they are rotated to learn the duties of other selected
key members of their unit.
d. As specialists become fully qualified in their primary MOS, they
should be trained in the next higher skill or cross-trained in an appro-
priate secondary MOS.

Section II. COMMUNICATION AND THE COMMAND POST

22. Command Post (CP)
See section IV, chapter 2 for a general discussion of the brigade's
command posts.

AGO 3326B 235

23. Selection of Command Post Locations
The brigade communication officer makes his recommendations for the
location of the CP to the S3. The S3 makes the final recommendation to
the brigade commander for the general location of the CP. The S1
selects the actual CP site. He and the communication officer consider the
following factors when selecting the site for the CF.
a. Type of Tactical Operation. During movement to contact, the
command post moves by bounds along a designated route, or it is located
at a designated place in the formation. In offensive operations, it is
located well forward to avoid early displacement. In defensive opera-
tions, it is located so that local enemy penetrations will not cause dis-
placement. In other types of tactical operations, it is located at the place
from which the commander can control his brigade most effectively.
b. Signal Communication Requirement. Command posts are located to
facilitate signal communication. An improperly located CP may delay
the establishment of communication at a critical time or make mainte-
nance of effective communication impossible. The principal considera-
tions for the command post location with respect to signal communication
include-
(1) Effect of distance and terrain (on wire and messenger com-
munication).
(2) Necessity for wire routes to the front and rear (permitting the
prompt establishment of wire communication when possible).
(3) Effect of power lines, electrical stations, hill masses, dense
woods, and distance (on radio communication).
(4) Proximity to suitable terrain for airstrip. Minimum require-
ment is proximity to open terrain for use of airdrop and pickup of
messages and ground-to-air panel display. Necessity for line
of sight locations visible only to friendly troops (for use of visual
communication).
c. Routes of Communication and Traffic Conditions. Since all com-
munication facilities center at the command post, roads into and out of it
and the traffic to be expected on these roads influence its location.
Messengers, wire teams, command vehicles, and other vehicles constantly
use the communication routes from the command post forward to lower
units and back to higher units. The absence of suitable communication
routes causes delays and makes tactical control difficult. When practi-
cable, messengers and wire teams use roads.
d. Space. The various installations within the CP are given enough
space to operate efficiently and avoid unnecessary casualties from enemy
action. The minimum distance between installations outside of struc-
tures is 100 meters. The brigade coordinates the locations of other CPs
that may be located in the vicinity, and provides space in the brigade CP
for liaison personnel from other units.
e. Concealment, Cover, and Security. Consideration is given to the

236 AGO 8326B

availability of natural concealment, cover, and defensive positions. The
CP should not be located near a landmark or terrain feature likely to
attract hostile fire or air attack. A location that cannot be seen from
main roads is preferable. For security reasons, the CP may be located
near a subordinate tactical unit. It is desirable to locate it below the
surface of the ground to reduce the effects of enemy fires. Consideration
must be given to its location with respect to other installations or units to
avoid creating a nuclear target.

24. Designation, Marking, and Time of Opening

The command post may be designated near a landmark that is easily
identified on the map and on the ground, but which is not likely to be an
enemy target. The exact site is located in the general area of the des-
ignated point. When shown on a map, the flagstaff base is placed at
the designated location. The route leading from the designated location
to the exact CP location is marked by signs or guides. For security
reasons, only guides may be used. When signs are used, they are large
enough to be read from a rapidly moving vehicle. When the CP is in a
town, the main roads leading into the town are marked, beginning at the
entrance to the town. The headquarters commandant is responsible for
placing signs and guides. The message center places the signs or guides to
direct incoming messengers to the message center. The CP is opened at
the designated time, or when no time is given, as soon as practicable after
the order is issued.
25. Interior Arrangement
a. The brigade adjutant (S1) is responsible for the internal arrange-
ments of the command post. He selects the locations for all activities
except the communication installations. These locations are selected by
the brigade communication officer. During training, an SOP for the
CP arrangement is given in schematic form to show the location of com-
mand post installations and activities in their relationship to each other.
This SOP is used as a guide; modifications are made as required by the
terrain and the tactical situation.
b. The commander and his staff are conveniently situated to permit
efficient operations. The characteristics of the means of communication
are considered in locating communication installations to serve the com-
mander and staff in the best possible manner.
c. The message center is at the natural entrance to the command post so
that incoming messengers may find it easily and outgoing motor messen-
gers can be dispatched quickly. A messenger station is nearby. Motor
vehicles used by messengers are parked in a concealed and covered loca-
tion.
d. The radio stations are located at a site that provides the maximum
efficiency in transmission and reception. Other considerations include:
location of the panel display, message-drop, and message pickup grounds;
AGO 3326B 237
mutual interference between radio sets; and the possibility of radios being
located by enemy direction-finding equipment. Sets used with remote
control equipment are located without regard to the user.
e. The panel display, message-drop, and message pickup areas should
coincide, when practicable, and be near the radio station whose personnel
are used for their operation. Level, open ground, free of high weeds and
brush and removed from bodies of water, is preferable. The panel display
ground should be situated so that observers can read displays at side
angles from the vertical. Shadows are avoided, where possible. An
unobstructed approach to the message pickup area is required. This
field may also serve as an emergency landing strip for Army aircraft.
f. The switchboard is installed in a location convenient to incoming
wire circuits and as free from noise and interference as possible.
g. Telephones are installed as required, according to the priority
established in the brigade SOP.
h. A motor park with good entrances and exits is established in a
concealed location away from the CP and near an adequate road net.
It is located to prevent its detection from the air.

26. Operation and Conduct of Personnel

a. The CP is organized for 24-hour-a-day operation. During less
active periods, the men take every opportunity to rest and prepare for
more active periods. Duty teams are rotated so that personnel have an
opportunity to rest. Communication personnel are continuously pre-
pared to establish new channels of communication and maintain existing
channels. Wire lines are vulnerable to enemy fire and are repaired
promptly when damaged. Sufficient means of communication must be
available at all times to transmit and receive messages rapidly and effi-
ciently.
b. All incoming messengers deliver their messages to the message center;
the messages are signed for and delivered to the sergeant major by message
center personnel. The sergeant major supervises the circulation of all
incoming messages.
c. Outgoing written messages are usually sent through message center.
The message center records include a message log (a reading of all out-
going messages and messages coming in by messenger), a means chart (a
record of the electrical means of communication available), a live file
(duplicates or skeleton copies of outgoing messages), and a crypto file (a
clear text copy of all outgoing encrypted messages and the encrypted
copy of all incoming encrypted messages). A dead file is turned over
daily to the adjutant for disposition. Normally logs are closed out as of
2400 hours. Officers who send or receive written messages that do not
pass through the message center must see that; a synopsis of each message
is made available without delay for entry in the unit journal.
d. Vehicular traffic in and out of the command post is controlled.
Visitors are stopped at a dismount point and directed to walk to their

238 AGO 3326B

destination. Their vehicles are sent to the parking area. The com-
munication vehicles required in the CP travel at reduced speed and use
existing roads and trails.

27. Local Security and Defense

The headquarters commandant is responsible for the command post
security. Under the supervision of the S3, he prepares plans for the
defense of the CP, using available elements of headquarters and head-
quarters company. All command post personnel are prepared and trained
to assist in the local security and defense of the CP. Hasty entrench-
ments are dug and concealed to provide individual protection and pro-
tection for the CP. Communication installations are dug in to protect
the equipment and permit continuous operation. All measures are
taken to prevent the enemy from detecting the location of the CP.

28. Axis of Command Post Displacement

The axis of command post displacement is the route along which future
CPs are established. When displacement is anticipated, the division or
brigade commander designates the axis of displacement. The axis is
designated by successive probable command post locations in the direction
of movement or on a specific route along which the CP will move. The
axis extends to the final objective or far enough to provide a guide for dis-
placement until further orders can be issued.

29. Displacement
a. Displacement is coordinated to avoid disrupting communication and
losing control. Before a location is changed, the minimum communica-
tion facilities required at the new CP are established. This requires that
the communication officer be notified well in advance of the estimated
time of displacement. Other units concerned are notified of the contem-
plated change. When the new location is not already prescribed, the S3
confers with the brigade communication officer and submits recommenda-
tions for the new location to the commander. The S2 must be consulted
with respect to the vulnerability from nuclear weapons attack of any
location considered. A quartering party, including the S1, the brigade
communication officer, guides, and security and communication personnel,
goes to the new location. The exact site is selected and the locations for
the different installations are designated. Communication is established
and guides and security personnel are posted.
b. When the site is ready for occupancy, the commander is notified.
The command group moves to the new location according to his instruc-
tions. Enough personnel, including communication personnel, remain at
the old command post to operate and close it. On the commander's
orders, the old command post is closed and the new command post opened
at the same time. All communication personnel go to the new site,
except a guide who remains to direct messengers to the new location.
AGO 3326B 239
 c. The brigade and the forward command communication signal
section and area signal center platoon supporting it coordinate closely to
insure continuous communication during the displacement.

Section III. TACTICAL APPLICATION OF COMMUNICATIONS

30. Communication in an Assembly Area

Before moving his unit to the division assembly area, the brigade com-
mander makes a reconnaissance of the brigade prospective location. His
communication officer and selected communication personnel are included
in the reconnaissance party to insure the early establishment of adequate
communication. During the course of the concentration, communication
personnel operate the communication system, continue training, prepare
plans, and maintain equipment. Commercial wire installations are used
whenever practicable; additional construction is held to the minimum
necessary for adequate control. Instructions concerning restrictions on
the use of commercial equipment are furnished by the division signal
officer. The use of radios may be restricted to preserve secrecy. and to
conserve batteries, but intelligence and warning nets may be operated.
Transmissions in these nets may be limited. All types of messengers are
used extensively in assembly areas. Elaborate command post installations
are avoided. Each headquarters is established in its assigned area and
is located to facilitate communication.

31. Communication During Marches and Halts

a. General. Communication during marches is maintained between the
brigade march command post and the next higher unit, adjacent columns,
security and reconnaissance elements, command posts of major units with
the columns and trains. Units within columns also maintain communica-
tion. The most emphasized means are radio and messenger (motor, foot,
and light aircraft). These means are supplemented by visual and sound.
Radio is restricted or silenced if secrecy is imperative. March orders in-
clude communication instructions and the location of command posts.
Communication information covered in SOP's may be omitted in march
orders.
b. Radio. Radio is an effective means for controlling units during a
march. Some secrecy of movement is achieved through the use of crypto-
systems and by reporting positions in reference to phase lines and march
objectives. Ranges are reduced during movement and when line-of-sight
locations cannot be selected. All commanders and operators familiarize
themselves with the details of net organization, security codes, and the
authentication system to be used. Radios in light aircraft and those with
liaison officers are useful in establishing communication with adjacent
columns and units, and within extended columns. If march control points

240 AGO 3326B

are used, they should be equipped with radio sets for added control by
serving as relay stations for message traffic.
c. Messengers. Messengers are used by all units during a march. Foot
and motor messengers are used from front to rear. Motor messengers are
used between adjacent columns. Messages may be exchanged between
moving vehicles. Light aircraft messengers facilitate communication be-
tween adjacent columns, to distant higher headquarters, and within
extended columns. Messengers are informed before the march of the route,
formation, location of command posts, and special vehicle markings.
d. Visual. If visual signals are prescribed, lookouts are assigned areas
of responsibility in which to observe for them. Pyrotechnics may be
employed to report arrival at a phase line or march objective, for ground-
air communication, to warn of air, CBR, and mechanized attacks, and to
transmit other prearranged messages. Panels are used to identify friendly
columns, specific vehicles in a column, command posts, and message drop
and pickup areas. Panels are kept ready for use, and panel teams may
leave the column temporarily to communicate with aircraft.
e. Wire. Wire normally is not installed during a march, but commercial
wire systems and existing field wire circuits may be used.
f. Command Posts. Command posts are located to facilitate control of
the column. The brigade command post travels at the head of the main
body. Command posts of units in the main body are at the heads of their
respective units. A motorized command post consists only of essential
command and communication vehicles. Communication vehicles include
those for messengers, panel teams, and radios used during the march.
Wire vehicles required during or immediately after the march are also
included. Communication personnel not needed to maintain communica-
tion during the march travel with the headquarters company. During
foot marches, command posts may be motorized. They move by bounds
between units. Their composition and relative location within the column
are the same as for a motor march. Vehicles and designated personnel
which are not required to maintain communication during a foot march
move near the head of the vehicles that follow the foot elements. Com-
mUnication personnel who cannot be transported, march with their units.
g. Halts. During temporary halts, communication is maintained as
during the march. During prolonged halts, messengers are used exten-
sively. Radios are used except when restricted for security reasons. If a
quartering party precedes the march, it should include communication
personnel to facilitate the establishment of communication in the bivouac
or assembly area. Wire is installed, the amount depending on the need
for wire communication, the supply of wire available, and the duration
of the halt. It is particularly desirable for the brigade to have wire com-
munication to lower units and communication with higher headquarters
through the area communication system during overnight halts.
AGO 3326B 241
32. Communication During the Approach March and in
Assembly Area
a. Approach March.
(1) The means of communication used on marches in tactical col-
umns are continued in use in the approach march. Radio and
messenger are the most used means, supplemented by visual and
sound. Communication security measures continue to be en-
forced as in marches in tactical column. Cryptography is used
except when clear text messages may be transmitted without
violating security restrictions.
(2) Messenger communication becomes difficult when units assume
extended formations or move cross-country. March command
posts are more difficult for messengers to locate, which delays
them in delivering messages. Instructions to messengers must
be explicit.
(3) It is not practical to use wire in the approach march. The pre-
mature establishment of wire system results in loss of wire, over-
extension of circuits, and delay in installing communication
for the next operation.
(4) March command posts are located to facilitate control. In
deployed units, they are well forward and near the center of
formation. They follow natural routes of communication.
(5) Communication officers and their assistants keep abreast of the
situation, supervise the operation of communication system,
and plan continuously for future operations.
b. Assembly Areas. On arrival in an assembly area, temporary com-
mand posts and a limited communication system are established. The
means of communication most emphasized are messenger and wire.
Communication personnel install, operate, and maintain the communica-
tion system and prepare for the next operation. The commander informs
the communication officer of his plan for the next operation at the earliest
practicable time.
33. Communication During the AttacOk Reorganization,
and Pursuit
a. Planning and Orders for the Attact.
(1) To facilitate coordination of communication matters, the brigade
commander may take his communication officer to hear the order
of the next higher commander. The communication officer
normally is present also when his commander announces his
plans and issues his attack order. If he cannot be present on
either occasion, the commander or S3 informs him of the latest
developments in the situation and the tactical plan at the earliest
practicable time.
(2) As soon as the communication officer learns the details of the
brigade plan of attack, he completes his own plans for the opera-

242 AGO 3326B

 tion. He discusses his tentative plans with the S3, then com-
pletes his map and ground reconnaissance. He takes wire
personnel and other selected members of the communication
platoon with him on the ground reconnaissance. He submits
recommendations to be included in paragraph 5 of the operation
order.
(3) When the brigade commander issues his attack order, the
communication officer completes the coordination of his plans
with others concerned, including the staff, lower unit com-
manders or communication personnel, and supporting units.
He then goes to the designated general location of the command
post with the Si to determine the exact location and interior
arrangement. He takes the personnel of the communication
platoon, leaving only enough men in the assembly area to pro-
vide communication until the command post is established and
occupied. Finally, he issues oral instructions for the establish-
ment of the communication system.
b. Wire CommunicationDuring the Attack,
(1) ForwardArea Signal Centers. The Forward Area Signal Center
Platoons, and Forward Command Communication Sections are
responsible for providing a link for the brigade into the ap-
propriate area communication system.
(2) Functions of the brigade communication platoon. The wire
section extends the brigade observation post line, and the lines to
attacking battalion command posts whenever possible. Their
installation and maintenance have primary importance. Lateral
communication is available through facilities of the division
area system.
(3) Telephone facilities at brigade command post. Telephones in
the command post are installed according to priority established
in the brigade SOP. A telephone for the message center is
given a high priority. Initially, telephones are shared by two or
more officers; for example, the commander and executive
officer, the S2 and S3, and S1 and S4. Additional telephones are
installed as rapidly as possible.
c. Radio Communication During the Attack. Radio communication is
available within all units down to and including squads. To attain
secrecy and surprise, the use of radio may be restricted until a prescribed
time. A further restriction may be directed for maneuvering and reserve
units before they are committed. Listening silence is not carried to the
point of hampering the attacking echelons. When it is probable that the
enemy knows the location or anticipates the movements of friendly units,
and after contact is made, there is little to gain by imposing radio listening
silence. Radio nets operated within the brigade are flexible and may be
altered as required by the situation. The brigade can communicate with
division in six different radio nets, using AM and FM radios. Corn-
AGO 3326B 243
mand nets and a logistics net are established within the brigade with FM
and AM radio. Each liaison officer is provided with an FM voice radio
for communication with the commander and S3.
d. Messenger Communication During the Attack. Messengers are used
extensively as a means of communication during the attack. Because of
the fluid nature of most attack situations, only special messengers are
used. For further information on messenger communication, see FM
21-75.
e. Visual and Sound Communication During the Attack. Visual and
sound signals are used to transmit prearranged messages prescribed in the
SOI or by the commander. Each commander insures orders and proper
equipment is issued to units to implement the visual and/or sound com-
munication plan, particularly for ground-to-air visual communication.
f. Command Posts During the Attack. To avoid displacement during
the early stages of the attack, the brigade command post is initially
established as far forward as practicable. Throughout the attack, the
communication officer plans for prompt displacement of the command
post and for efficient and continuous communication during displacement.
g. Displacement of Command Posts.
(1) Wire. The communication officer keeps abreast of the tactical
situation at all times. He obtains timely information of con-
templated displacements of the command post from the S3 or the
commander. The brigade command post normally moves along
the best available route of communication through the brigade's
area. This is normally the axis of command post displacement.
To expedite the establishment of communication at the new
location and minimize the number of new lines to be laid, the
existing wire circuits may be used during displacements. (A
technique to assist commanders in maintaining wire communica-
tion is to provide them with a short piece of wire with alligator
clips attached and a telephone, TA-312, to enter existing wire
systems.) The communication officer constantly reconnoiters
and plans for the extension of the wire system. If the brigade
command post follows the axis of one of the battalions, the
existing wire lines may be used for communication from the new
location to the rear. The command post may displace along the
brigade observation post wire line. The communication officer
insures this line is extended as the attack progresses. He
anticipates displacements by installing as many wire lines in
subsequent locations as the tactical situation permits. The
brigade communication officer must coordinate with the platoon
leader of the forward area signal center platoon as soon as the
displacement of the command post is anticipated to insure that
facilities to provide entries into the division area communication
system will be available to the brigade at the new location.

244 AGO 8326B

 (2) Opening the new command net. If the general location of the
new command post has been prescribed, a quartering party, in-
cluding the S1, communication officer, guides, and security and
communication personnel go to the new location. Communica-
tion is established and guides are posted. Displacement is
carefully coordinated to avoid disrupting communication and
losing control. All units concerned are notified of the contem-
plated change.
(3) Closing the old command post. When the new command post is
ready for operation, the commander is notified. The command
group moves to the new location according to his instructions.
Sufficient personnel, including communication personnel, re-
main at the old command post to operate it until the commander
orders it closed. The old command post is closed and the new
one opened at the same time. All personnel go to the new
command post except a guide who remains temporarily at the old
site to direct messengers to the new location. All units con-
cerned are notified when the new command post is opened.
h. Communication During Reorganization. The means of communica-
tion used during the attack are continued during reorganization. After
units disperse and start reorganizing, the communication officer and non-
commissioned officers prepare for the next operation and take action to
obtain replacements for losses of personnel and equipment within their
units. They reassign duties and reallocate equipment and supplies
pending the arrival of replacements. They supervise the repair or
replacement of faulty signal equipment and resupply of units with wire
and batteries.
i. Communication During Pursuit. Units in pursuit, to maintain
direct pressure against or encircle the enemy, use their means of com-
munication as in the tactical column and approach march phases of a
movement to contact. Units in contact with and maintaining direct
pressure against a fleeing enemy use their communication means as during
the attack. Pursuit requires extensive reliance on radio; enemy inter-
ception of radio traffic has little significance. Existingowire lines along
routes of pursuit are used if they are serviceable.

34. Communication During Defense and Reliefs

a. General. Advance planning and reconnaissance by communication
personnel are essential in the defense. Actions and duties are like those
for the attack, but the communication system is more elaborate and
inclusive. All possible steps are taken to insure uninterrupted operation.
Time usually is available to improve the system, including the selection
and preparation of alternate command posts which are farther to the rear
than in the attack.
b. Wire Communication During Defense.
(1) General. Wire is used extensively as a means of communication
AGO 3326B 245
 during defense. It is installed as rapidly as time, personnel;
and equipment permit, and it is continuously improved during
the conduct of the defense.
(2) Brigade system. The forward area signal center platoon installa-
tion section lays and maintains wire lines or cables from its
switchboard to the brigade switchboard. The communication
platoon lays two or more lines over different routes between the
command posts of the brigade and frontline battalions. This
platoon also lays wire to the reserve battalions and the brigade
observation post. Attached and supporting units are included
in the wire system. Local telephones are installed as prescribed
-in the brigade SOP.
c. Radio Communication During Defense. Radio communication
normally is restricted for security reasons until contact has been made with
the enemy. When adequate wire communication is available, radio is
not used, but radio nets remain open in case wire communication is
interrupted or becomes inadequate.
d. Messenger Communication During Defense. Special messengers are
used extensively during the defense and scheduled messenger service may
be established as required.
e. Visual and Sound Communication During Defense. Visual signals
requiring lin'e-of-sight between observation posts and rear installations
can be used to advantage in defensive actions. They are used in accord-
ance with the SOI and SSI.
f. Communication During Defense Against Airborne Operations. All
units must be prepared for defense against small airborne attacks, to in-
clude helicopterborne attacks. The brigade establishes warning stations
at the more likely landing areas within its area of responsibility to provide
information on which the brigade commander can base his decisions for
the conduct of the defense. The warning stations are connected with
the brigade command post by every practical means of communication.
Wire may be buried a few inches underground to conceal it from enemy
airborne troops. Commercial wire lines may be used to supplement the
military wire system. Bombing before the airborne attack may interrupt
communication, so all communication personnel are continuously pre-
pared to restore damaged circuits. Communication personnel not en-
gaged in operating communication facilities provide a mobile pool for
maintenance.
g. Communication During Reliefs. When a brigade relieves another
unit, the communication officer, accompanied by key communication
personnel, precedes the brigade to become familiar with the communica-
tion system in operation. The communication officer makes arrange-
ments with the unit being relieved concerning equipment and wire to be
left on the position. During reconnaissance, wire personnel familiarize
themselves with all wire routes. The communication officer of the unit
being relieved furnishes the incoming communication officer with a line-

246 AGO 3326B

route map and circuit, traffic, and radio net diagrams. The incoming
communication officer obtains as much information as possible about
road conditions and routes for messengers. He evaluates conditions that
may affect uninterrupted radio and wire communication. The relieving
unit takes over the communication system when its commander assumes
responsibility for the area. When secrecy is imperative, the relieving unit
adopts all measures necessary to prevent the enemy from discovering any
change in the tactical situation. These measures include continuing the
use of the call signs, frequencies, codes, and ciphers of the unit being
relieved.

35. Communication During Retrograde Movements

a. Communication in Withdrawal From Action.
(1) General. Communication during withdrawal from action is
characterized by detailed planning and close 'coordination. As
many communication channels are maintained as the situation,
available equipment, and restrictions imposed by higher head-
quarters permit.
(2) During daylight. If the brigade is forced to make a daylight
withdrawal, communication personnel establish, operate, and
maintain all available communication facilities. The circum-
stances which force a daylight withdrawal seldom permit de-
tailed planning and preparation.
(3) During darkness. A night withdrawal is characterized by de-
liberate planning, reconnaissance, and execution. The tactical
and communication plans are carefully coordinated. Plans are
made to maintain communication in the old position as long as
necessary and to provide communication during the movement
to the rear and within the new battle position or assembly area.
(a) The communication officer reconnoiters the routes of with-
drawal to determine what existing wire circuits can be used
to provide communication to various assembly areas and
march control points, and between the forward and rear
positions. He also investigates the rear position for installing
a communication system there as soon as practicable. The
reconnaissance is conducted by day, and critical points are
marked (or guides are posted) for easy identification at night.
(b) Existing communication facilities and a minimum of communi-
cation personnel are left in the old position for the detach-
ments left in contact. The brigade communication platoon
leader remains to supervise communication. Unused wire
lines are recovered or destroyed. Deceptive measures include
the use of dummy radio stations to maintain normal radio
activity in the old position.
(c) Special messengers and existing wire are used extensively
during the movement to the rear. Staff and liaison officers
AGO 3326B 247
 provide maximum control. Whenever possible, march control
points are provided with communication by tapping tele-
phones on wire circuits already established to the rear. Radio
listening silence is maintained within units. If secrecy be-
comes unimportant, the higher commander directs the lifting
of radio listening silence.
(d) The majority of the communication platoon precedes the
main body to the rear position to establish communication
facilities. If the tactical plan is to renew the defense at the
rear position, a complete defensive wire system is established
there. The forward area signal center platoon and/or forward
command communication section chief has the new area sur-
veyed for installing his facilities when the main body moves
in. Radios in the rear position listen on assigned frequencies
but remain silent until the brigade commander orders them
into operation. If the withdrawal is to be followed by some
other type of operation, only essential communication facilities
are established within the brigade assembly area. Recon-
naissance and plans for communication in the next operation
are begun immediately.
b. Communicationin a Delaying Action. The communication system for
a delaying action is similar to that for an attack. Emphasis is on mobility.
Maximum use is made of previously installed wire lines for the control of
units during movement to the rear. As time permits, a wire system is
installed at each successive position to include the battalions and separate
units. Full use is made of visual means and messengers. Timely measures
are taken to reconnoiter for and establish communication on successive
delaying positions. New wire lines ordinarily are not laid between suc-
cessive positions.

36. Communication With Attached and Supporting Units

a. Infantry-Tank Communication.
(1) Radio communication is provided between the infantry and tank
elements. This direct communication between all rifle units and
individual tanks and tank units is desirable. The brigade will
establish direct communication with the attached battalions
and when required, the armored cavalry squadron.
(2) Tank crews and personnel outside the tanks have a wire com-
munication capability through the external telephone on the
rear of each tank. The handset is connected to the tank inter-
phone system. Expedients may be used if additional wire com-
munication with individual tanks is required.
b. Command Post Communication. The command posts of attached
tank battalions are included in the brigade wire system in defensive and
static situations. The brigade uses the division area communication

248 AGO 3326B

system for communication with the armored cavalry squadron when
necessary.
c. Infantry-Artillery Communication. A direct support artillery battal-
ion normally supports each brigade. It ties into the brigade command net.
The artillery forward observers operate in the command net of the in-
fantry company with which they are working and this provides a link
between the forward observer and the company commander for coordi-
nation of fire support. The mortar platoon FDC operates in the artillery
fire direction net to provide an additional link. This is supplemented by
a wire system. In addition, direct communication with other division
artillery units is provided through the division radio nets and the area
communication system.

AGO 3326B 249

 INDEX
Paragraph Page
Adjutant ------------------------------- 17 16
Administrative move, air_--------------- 193 180
Administrative support operations center -------- 68 70
Advance guard ------------------------------- 108 107
Advance to contact. (See Movement to contact.)
Aerial envelopment_-- - - ------- 91, 126 85, 120
Aerial resupply ---------------.- - - 81 79
Airborne infantry battalion --------- 36 37
Airborne operations------------------- 193-199 180
Characteristics-- 195 182
Definitions ----- 193 180
Echelonment ---------------------------- 196 184
Orders, brigade ------ 197 184
Airborne raids ------- ------ 197 184
Air defense -- 41 45
Airmobile operations ----------------- --- 198 187
Characteristics ------- --......-- -- 195 182
Definition ------------------------ 193 180
Echelonment -- - -- - - -- 196 184
Air movement plan, joint airborne operations ---- 197 184
Air superiority. (see also close air support):
Air transportability -------------------.. 194 . . 182
Antiguerrilla operations ------------------- 214 204
Defense ------------------------------- 151 143
General --------------------------- - 5, 60, 68-88 4, 65, 70
Joint airborne operations ------------------ 197 184
Linkup operations ------------------------ 202 198
Offense --------------------------------- 105 106
Passage of lines --- 189 177
Relief in place ..-------------------- 187 174
Retrograde operations --------------------- 174 163
All-around defense ---------------------------- 139 129
Alternate plans ------------------------------ 104, 166, 171, 105, 159, 161,
200 196
Alternate positions --------------------------- 177 166
Amphibious operations -- - - - - - 203-206 199
Antiguerrilla operations ------------- 207-214 200
Basic considerations ---------------------- 208 200
Establishment of combat bases ------------- 210 201
Sequence of antiguerrilla operations - 209 201
Types of offensive action ------------------ 212, 213 202
Antitank defense ----------------------------- 157 153
Approaches. (See Avenue of approach.)
Area defense (see also Defense) ----------------- 140 132
Armored cavalry squadron -------------------- 38, 148 42, 138
Armored personnel carrier --------------------- 10, 12, 62, 12, 13, 65,
112, 191 111, 179
Army aviation:
Capabilities --------------------------- 159 154
Support ------------------------------- 54, 110, 148, 62, 111, 138,
150 141

250 AGO 3326B

 Paragraph Page
Artillery. (see also Fire support):
Capabilities -------------------------- 40 43
Defense ---------------------------------- 100, 148 98, 138
Fire planning ------------------.------ 43 52
Assault echelon, airborne operation ------------- 196 184
Assembly area ------------------------------- 102, 106, 175 101, 106, 165,
(app. II, 30) 240
Attack (see also Offense):
Action prior ------------------------------ 106 106
Conduct --------------- 90, 112, 118, 122 84,111,114,117
Formations (figs. 20, 21, 22) --------------- 99 95
Fortified area ------------------.--------- 224 209
Night ---------------------------------- 127-129 121
Of guerrilla force -------------------------- 204 199
Planning ------------------------------- 92-106, 120 86, 115
Phases --------------------------------- 113, 116, 119 112,114,115
Position ------------------------------ - 102 101
Attachment ---------------------------- - 65,66 66,67
Aviation officer ---------------------------- 18 19
Aviation platoon ----------------------------- 30, 55, 56-61 29, 62
Axes of advance.--------------------------- 102 101
Bath services ------------------- 87 82
Blocking position ----------------------------- 139, 165 129, 158
Breaking contact ----------------------------- 174 163
Brigade:
Capabilities ------------------- 7-10, 192, 194 9, 180, 182
Characteristics ------------------- 5 4
Built-up areas, combat ------------------------ 225 210
Burials -.------------------- 88 82
Captured equipment --------------------- 51, 84 61, 81
Chaplin -------------------------------- 18 19
Check points -.------------------------- 102, 170 101,161
Chemical:
Fires --- -- - -- - -- - -- -- - -- - -- - 41, 121 45, 116
Officer ----- 18 19
Units ---------------------------------- 64 66
Civil affairs --------------------------------- 76, 171,211 73, 161,202
Close air support-------------------- 44 53
Combat in fortified areas --- 223-225 209
Combat outpost ------------------------------ 152 144
Combat power -------------------------------- 92, 119 86, 115
Combat and combat support units ------------- 34-37, 40, 53, 37, 43, 61, 62,
54, 62-64, 189 177
Command:
Command post, brigade ------------------- 23, 187, 189 24, 174, 177, 235
(app. II, 22-29)
I)uring movement to contact --------------- 110 111
Group -- - - - -- - - - 24 26
In attack.------------------------------- 118 114
Link up operations - .--- --- 200 196
Relations with other units ----------------- 186 173
Responsibilities ------------------- 13 14
Succession ----------------------------- 14 14
Vehicle section --------------------------- 31 29

AGO 3326B 251

 Paragraph Page
Communication:
Airborne operations ---------------------- 199 191
Attached units --------------------------- (app. II, 36) 248
Attack ----------------------------- 128 (app. II, 33) 122, 31
Assembly area ---------------------------- (app. II, 30) 240
Aviation platoon ------------------------- 57 63
Brigade --- - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - (app. II, 2) 218
Defense --------------- 150 (app. II, 34) 141,245
Delaying action --------------------------- (app. II, 35) 247
Duties of personnel ---------------------- (app. II-3, 218, 219,222
4,6)
Integration, radio/wire ----------- (app. II, 15) 231
Maintenance ------------------- (app. II, 8) 224
Marches ------------------- (app. II, 31) 240
Means ---------------------------------- (app. II, 9) 224
Message center --------------------------- (app. II, 5) 220
Messenger ------------------------ (app. II, 12) 229
Night attack ---------------------------- 128 122
Officer-_ _ - 18 19
Oral orders to platoon -.------------------- (app. II, 19) 233
Orders --------------------------------- (app. II, 18) 232
Organization for combat ------------- 65 66
Platoon -------------------------------- 33, (app. II, 3) 31,218
Pursuit ------------------- (app. II, 33) 242
Radio ------------------ (app. II-6, 10) 222, 225
Relief operations ------------------------- (app. II, 34) 245
Responsibilities - .. - -- --- (app. II, 1) 217
Retrograde - -_____-_-______._._______171 (app. II, 35) 161, 247
Security ------------------------------- (app. II, 20) 233
SOI and SSI ----------------------------- (app. II, 16) 231
SOP------------------- (app. II, 17) 232
Sound ---------------------------------- (app. II, 14) 231
Supply --------------------------------- (app. II, 7) 223
Supporting units ----- ----- (app. II, 36) 248
Training ------------------------------- (app. II, 21) 235
Visual --------------------------------- (app. II, 13) 230
Wire ------------------------------------- (app. II-5, 11) 220, 228
Conduct of attack ---------------------------- 112-118, 123 111, 117
Conduct of river crossing --------------------- 219 207
Consolidation -------------------------- 116 114
Contingency planning ------------- 166 159
Control (includes command and control measures):
Boundaries ----------------------------- 170 161
Counterattack ------------------- 152 144
Defense ------------------------------ 149 140
Gaps ----------------------------------- 103 104
Night attack ----------------------------- 128 122
Offense --------------------------------- 96, 102 91,101
Retirement ----------------------------- 181 170
Retrograde ----------------------------- 170 161
Withdrawal ----------------------------- 174, 176 163, 166
Withdrawal thru a rearward position 182 170

252 AGO 3326B

 paragraph Page
Counterattack:
Actions against enemy -.- -- --- 203 199
Enemy ---------------------------------- 137 129
Planning ------------------------------- 152 144
Counterintelligence ---------------------------- 50 60
Covering force:
Defense ------------------- 161-164 155
Movement to contact --------------------- 108 107
Withdrawal ----------------------------- 175 165
Crossing site ----- 218 205

Defense:
Air ------------------------------------ 41 45
Airborne attack -------------------------- 158 153
Antitank ------------------------------- 157 153
Area ------------------------------------- 140 132
Armor ----------- 157 153
Communication --------------------- 150, (app. II, 34) 141,245
Conduct - ------- ------- ------- ------- 153 146
Echelons .--------------------------------
142,143 133,135
Fortified area ----------------------------- 224 209
Fundamental considerations ----------- 139 129
Guerrillas -..------- ------- ------- 159 154
Infiltration -- _ 169 160
Mobile --------------------------------- 140, 154 132, 150
Objective area, joint airborne operations ---- 197 184
Offensive maneuver ----------------------- 139 129
Planning ------------------------------- 146-155 137
Purpose -------------------------------- 137 129
River line ------------------------------- 155 150
Roles of brigade ------------- ------------ 141 132
Security echelon -------------------------- 143 135
Types - ---------------------------------- 140 132
Delaying action ------------------------------ 168, 171,177 160, 161,166
Conduct -------------------------------- 179 168
Planning ------------------------------- 178 167
Selection of positions ------------------- 178 167
Deliberate river crossing ---------------- 216 205
Demonstrations .-.. .......................
222 208
Depth defense ------------------- 139 129
Detachments left in contact --.-------- 175 165
Direct support ----------------- 65 66
Direction of attack --------------------------- 102 101
Discipline, law and order ---------------------- 73 73
Dispersion ------------------------------ 139 129
Displacement of command post ------------ 23, (app. II, 28-29) 24, 239
Distribution of supplies ------------------------ 80 76
Division administrative support elements -------- 78 74

Encirclement --------------------------- 213 202

Engineer support:
Defense -------------------------------- 148, 150 138, 141
General -------------------------------- 53 61
Envelopment ---------------------------- 91, 96,98,123 85, 91,93,117
Equipment exchange, relief in place ------------ 187 174

AGO 3326B 253

 Paragraph Page
Evacuation:
Casualties ------------------- 86, 88 81, 82
Material ------------------- 84 81
Executive officer ------------------------------ 17 16
Exploitation ------------------- 133-135 125

Feints ----------------------------------- 221 208

Fire support:
Conduct of attack, during ------------- 101 100
Control measures ------------------------- 41 45
Coordinator ---------------------------- 19 23
Counterattack ------------------- 152 144
Defense ------------------- 150 141
Defense of river line ---------------------- 154 150
General -------------------------------- 39 42
Integration of fires ------------------------ 41 45
Linkup operations ------------------------ 200 196
Movement to contact --------------------- 111 111
Offense -------------------------------- 100,101,121 98,100,116
Plan ------------------------------------- 39,42, 43 42, 50, 52
Relief in place --------------------------- 187 174
Reorganization and consolidation, during 101 100
Requests ------------------------------- 44 53
River crossing ---------------------------- 218 205
Types of fire ------------------------------ 101 100
Withdrawal by air ------------------------ 199 191
Flank guard --------------------------------- 108 107
Followup echelon, airborne operation ---------- 196 184
Formations (figs. 20, 21, 22) ---------------- 99 95
Forward defense area ------------------------- 144 135
Forward defense forces ----------------------- 144 135

Gaps ---- ------------------------------- 103 104

Graves registration --------------------------- 78, 88 74, 82
Ground, tactical plan, joint airborne operations -__ 197 184
Guerrilla warfare ----------------------------- 1 3
Operations against guerrillas --------------- 159 154
Hasty river crossing ------------------- 216 205
Headquarters, brigade ------------------------ 27 28
Headquarters and headquarters company -------- 26,28 28
Headquarters management- -------------- · 75 73

Illumination --------------------------- 129 123

Infantry battalion ---------------------------- 36 37
Infiltration:
Conduct -------------------------------- 126 120
Lanes ------------------- 102,126 101, 120
Offensive -------------- 96, 124-126 119
Intelligence ---------------- 46-52, 94, 186 58, 88, 173
Intelligence officer ----------------- 17 16
Interior arrangement of CP------------------- 17, (app. II, 25) 16, 237
Irregular forces. (See Guerrilla warfare.)
Joint airborne operations ---------------------- 193, 197 180, 184
Landing plan, joint airborne operation ---------- 197 184

254 AGO 3326B

 Paragraph Page
Liaison:
Airborne operations ----------------------- 197 184
Officers ------------------------------- - 20 24
Section ---------------------------------- 29 29
Line of departure - -102 101
Linkup operations ---------------------- __--_- 126, 200-202 126, 196
Logistics ------------------------------------- 77-88 74
Logistics officer ------------------------------- 17 16
Long range reconnaissance patrols -------------- 226 211

Main attack ------------------------------- - 98, 120, 123 93, 115, 117

Main body ----------------------------------- 108 107
Maintenance ---------------------------- 82 80
Maintenance aviation ------------------------- 59, 85 64, 81
Maneuver, forms and choice -------------------- 90, 91 84, 85
Marshalling plan, joint airborne operations ------ 197 184
Medical, support ----------------------------- 86 81
Meeting engagements . ------------.--------- 109 110
Mission:
Brigades -- ------------ 3 4
Infantry battalions ------------------------ 36 37
Mobile defense. (See also Defense) ------------ 140, 154 132, 150
Mobility ------------------------------------- 12, 62, 157, 13, 65, 153, 160
158, 167
Morale considerations --.--------------------- 71, 167 72, 160
Movement control ---------------------------- 186 173
Movement to contact --.--------- ------ --- 107-111 106
Mutual support ------------------------------ 139 129

Naval gunfire ---------------------------- 44 53

Nuclear fires. (see also Fire support):
Allocation ----------------------------- 41 45
Alternate plans, in relation ---------------- 101 100
Defense ---------- 150 141
Employment -...... --------------.-.---- 44, 45 53, 55
Offense ----- ---------------------------- 121 116
Passage of lines --------------------------- 189, 190 177, 179
Reconnaissance in force------------------- 130, 131 124
Requests ------------------- 44 53
Special considerations --------------------- 45 55

Objective:
Infiltration ---------------------------- 125 120
Offense -------------------------------- 96,102,125 91,101,120
Obstacle ------------------------------------ 95, 157, 178 89, 153, 167
Offense:
Choice of maneuver ----------------------- 91 85
Conduct -------------------------------- 90, 112-118 84,111
Envelopment ----------------------------- 91 85
Mission ---------------------------------- 90, 93 84, 88
Penetration ------------------------------- 119-122 115
Planning .------------- 92-106 86
Preparation ---------------------------- 114 112
Operational control ------------------.--------- 65 66
Operations and training officer ------------------ 17 16

AGO 3326B 255

 Paragraph Page
Organization for combat:
Counterattack ------------------- 152 144
Defense -------------------------------- 148 138
General ------------------------------- 5, 65,67 4,66, 68
Offense ------------------- 97, 100, 106 92, 98, 106
Relationship of units -------------- 66, 67 67, 68
Relief --------------------------------- 187 174
Retrograde operation ------------------- 172 162
Security force .----------------------------- 162 156
Passage of command --------------------------- 187, 189, 200 174, 177, 196
Passage of defiles -- --------------------------- 227 211
Passage of lines ------------------------------ 182, 184, 185, 170, 172, 177
189-191
Passage of tank or mechanized infantry units ---- 191 179
Pathfinders ------------------- 198, 199 187, 191
Patrolling:
Defense -------------------------------- 156 152
Long range reconnaissance -------------- 226 211
Penetration ---------------------------- 91, 100, 119-122 85,98, 115
Personnel and administration ------------------ 69-76 72
Phase lines ---------------------------------- 102, 170 101,161
Planning sequence ------------------- 92, 171, 197,218 86, 161,184, 205
Preparatory fires ----------------------------- 101, 114 100, 112
Prescribed nuclear load --------------- 41 45
Prisoners of war -.--- ---- 74 73
Pursuit -.--- --- --- -- 100, 136, 213 98, 127, 202
Raids ------------------- 220 207
Rear echelon, airborne operation ---------- 196 184
Rear guard (see also March) ------------- 108 107
Reconnaissance:
Defense -------------------------------- 152 144
General .-------------------------------
48 59
In force ---------------------------------- 130-132 124
Relief in place ----------------- 186, 187 173, 174
River crossing operations ------------------- 217 205
Reconnaissance squadron ---------------------- 38 42
Relief in place- .... 184, 185, 187, 188 172, 174, 176
Relief operations - ----------------------------- 183-191 172
Reorganization ------------------------- 116 114
Repair parts --- -------------------------- 83 80
Replacements --------------------------------- 70 72
Requisitioning ------------------- 80 76
Reserve:
Defense -------------------------------- 145,165 137, 158
Joint airborne operations -- - -- - 197 184
Offense -------------------------------- 98, 115,120 93, 113,115
Security echelon -------------------------- 163 156
Withdrawal ----------------------------- 175, 176 165, 166
Retirement ------------------- 168, 180, 181 160, 170
Retrograde operations ------------------------- 167-182 160
Characteristics ------------------- 169 160
Planning ------------------------------- 171 161
Types - --------------------------------- 168 160

256 AGO 3326B

 Paragraph Page

River crossings ------------------------------ 215-219 204

River line, defense __-------------------------- 155 150
Road network use ---------------------------- 178 167
Routes in passage of lines -------------- 189 177
Routes in withdrawal -------------------------- 170, 178 161, 167

Salvage -------------------------------- 84 81
Scheme of maneuver. (See Maneuver, scheme of.)
Scout section ------------------------------- 32 30
Secrecy -------------------------------- 173, 174 163
Security:
Area ----------------------------------- 164 158
Communication ---------------------- (app. II-20, 27) 233, 239
Defense ------------------------------- 139 129
Relief in place -..------------------------ 187 174
Retrograde ------------------- 169, 174 160, 163
Security forces:
Brigade ------------------- 161-164 155
General -------------------------------- 103 104
Sequence of relief ----------------------------- 187 174
Sergeant Major ------------------------------- 17 16
Signal corps units ------------------- 63 66
Spoiling attack ------------------------------- 147, 153 137, 146
Staff:
Relationships with commanders -------- 15 15
Special -------------------------------- 16, 18 15, 19
Supervision ------------------- 15, 17 15, 16
Unit ----------------------------------- 16, 17 15, 16
Successive positions .------------------ 177 166
Supporting attack ---------------------------- 98, 120, 123 93, 115, 117
Supply --------------------------------- 80 76
Surgeon -------------------------------- 18, 86 19,81

Tactical cover and deception -- ------- 106 106

Intelligence aspects ----------------------- 52 61
Retrograde ------------------------------- 175 165
River crossings------------------- 218 205
Withdrawal by air ------------------------ 199 191
Tank units:
Mission and capabilities ------------------- 37 39
Night withdrawal ----------------- 175 165
Passage' of lines - ---------
---------------- 191 179
Terrain defense --- - - -- -95, 139, 147
- 89, 129, 137
Time of attack ------------------------------- 102 101
Traffic control posts ------------- ------------ 170 161
Trains (brigade) ------------------------------ 25, 78, 79, 26, 74, 75,
105, 115 106, 113
Transfer of command..-....................... 186 173
Transportation, ground ----------------------- 62 65
Troop safety - -------------------------------- 45 55
Warning order 175
.------------------------------ 165
Weather -------------------------------- 95 89

AGO 3326B 257

 Paragraph Page

Withdrawal - .--- - - - - 168, 173-176 160, 163

Air- ----------------------------------- 199 191
Daylight ------------------- 173,176 163, 166
Night ------------.-.-----------------.. 173,175 163, 165
Planning ------------------------------ 174, 186 163, 173
Through rearward position ---------------- 178,182, 184 167,170, 172
Zone of action -------------------------------- 102 101
Zone of withdrawal --------------------------- 170 161

258 AGO 3326B

 BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:

G. H. DECKER,
General, United States Army,
Official: Chief of Staff.
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.

Distribution:
Active Army:

I)CSPER (2) USATC Inf (25)

ACSI (2) USATC Armor (25)
D)CSOPS (10) Instl (5)
DCSLOG (2) USAWC (5)
ACSRC (2) USACGSC (3275)
CRD (1) USMA (5)
COA (1) Br Svc Sch (5) except
CINFO (1) USAIS (1977)
TIG (1) USAARMS (1250)
TJAG (1) USASCS (260)
TPMG (1) FSUSA (100)
Tech Stf, I)A (1) USAAVNS (10)
USCONARC (10) USACMLCSCH (10)
USA Maint Bd (2) USATSCH (170)
ARADCOM (2) PMGS (150)
ARADCOM Rgn (1) US ARADSCH (50)
OS Maj Comd (10) USACHS (200)
LOGCOMD (2) USAAMS (1100)
Armies (25) USAES (15)
MDW (25) USA Ord Sch (1450)
Corps (15) USASWS (40)
Div (20) USAINTC (7)
Div Arty (5) PMS Sr Div Units (1)
Combat Arm Bde (10) PMS Mil Sch Div Units (1)
Div Spt Comd (5) CDEC (5)
Div Bn/Sqd (5) MAAG (5)
Div Co/Btry/Trp (2) Mi! Msn (5)

NG: Div; Div Arty, Div Trains, Bde, Bg (3); Combat Comd, Regt, Gp (1); Inf
Bn (3); Inf Co, FA Btry, Engr Co, Troops (1).
USAR: Same as Active Army except allowance is one copy to each unit.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50,

* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1962-610518

AGO 3326B 259